Блог

1, 75; fut. “akṣiṣyati” or “akṣyati” ; aor. “ākṣīt”, 3. du. “ākṣiṣṭām” or

“āṣṭām” ; perf. “ānakṣa” [ 7-4, 60 ā. p. [with the Vedic weak stem “ākṣ”

cf. perf. “āś-uḥ” 3. pl. &c. fr. 1. “aś”] “ākṣāṇa”),; to reach ; to pass

through, penetrate, pervade, embrace ; to accumulate (to form the

cube?) Caus. “akṣayati, ācikṣat”, to cause to pervade Desid. “acikṣi,

ṣati” or “acikṣati”

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

akṣ 1. 5. P. [akṣati, akṣṇoti, ānakṣa, ākṣiṣyati-akṣyati, ākṣīt, akṣituṁ-

aṣṭuṁ akṣitvā-aṣṭravā, aṣṭa]

(1) To reach.

(2) To pass through, pervade, penetrate (mostly Ved. in these

senses).

(3) To accumulate, increase. –Caus. To cause to pervade.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aḍ 1 P. To try, exert, attempt.

(5) P. To pervade, attain (Ved.).

meaning “extraordinary”, (g. “ūry-ādi”, q.v.)

at cl.1.P. ā. “atati” (; p. “atat” or “atamāna”), to go constantly, walk, run

; to obtain

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

at 1 P. (aṁti), atati, atituṁ, atta-atita

(1) To go, walk; wander, to go constantly.

(2) To obtain (mostly Ved.)

(3) To bind.

(4) (aṁtati) To bind.

and inceptive particle (not easily expressed in English), now; then;

moreover; rather; certainly; but; else; what? how else? &c.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

atha (Ved. athā) ind. [arth-ḍa, pṛṣoda- ralopaḥ Tv.] A particle used at the

beginning (of works) mostly as a sign of auspiciousness, and translated

by ‘here,’ ‘now’ (begins) (maṁgala, āraṁbha, adhikāra). (Properly

speaking ‘auspiciousness’ or maṁgala is not the sense of atha, but the

very utterance or hearing of the word is considered to be indicative of

auspiciousness, as the word is suppossed to have emanated from the

throat of Brahmā: oṁkāraścātha śabdaśca dvāvetau brahmaṇaḥ purā .

kaṁṭhaṁ bhittvā viniryātau tena māṁgalikāvubhau .. and therefore we

find in Śaṅkara Bhāṣya arthāṁtaraprayuktaḥ athaśabdaḥ śrutyā

maṁgalamāracayati); atha nirvacanaṁ; atha yogānuśāsanaṁ;

athedaṁprārabhyate dvitīyaṁ taṁtraṁ Pt. 2. (usually followed by iti at

the end, iti prathamoṁkaḥ here ends &c.).

(2) Then, afterwards (ānaṁtarya) atha prajānāmadhipaḥ prabhāte

vanāya dhenuṁ mumoca R. 2. 1; often as a correlative of yadi or cet; na

cenmunikumāroyaṁ atha kosya vyapadeśaḥ S. 7; muhūrtādupari

upādhyāyaścedāgacchet atha tvaṁ chaṁdo ‘dhīṣva P. III. 3. 9. Sk.

(3) If, supposing, now if, in case, but if (pakṣāṁtara); atha

kautukamāvedayāmi K. 144, S. 5. 27; atha maraṇamavaśyameva jaṁtoḥ

kimiti mudhā malinaṁ yaśaḥ kurudhve Ve. 3. 4; atha gṛhṇāti S. 7; Ku. 5.

45; Mu. 3. 25; Ki. 1. 44; atha cāstamitā tvamātmanā R. 8. 51 while, but,

on the other hand; oft. followed by tataḥ or tathāpi, Bg. 12. 9, 11; 2. 26;

atha cet but if Bg. 2. 33; 18. 58.

(4) And, so also, as also, likewise (samuccaya); gaṇitamatha kalāṁ

vaiśikīṁ Mk. 1. 3; Ms. 2. 1. 31; bhīmo’ thārjunaḥ G. M.

(5) Used in asking or introducing questions (praśna), oft. with the

interrogative word itself; atha sā tatrabhavatī kimākhyasya rājarṣeḥ patnī

S. 7; arthavān khalu me rājaśabdaḥ . atha bhagavāṁllokānugrahāya

kuśalī kāśyapaḥ S. 5; atha śaknoṣi bhoktuṁ G. M.; athātrabhavatī

kathamitthaṁbhūtā M. 5; Bg. 3. 36; atha bhavaṁtamaṁtareṇa kīdṛśo

‘syā dṛṣṭirāgaḥ S. 2; atha māṭhavyaṁ prati kimevaṁ prayuktaṁ S. 6 (atha

may in these two sentences mean ‘but’).

(6) Totality, entirety (kārtsnya); atha dharmaṁ vyākhyāsyāmaḥ G. M.

we shall explain the whole dharma (dharma in all its details.).

(7) Doubt, uncertainty (saṁśaya, vikalpa); śabdonityo ‘thānityaḥ G.

M. The senses of atha usually given by lexicographers are: –athotha

syātāṁ samuccaye . maṁgale saṁśayāraṁbhādhikārānaṁtareṣu ca .

anvādeśe pratijñāyāṁ praśnasākalyayorapi .. Some of these senses are

indentical with those in

(1), while some are not in general use.

— Comp.

–api moreover, and again &c. (= atha in most cases); -ca

likewise, also.

–kiṁ what else, yes, exactly so, quite so, certainly; sarvathā

apsaraḥsaṁbhavaiṣā . atha kiṁ S. 1; api vṛṣalamanuraktāḥ prakṛtayaḥ

atha kiṁ Mu. 1.

–vā 1. or (used like the English disjunctive conjunction ‘or’ and

occupying the same place); vyavahāraṁ parijñāya vadhyaḥ pūjyo’thavā

bhavet H. 1. 58; samastairathavā pṛthak Ms. 7. 198; athavā-athavā

either-or; vātha is often used in the same sense with vā; kārtike vātha

caitre vā Pt. 3. 38; Ms. 7. 182; athāpi vā also used in the same sense;

etadeva vrataṁ kuryuścāṁdrāyaṇamathāpi vā 11. 118; 8. 287. 2. or

rather, or why, or perhaps, is it not so (correcting or modifying a previous

statement); why should there be any thought or hesitation about it, or it

is no wonder; api nāma kulapateriyamasavarṇakṣetrasaṁbhavā syāt .

athavā kṛtaṁ saṁdehena S. 1., 1. 16; gamiṣyāmyupahāsyatāṁ … athavā

kṛtavāgdvāre vaṁśe ‘smin R. 1. 3-4; athavā mṛduvastu hiṁsituṁ 8. 45;

dīrye kiṁ na sahasradhāhamathavā rāmeṇa kiṁ duṣkaraṁ U. 6. 40;

adhodho gaṁgeyaṁ padamupagatā stokamathavā . vivekabhraṣṭānāṁ

bhavati vinipātaḥ śatamukhaḥ Bh. 2. 10.

“attave” Caus. “ādayati” and “-te” (once “adayate” [) to feed ([cf. Lith.

‘edmi’; Slav. ‘jamj’ for ‘jadmj’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘edo’; Goth. root ‘AT’

pres. ‘ita’; Germ. ‘essen’; Eng. ‘to’ ‘eat’, Arm. ‘utem’]).

ad mfn. ifc. “eating”, as “matsyād”, eating fish.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ad 2 P. [atti, āda, –jaghāsa, aghasat, atsyati, attuṁ, anna, -jagdha,

jagdhvā]

(1) To eat, devour.

(2) To destroy.

(3) = aṁd, q. v. –Caus. To feed with, cause to eat; ādayatyannaṁ

baṭunā Sk. –Desid. jighatsati To wish to eat. [cf. L. edo, Gr. edo, Germ.

essen, Eng. eat; Lith. edmi, Sans. admi, Goth. at, Zend ad]. With ava to

satisfy by food, get rid of with feeding; (fig.) stop the mouth of. –ā to eat

&c. –pra –saṁ to use up, consume, devour; samadaṁtyāmiṣaṁ khagāḥ

Bk. 18. 12. –vi to gnaw.

ad –da a. (at the end of comp.) Eating, devouring; māṁsāda carnivorous,

feeding on flesh; so matsya-.

certainly, truly.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

addhā ind. [atyate at taṁ saṁtataṁ gamanaṁ jñānaṁ vā dadhāti kvip

Tv.]

(1) Truly, clearly, surely, undoubtedly, in truth, really, certainly,

indeed; addhā śriyaṁ pālitasaṁgarāya pratyarpayiṣyati R. 13. 65.

(2) Manifestly, clearly; vyālādhipaṁ ca yatate parirabdhumaddhā Bv.

1. 95.

(3) In this way, thus; -kṛ = sākṣātkṛ.

— Comp.

–puruṣaḥ A right or true man.

–bodheyāḥ (pl.) N. of a school of the Śukla Yajurveda.

–lohakarṇa a. having ears clearly or quite red.

“avi” q.v.)

adhi ind., as a prefix to verbs and nouns, expresses above, over and

above, besides. As a separable adverb or preposition; (with abl.) Ved.

over; from above, from; from the presence of; after ; for; instead of ,

(with loc.) Ved. over; on; at; in comparison with; (with acc.) over, upon,

concerning.

anuvid “anu-vid” cl.6.P. ā. “-vindati, -te”, to find, obtain, discover &c.; to

marry ; to deem

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

anuvid 6 U.

(1) To find, discover, see, obtain.

(2) To deem, consider.

(3) To marry.

antika mfn. (with gen. or abl.) near, proximate (compar. “nedīyas”,

superl. “nediṣṭha”)

antika n. vicinity, proximity, near e.g. “antikastha”, remaining near

antika mfn. (“āt”) ind. from the proximity

antika n. near, close by

antika n. within the presence of

antika mfn. (“e”) ind. (with gen. or ifc.) near, close by, in the proximity

or presence of

antika mfn. (“ena”) ind. (with gen.) near.

antika mfn. (fr. “anta”), only ifc. reaching to the end of, reaching to (e.g.

“nāsāntika”, reaching to the nose), lasting till, until.

am the termination “am” in the comparative and other forms used as

ind. e.g. “prataram”, &c., (g. “svar-ādi” q.v.)

am “amati”, to go ; to go to or towards ; to serve or honour ; to sound ;

(Imper. ā. 2. sg. “amīṣva”; aor. “āmīt”; cf. “abhy-am”) to fix, render firm ;

(perf. p. acc. sg. “emuṣam” for “emivāṁsam”) to be pernicious or

dangerous Caus. “āmayati” (impf. “āmayat”; aor. Subj. “āmamat”) to be

afflicted or sick (cf. “an-āmayat”).

am n. the root of a fragrant grass (used for tatties or screens, &c.,

commonly called Kaskas, Andropogon Muricatus).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

am ind.

(1) Quickly.

(2) A little.

am 1 P. [amati amituṁ, amita; Ved. pres. amiti; amīti]

(1) To go; to go to or towards.

(2) To serve, honour.

(3) To sound.

(4) To eat. (10) P. or Caus. (āmayati)

(1) To come upon, attack, afflict with sickness or pain from disease.

(2) To be ill or be afflicted or diseased. –With saṁ Ved. 1 A. 1. to

convince oneself of, ascertain. –2. to ally or connect oneself with.

(3) To fix or settle oneself.

ayās a. [fr. i ‘to go’ Nir.] Ved. Agile, nimble. –yāḥ ind. [i-āsiḥ Uṇ. 4. 221]

Fire.

ari mfn. ( “ṛ”), attached to faithful

ari m. a faithful or devoted or pious man

ari “a-ri” mfn. ( “rā”; = “ari”1, assiduous, &c., Gnm.), not liberal,

envious, hostile (“is”) m. an enemy &c.

ari “a-ri” mfn. (“aris”) m. id. , (in astron.) a hostile planet

mfn. N. of the sixth astrological mansion (in arithm.) the number six

(cf. “arāti”)

mfn. a species of Khadira or Mimosa

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ari a. [ṛ-in] Moving, going, reaching; obtaining, aspiring, devoted to,

zealous (Ved.). –riḥ

(1) An enemy, foe (cf. Uṇ. 4. 138); (used in the Veda like an adjective

in the sense of ‘ungenerous’, ‘malicious’, ‘not worshipping or devoted,’

‘hostile’); vijitāripuraḥsaraḥ R. 1. 59, 61; 4. 4.

(2) An enemy of mankind (said of the six feelings which disturb man’s

mind); kāmaḥ krodhastathā lobho madamohau ca matsaraḥ;

kṛtāriṣaḍvargajayena Ki. 1. 9.

(3) A species of khadira or Mimosa (viṭkhadira).

(4) N. of the number six (from the six enemies).

(5) N. of a condition in astronomy.

(6) Any part of a carriage.

(7) A wheel.

(8) A lord, master.

(9) The wind. (10) A pious or religious man.

— Comp.

–karṣaṇa a. tamer or subduer of enemies.

–kulaṁ 1. a host of enemies. –2. an enemy.

–gūrta a. Ved. ready for the destruction of enemies; praised by

devoted men or worshippers.

–ghnaḥ destroyer of enemies.

–ciṁtanaṁ, –ciṁtā schemes directed against enemies;

administration of foreign affairs.

–tra a. protecting from enemies.

–dhāyas a. possessed by lords only (i. e. very precious).

–naṁdana a. ‘an enemy’s joy’, affording triumph to an enemy.

–nipātaḥ invasion made by enemies.

–bhadraḥ the foremost or most powerful enemy; R. 14. 31.

–mardaḥ ‘crushing enemies’ N. of a plant (kāmamarda). —

mardana a. crushing or trampling foes, destroying enemies.

–medaḥ N. of a tree (viṭkhadira); N. of a country; Bṛ. S. 14. 2.

–medakaḥ N. of an insect bred in excrement.

–sthānakaṁ consternation, defeat.

–sūdanaḥ, –han, –hiṁsakaḥ destroyer of enemies; R. 9. 18.

3. pl. “ānarcuḥ” [ iii, 988, &c.], but Ved. “ānṛcuḥ” []; perf. ā. (Pass.)

“ānarce” [], but Ved. “sam ānṛce” [ i, 160, 4]; fut. p. “arciṣyat” [ iv, 251].

ind. p., “arcya” [ &c.; cf. or “arcitvā” [ iii, 77, 15], Ved. Inf. “ṛcase” [ vi,

39, 5 and vii, 61, 6]) to shine, brilliant ; to praise, sing (also used of the

roaring of the Maruts, and of a bull [ iv, 16, 3]) , to praise anything to

another (dat.), recommend ; to honour or treat with respect &c.; to

adorn exceptionally ā. (i. pl. “arcāmahe”) to honour : Caus. (2. sg.

“arcayas”) to cause to shine P. ā. to honour or treat with respect &c.:

Desid. “arciciṣati”, to wish to honour Ved. Pass. “ṛcyate” (p. “ṛcyamāna”)

to be praised

arc m. (instr. “arcā”) fn. shining, brilliant ([])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

arc 1 U. (arcati-te, ānarca, ārcīt, arcituṁ, arcita)

(1)

(a) To adore worship, salute, welcome with respect; R. 2. 21, 1. 6,

90; 4. 84, 12. 89; Ms. 3. 93; ārcīd dvijātīn paramārthaviṁdān Bk. 1. 15,

14. 63; 17. 5; yasyārcatyasau śāsanaṁ Mv. 1. 29 honours, respectfully

obeys.

(b) To honour, i. e. decorate, adorn; U. 2. 9.

(2) To praise (Ved.).

(3) To shine. (10) P. or Caus.

(1) To honour, adore, worship; svargaukasāmarcitamarcayitvā Ku. 1.

59.

(2) To praise.

(3) To cause to shine. –Desid. [arciciṣati] To wish to worship –WITH

anu to congratulate, hail with joy. –pra 1. to praise, sing praises of. –2.

to honour, worship; prānarcurarcyā jagadarcanīyaṁ Bk. 2. 20; (–caus.)

to honour. –saṁ 1. to worship, adore. –2. to fix, settle, establish.

moved, be scattered (as dust), R iv, 17, 2 and vii, 104, 24. cl.1. P.

“ardati” (“ardati”, “to go, move” to dissolve , (aor. “ārdīt” “anarda” to

torment, hurt, kill ; to ask, beg for (acc.) cl.7. “ṛṇatti”, to kill Caus.

“ardayati” (Subj. “ardayāsi”, Imper. 2. sg. ardaya, impf. “ādayat”, 2. sg.

“ardayas”; aor. “ārdidat”, or [after “ma”] ardayit to make agitated, stir

up, shake vehemently , to do harm, torment, distress &c. (generally used

in perf. Pass. p. “ardita” q.v.), to strike, hurt, kill, destroy Desid.

“ardidiṣati”; [Lat. ‘ardeo’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ard 1 P. [ardati, ānarda, ārdīt, ardituṁ, ardita or arṇa]

(1) To afflict, torment; strike, hurt, kill; rakṣaḥsahasrāṇi caturdaśārdīt

Bk. 12. 56, see caus. below.

(2) To beg, request, ask; nirgalitāṁbugarbhaṁ śaradghanaṁ nārdati

cātakopi R. 5. 17.

(3) To go.

(4) To move, be agitated or moved; be scattered (as dust); fly in

pieces, dissolve (Ved.). (The past participle is usually ardita, but arṇa

when the root is preceded by abhi, ni, vi, saṁ; cf. P. VII. 2. 24-5). –Caus.

(or 10 P.)

(1)

(a) To afflict, torment, distress; tata enaṁ mahāvegairardayāmāsa

tomaraiḥ Mb.; kāmārdita, kopa-, bhaya- &c.

(b) To strike, hurt, injure, kill; yenārdidat daityapuraṁ pinākī Bk. 2.

46; 9. 19; 15. 90.

(2) To stir up, rouse, agitate, shake vehemently, make agitated or

restless.

(3) To distort; ardayitvānilo vaktramarditaṁ janayatyataḥ Suśruta.

–WITH ati to torment excessively, fall upon or attack; atyārdīt vālinaḥ

putraṁ Bk. 15. 115. –abhi to distress, afflict, pain, oppress; abhyardito

vṛṣalaḥ (śītena pīḍitaḥ) P. VII. 2. 25 Sk. –ni Ved. to stream forth, flow

out. –pra to overwork, to work or exert oneself beyond measure; to

cause to flow away. –prati to oppress or press hard in return, assail in

return, return an attack. –vi Ved. to go or move away; to oppress,

harass, pain. (–caus.) to cause to be scattered or disolved, destroy,

annihilate. –saṁ caus. to pain greatly, wound, distress.

Ved. Inf. “arhase” [ x 77, 1]; perf. 3. pl. “ānarhuḥ” “ānṛhuḥ” [cf. “ānṛcuḥ,

arc”] to deserve, merit, be worthy of, to have a claim to, be entitled to

(acc.), to be allowed to do anything (Inf.); to be obliged or required to do

anything (acc.); to be worth, counterbalance, to be able; (“arhase”, 2.

sg. with an Inf. is often used as a softened form of Imper.; e.g. “dātum

arhasi”, “be pleased to give”; “śrotum arhasi”, “deign to listen”, for

śṛiṇu): Caus. (Opt. “arhayet” ; aor, “ārjihat” to honour. Desid. “arjihiṣati”

([cf. Gk. [greek] ]).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

arh 1 P. [arhati, arhituṁ, ānarha, arhita] (epic A. as rāvaṇo nārhate

pūjāṁ Ram.)

(1) To deserve, merit, be worthy of (with acc. or inf.); kimiva

nāyuṣmānamareśvarānnārhati S. 7; so daṁḍaṁ, prāyaścittaṁ, vadhaṁ

&c.

(2) To have a right to, be entitled to, be allowed to do any thing (with

acc.); nanu garbhaḥ pitryaṁ rikthamarhati S. 6; na strī

svātaṁtryamarhati Ms. 9. 3; also with inf.; na sa tallabdhumarhati Ms. 8.

147; 11. 7, 18.

(3) To be obliged or required to do a thing, oft. implying duty or

obligation; nānyatstrī dātumarhati Y. 2. 49; imāṁ prasādayitumarhasi R.

1. 88.

(4) To be fit or deserve to be done; arthanā mayi bhavadbhiḥ

kartumarhati N. 5. 112; Dk. 137.

(5) To be equal to; be worth, na te gātrāṇyupacāramarhaṁti S. 3. 18

are not equal to; sarve te japayajñasya kalāṁ nārhaṁti ṣoḍaśīṁ Ms. 2.

86; 3. 131.

(6) To be able, translateable by ‘can’; na me vacanamanyathā

bhavitumarhati S. 4; vināśamavyayasyāsya na kaścitkartumarhati Bg. 2.

17; anudyogena tailāni tilebhyo nāptumarhati H. Pr. 30 cannot get.

(7) To worship, honour; see caus. below.

(8) (Used with inf. in the second pers. and sometimes in the third) arh

represents a mild form of command, advice or courteous request, and

may be translated by ‘pray’, ‘deign’, ‘be pleased to’, ‘will be pleased to’;

dvitrāṇyahānyarhasi soḍhumarhan R. 5. 25 pray wait &c; nārhasi me

praṇayaṁ vihaṁtuṁ 2. 58; taṁ saṁtaḥ śrotumarhaṁti 1. 10 will be

pleased or be good enough to listen to it; Ku. 6. 32; Ms. 1. 2; Bg. 10. 16,

2. 17; R. 1. 72; 1. 88; 3. 46. –Caus. or 10 P. To honour, worship;

rājārjihattaṁ madhuparkapāṇiḥ Bk. 1. 17; Ms. 3. 3, 119.

to, competent, able. (“alam” may govern a dat. [“jīvitavai” (Ved. Inf.

dat.) “alam” “alaṁ jīvanāya” , sufficient for living] or Inf. [ 2-4, 66; “alaṁ

vijṇātum” “able to conceive” instr. [ 2-3, 27 ; “alaṁ śaṅkayā”, enough

i.e. away with fear!] or gen. [“alaṁ prajāyāḥ”, capable of obtaining

progeny or may be used with the fut. [“alaṁ haniṣyati”, he will be able

to kill or with an ind. [ 3-4, 18; “alaṁ bhuktvā”, enough of eating i.e. do

not eat more, “alaṁ vlcārya”, enough of consideration].)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

alam [al-ac]

(1) The sting in the tail of a scorpion.

(2) Yellow orpiment; cf. āla.

alam ind. [al-bāhu- am]

(1)

(a) Enough, sufficient for, adequate to (with dative or inf.);

tasyālameṣā kṣudhitasya tṛptyai R. 2. 39; Ku. 6. 82; anyathā prātarāśāya

kuryāma tvāmalaṁ vayam Bk. 8. 98; Śi. 2. 40, 106, 110; K. 133; Bh. 3.

22; Ms. 11. 77; R. 2. 39, 9. 32; 15. 64; Me. 64, 88.

(b) A match for, equal to (with dat.); daityebhyo hariralaṁ Sk.;

alaṁ mallo mallāya Mbh.

(2) Able, competent (with inf.); alaṁ bhoktuṁ Sk.; vareṇa śamitaṁ

lokānalaṁ dagdhuṁ hi tattapaḥ Ku. 2. 56; V. 3. 10; with loc. also;

trayāṇāmapi lokānāmalamasmi nivāraṇe Ram.

(3) Away with, enough of, no need of, no use of (having a prohibitive

force), with instr. or gerund; alamanyathā gṛhītvā M. 1. 20; alamalaṁ

bahu vikatthya M. 1; ālapyālamidaṁ babhroryatsa dārānapāharat Śi. 2.

40; alaṁ mahīpāla tava śrameṇa R. 2. 34; Ku. 5. 82; alamiyadbhiḥ

kusumaiḥ S. 4 so many flowers will do; Śi. 10. 75; sometimes used,

though less correctly, with the inf. in the same sense; alamātmānaṁ

khedayituṁ Ve. 2, 3; alaṁ suptajanaṁ prabodhayituṁ Mk. 3.

(4)

(a) Completely, thoroughly; arhasyenaṁ śamayitumalaṁ

vāridhārāsahasraiḥ Me. 53; tvamapi vitatayajñaḥ svargiṇaḥ prīṇayālam S.

7. 34; R. 10. 80; K. 169; Śi. 3. 58; 4. 39.

(b) Greatly, excessively, to a high degree; tudaṁti alam K. 2; yo

gacchatyalaṁ vidviṣataḥ prati Ak.; Mv. 6. 40; ityalamanvaśān munirmāṁ

Ki. 13. 13 again and again, pressingly.

(5) In vain.

(6) Surely, verily.

(7) In the sense of asti and bhūṣaṇa also.

— Comp.

–karmīṇa a. [alaṁ samarthaḥ karmaṇe kha] competent to do any

act; skilful, clever.

–kumāri a. [alaṁ kumāryai] sufficient to support a maiden

(dhanaṁ); P. I. 2. 44.

–kṛ, -kāra &c. see separately below.

–gāmin a. [alaṁ paryāptaṁ gacchati, ṇini] going after, following in

due or proper manner; P. V. 2. 15.

–jīvika a. [alaṁ jīvikāyai cata.] sufficient for livelihood.

–juṣa a. [alaṁjuṣyate karmaṇi bāhu- ka] sufficient, adequate to

eating.

–tama a. able, sufficient, having power.

–dhana a. [alaṁ prabhūtaṁ dhanamastyasya ac] possessing

sufficient wealth, rich; nirādiṣṭadhanaścettu pratibhūḥ syādalaṁdhanaḥ

Ms. 8. 162.

–dhūma a. [alamatyartho dhūmaḥ] thick smoke, volume of smoke.

–paśuḥ [alaṁ yajñe nirarthaḥ paśuḥ] a bad or useless animal (for

sacrifice). (–a.) able to keep cattle.

–puruṣīṇa a. [alaṁ samarthaṁ puruṣāya; svārthekha] 1. fit for a

man, becoming a man. 2. sufficient for a man. (

–ṇaḥ) a man who is chief of the opposite warriors in a battle.

–bala a. 1. strong enough, having sufficient power. –2. an epithet

of Śiva.

–buddhiḥ 1. sufficient sense. –2. false notion (mithyābuddhi). —

bhūṣṇu a. [alaṁ sāmarthye bhū-gsnu] able, competent;

vināpyasmadalaṁbhūṣṇurijyāyai tapasaḥ sutaḥ Śi. 2. 9.

1. “āvaḥ” [for 2. “āvaḥ” see “vṛ”]; perf. 3. sg. “āva”, 2. pl. “āva” “āvitha”;

aor. “avit”, 2. sg. “āvīs, avīs” and “aviṣas”, Imper. “aviṣṭu”, 2. sg.

“aviḍḍhi” [once “aviḍḍh” [six times in du. “aviṣṭam”, 3. du., 2. pl.

“aviṣṭanā” Prec. 3. sg. “avyās”, Inf. “avitave” ; Ved. ind. p. “āvyā” to

drive, impel, animate (as a car or horse) ; Ved.to promote, favour,

(chiefly Ved.) to satisfy, refresh; to offer (as a hymn to the gods) ; to

lead or bring to (dat.: “ūtaye, vāja-sātaye, kṣatrāya, svastaye”) ; (said of

the gods) to be pleased with, like, accept favourably (as sacrifices,

prayers or hymns) , (chiefly said of kings or princes) to guard, defend,

protect, govern &c.: Caus. (only impf. “avayat”, 2. sg. “āvayas”) to

consume, devour ([cf. Gk. [greek] Lat. ‘aveo’?]).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

av 1 P. [avati, āva, āvīt, aviṣyati, avituṁ, avita or ūta]

(1) To protect, defend; yamavatāmavatāṁ ca dhuri sthitaḥ R. 9. 1;

pratyakṣābhiḥ prapannastanubhiravatu vastābhiraṣṭābhirīśaḥ S. 1. 1.

(2) To please, satisfy, give pleasure to; do good to; vikramastena

māmavati nājite tvayi R. 11. 75; na māmavati sadvīpā ratnasūrapi medinī.

1. 65.

(3) To like, wish, desire, love.

(4) To favour, promote, animate. (In the Dhātupāṭha several other

meanings are assigned to this root, but they are very rarely used in

classical literature; e. g. gati, kāṁti, avagama, praveśa, śravaṇa,

svāmyartha or sāmarthya, yācana, kriyā, dīpti, avāpti, grahaṇa, vyāpti,

āliṁgana, hiṁsā, ādāna, dahana, bhāva, bhāga and vṛddhi). –Caus. To

consume, devour. –WITH anu to encourage, inspire. –ud 1. to regard,

attend to. –2. to wait for. –3. to promote, impel. –upa 1. to cherish,

behave friendly towards. –2. to encourage. –saṁ 1. to satisfy, satiate.

–2. to protect, maintain. [cf. L. aveo].

taritum” [e.g. ] or “-tartum” [e.g. ; ind. p. “-tīrya”) to descend into (loc.

or acc.), alight from, alight (abl.) ; to descend (as a deity) in becoming

incarnate ; to betake one’s self to (acc.), arrive at ; to make one’s

appearance, arrive ; to be in the right place, to fit ; to undertake: Ved.

cl.6. P. (Imper. 2. sg. “-tira”; impf. -atirat, 2. sg. “-atiras”, 2. du. “-

atiratam”; aor. 2. sg. “-tārīs”) to overcome, overpower Ved. cl.4. (p.

fem. “-tīyatī”) to sink Caus. “-tārayati” (ind. p. “-tārya”) to make or let

one descend, bring or fetch down (acc. or loc.) from (abl.) &c.; to take

down, take off, remove, turn away from (abl. ; “to set a-going, render

current” see “ava-tārita” below; to descend(?)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

avatṝ 1 P.

(1) To descend, alight, come down; rathādavatatāra ca R. 1. 54, 13.

68; vasan dadarśāvataraṁtamaṁbarāt Śi. 1. 1; yamunātaṭamavatīrṇaḥ

Pt. 1; meghapadavīmavatīrṇau svaḥ S. 7; kadaitadaṁvatariṣyati

cakraṁmastakāt Pt. 5; (fig. also); iti matireva na

boṁdhapadavīmavatarati K. 289 fails to see; vāgeva me

nābhidheyaviṣayamavatarati trapayā 151 I cannot speak for very shame

(2) To flow or run into, discharge contents, join (as a river); sāgaraṁ

varjayitvā kutra vā mahānadyavatarati S. 3; see avatīrṇa also.

(3) To enter, to enter into, to come to; M. 1. 22; Śi. 9. 32; tvadīyaṁ

deśamavatīrya M. 5.

(4) To begin, commence; avataratu bhavān Dk. 152;

tatpreyasīmāhūya saṁgītakamavatarāmi Dhūrt. 1.

(5) To present oneself, appear forth, come; prasabhamavatatāra

cittajanmā Ki. 10. 17.

(6) To descend (as a deity) into the world in the form of a mortal;

śāpāvatīrṇa Ks. 2. 21; munikanyā ca sā śāpāttasyāṁ jātāvavātarat 2. 31.

Rāj. T. 1. 130; 5. 66; viṣṇurevāvatīrṇosau Mārk. P.

(7) To get over, subdue, conquer; avatīrṇosmi yadrogamatidustaraṁ

Ks. 21. 194; ava tasya balaṁ tira Rv. 10. 133. 5. –Caus.

(1) To cause to descend, bring or fetch down; mārge

kathaṁcidavatārya Mu. 3. 9; rathāt, vṛkṣāt, śūlāgrāt &c.

(2) To take down, put or set down; avatāraya salilasamīpaṁ K. 38;

mātrāṁ kakṣāṁtarādavatārya Pt. 1; svabhujādavatāritā R. 1. 34;

avatāryatāṁ rathaḥ V. 1.

(3) To take off, remove, withdraw, put aside; svagātrādavatārya

bhūṣaṇāni Mu. 2, 5; athāṁgarājādavatārya cakṣuḥ R. 6. 30,

athorudeśādavatārya pādaṁ Ku. 3. 11, Śi. 9. 36.

(4) To bring downwards.

(5) To bend down.

(6) To introduce, set a-going, make current, begin; tena vidyāvatāritā

Raj. T. 4. 485; tatra tayā satre’vatārite 2. 58.

&c.]) pl. eight (other forms are: gen. “aṣṭānām” &c.; instr. “aṣṭabhis”

&c.; loc. “aṣṭāsu” ‘octo’; Gk. [greek]. Goth. ‘ahtau’; Mod. Germ. ‘acht’;

Eng. ‘eight’; Lith. ‘asztuni’; Slav. ‘osmj’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aṣṭan num. a. [aś-vyāptau kanin tuṭ ca Uṇ. 1. 154.] (nom. acc. aṣṭa-ṣṭau)

Eight. It often occurs in comp. as aṣṭā with numerals and some other

nouns; as aṣṭādaśan, aṣṭāviṁśatiḥ, aṣṭāpada &c. [cf. L. octo; Gr. okto;

Zend. astan; Pers. hasht.].

— Comp.

–akṣara a. consisting of eight letters or parts. (

–raḥ) N. of a metre.

–aṁga a. consisting of eight parts or members. (

–gaṁ) 1. the eight parts of the body with which a very low

obeisance is performed; -pātaḥ, –praṇāmaḥ, sāṣṭāṁganamaskāraḥ a

respectful obeisance made by the prostration of the eight limbs of the

body; sāṣṭāṁgapātaṁ praṇanāma fell prostrate on the ground in

reverence; (jānubhyāṁ ca tathā padbhyāṁ pāṇibhyāmurasā dhiyā . śirasā

vacasā dṛṣṭyā praṇāmo’ṣṭāṁga īritaḥ). –2. the 8 parts of yoga or

concentration; yamo niyamaścāsanaṁ ca prāṇāyāmastataḥ paraṁ .

pratyāhāro dhāraṇā ca dhyānaṁ sārdhaṁ samādhinā .

aṣṭāṁgānyāhuretāni yogināṁ yogasiddhaye … –3. materials of worship

taken collectively. –4. the eight parts of every medical science; (they are:

–śalyaṁ, śālākyaṁ, kāyacikitsā, bhūtavidyā, kaumārabhṛtyaṁ,

agadataṁtraṁ, rasāyanataṁtraṁ, and vājīkaraṇataṁtraṁ). –5. the eight

parts of a court; 1 the law, 2 the judge, 3 assessors, 4 scribe, 5

astrologer, 6 gold, 7 fire, and 8 water. –6. any whole consisting of eight

parts. –7. a die, dice. -arghyaṁ an offering of eight articles. -dhūpaḥ a

sort of medical incense removing fever. -maithunaṁ ‘sexual enjoyment of

8 kinds’; the eight stages in the progress of a love-suit; smaraṇaṁ

kīrtanaṁ keliḥ prekṣaṇaṁ guhyabhāṣaṇaṁ . saṁkalpo’dhyavasāyaśca

kriyāniṣpattireva ca … -hṛdayaṁ N. of a medical work.

–adhyāyī N. of Paṇinī’s grammatical work consisting of 8 Adhyayas

or chapters.

–ara a. having a wheel with 8 spokes.

–asraṁ an octagon.

–asriya a. octangular.

–aha(n) a. lasting for 8 days.

–ādiśābdikāḥ the first eight expounders of the science of words

(grammar); iṁdraścaṁdraḥ kāśakṛtsnāpiśalī śākaṭāyanaḥ .

pāṇinyamarajaineṁdrā jayaṁtyaṣṭādiśābdikāḥ … –kapāla a. (-ṣṭā-)

prepared or offered in ‘eight’ pans. (

–laḥ) a sacrifice in which ghee is offered in eight pans.

–karṇa a. one who has the number eight as a mark burnt in his

ears (P. VI. 3. 115). (

–rṇaḥ) eight-eared, an epithet of Brahmā.

–karman m.),

–gatikaḥ a king who has 8 duties to perform; (they are:

–ādāne ca visarge ca tathā praiṣaniṣedhayoḥ . paṁcame

cārthavacane vyavahārasya cekṣaṇe .. daṁḍaśuddhyoḥ sadā

raktastenāṣṭagatiko nṛpaḥ .. –kṛtvas ind. eight times.

–koṇaḥ 1. an octagon. –2. a kind of machine.

–khaṁḍaḥ a title of a collection of several sections of the Ṛgveda.

–gavaṁ [aṣṭānāṁ gavāṁ samāhāraḥ] a flock of 8 cows.

–gāḍh m. 1. a fabulous animal supposed to have eight legs. –2. a

spider.

–guṇa a. eightfold; annādaṣṭaguṇaṁ cūrṇaṁ;

dāpyoṣṭaguṇamatyayaṁ Ms. 8. 400. (

–ṇaṁ) the eight qualities which a Brāhmaṇa should possess; dayā

sarvabhūteṣu, kṣāṁtiḥ, anasūyā, śaucaṁ, anāyāsaḥ, maṁgalaṁ,

akārpaṇyaṁ, aspṛhā ceti .. Gautama. -āśraya a. endowed with these

eight qualities.

–ṣṭa (ṣṭā) catvāriṁśat a. forty-eight.

–taya a. eight-fold.

–tāriṇī the eight forms of the goddess tāriṇī; tārā cogrā mahogrā

ca vajrā kālī sarasvatī . kāmeśvarī ca cāmuṁḍā ityaṣṭau tāriṇyo matāḥ …

–triṁśat (–ṣṭā) a. thirty-eight.

–trikaṁ [aṣṭāvṛttaṁ trikaṁ] the number 24.

–dalaṁ 1. a lotus having eight petals. –2. an octagon.

–daśan (-ṣṭā-) see below after aṣṭātaya. –diś f. [karma-

saṁjñātvānna dviguḥ] the eight cardinal points; pūrvāgneyī dakṣiṇā ca

nairṛtī paścimā tathā . vāyavī cottaraiśānī diśā aṣṭāvimāḥ smṛtāḥ … –

kariṇyaḥ the eight female elephants living in the eight points;

kariṇyo’bhramukapilāpiṁgalānupamāḥ kramāt . tāmrakarṇī śubhradaṁtī

cāṁganā cāṁjanāvatī .. Ak. -pālāḥ the eight regents of the cardinal

points; iṁdro vahriḥ pitṛpatiḥ (yamaḥ) nairṛto varuṇo marut (vāyuḥ) .

kubera īśaḥ patayaḥ pūrvādīnāṁ diśāṁ kramāt .. Ak. -gajāḥ the eight

elephants guarding the 8 quarters; airāvataḥ puṁḍarīko vāmanaḥ

kumudoṁ’janaḥ . puṣpadaṁtaḥ sārvabhaumaḥ supratīkaśca diggajāḥ ..

Ak.

–dravyaṁ the eight materials of a sacrifice;

aśvatthoḍuṁbaraplakṣanyagrodhasamidhastilāḥ . siddhārthapāyasājyāni

dravyāṇyaṣṭau viṭurbudhāḥ … –dhātuḥ the eight metals taken

collectively; svarṇaṁ rūpyaṁ ca tāmraṁ ca raṁgaṁ yaśadameva ca .

śīsaṁ lauhaṁ rasaśceti dhātavo’ṣṭau prakīrtitāḥ … –pada –d (-ṣṭa or

ṣṭā-) a. 1. eight-footed. –2. a term for a pregnant animal.

–padaḥ (-ṣṭā-) 1. a spider. –2. a fabulous animal called Śarabha.

–3. a worm. –4. a wild sort of jasmin. –5. a pin or bolt. –6. the mountain

Kailasa (the abode of Kubera). (

–daḥ, –daṁ) [aṣṭasu dhātuṣu padaṁ pratiṣṭhā yasya Malli.] 1.

gold; āvarjitāṣṭāpadakuṁbhatoyaiḥ Ku. 7. 10; Śi. 3. 28. –2. a kind of

chequered cloth or a board for drafts, dice-board (Mar. paṭa); –

paricayacaturābhiḥ K. 196. -patraṁ a sheet of gold.

–pa (pā) dikā N. of a plant.

–padī (-ṣṭa-ṣṭā-) 1. wild sort of jasmin. –2. a variety of metre,

often used in Jayadeva’s Gītagovinda.

–palaṁ a kind of medicinal preparation of ghee.

–pādya a. (-ṣṭā-) eight-fold.

–maṁgalaḥ a horse with a white face, tail, mane, breast and

hoofs. (–laṁ) [aṣṭaguṇitaṁ maṁgalaṁ śā- ta-] a collection of eight lucky

things; according to some they are: mṛgarājo vṛṣo nāgaḥ kalaśo

vyaṁjanaṁ tathā . vaijayaṁtī tathā bherī dīpa ityaṣṭamaṁgalam ..;

according to others loke’sminmaṁgalānyaṣṭau brāhmaṇo gaurhutāśanaḥ .

hiraṇyaṁ sarpirāditya āpo rājā tathāṣṭamaḥ … –mānaṁ one kuḍava.

–māsika a. occurring once in 8 months.

–muṣṭiḥ a measure called kuṁci; aṣṭamuṣṭirbhavet kuṁciḥ, —

mūrtiḥ the ‘eight-formed’, an epithet of Śiva; the 8 forms being the 5

elements (earth, water, fire, air and ether), the sun and moon, and the

sacrificing priest; cf S. 1. 1–yā sṛṣṭiḥ sraṣṭurādyā vahati vidhihutaṁ yā

haviryā ca hotrī . yedve kālaṁvidhattaḥ śrutiviṣayaguṇā yā sthitā vyāpya

viśvaṁ . yāmāhuḥ sarvabhūtaprakṛtiriti yayā prāṇinaḥ prāṇavaṁtaḥ .

pratyakṣābhiḥ prapannastanubhiravatu vastābhiraṣṭābhirīśaḥ ..; or, briefly

expressed, the names in Sanskrit (in the above order) are: jalaṁ

vahnistathā yaṣṭā sūryācaṁdramasau tathā . ākāśaṁ vāyuravanī

mūrtayo’ṣṭau pinākinaḥ … -dharaḥ ‘having 8 forms’, Śiva.

–ratnaṁ the eight jewels taken collectively; the title of a collection

of 8 Ślokas on morality.

–rasāḥ the 8 sentiments in dramas &c.;

śṛṁgārahāsyakaruṇaraudravīrabhayānakāḥ . bībhatsādbhutasaṁjñau

cetyaṣṭau nāṭye rasāḥ smṛtāḥ .. K. P. 4 (to which is sometimes added a

9th Rasa called śāṁta; nirvedasthāyibhāvosti śāṁtopi navamo rasaḥ

ibid); -āśraya a. embodying or representing the eight sentiments; V. 2.

18.

–lohakaṁ a class of 8 metals; suvarṇaṁ rajataṁ tāmraṁ sīsakaṁ

kāṁtikaṁ tathā . vaṁgaṁ lauhaṁ tīkṣṇalauhaṁ lauhānyaṣṭāvimāni tu …

–vargaḥ 1. a sort of diagram (cakra) showing the good or bad stars of a

person. –2. the 8 classes of letters; (avarga, ka-, ca-, ṭa-, ta-, pa-, ya-,

śa-,). –3. a class of three principal medicaments.

–vakraḥ (ṣṭā) see below.

–vidha a. [aṣṭa vidhāḥ prakārāḥ asya] eight-fold, of eight kinds.

–viṁśatiḥ f. (-ṣṭā-) [aṣṭādhikā viṁśātiḥ śā. ta.] the number

twenty-eight.

–śataṁ eight hundred.

–śravaṇaḥ, –śravasa N. of Brahma (having 8 ears or four heads).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aśam ind. Ved. Non-welfare, harm, mischief.

as cl.2.P. “asti” (2. sg. “asi”, 1. sg. “asmi”; pl. “smasi” or “smas, stha,

santi”; (rarely ā. e.g. 1.pl. “smahe” ; Subj. “asat”; Imper. “astu”, 2. sg.

“edhi” (fr. “as-dhi” cf. ; Pot. “syāt”; impf. “āsīt”, rarely “ās” [only in ; cf. ;

perf. 1. and 3.sg, “āsa”, 2. sg. “āsitha”, 3. pl. “āsuḥ”; p. m. “sat” f. “satī”)

to be, live, exist, be present; to take place, happen; to abide, dwell, stay;

to belong to (gen. or dat.); to fall to the share of. happen to any one

(gen.); to be equal to (dat.) ; to turn out, tend towards any result, prove

(with dat.); to become &c., (cf. ; to be (i.e. used as copula, but not only

with adj., but also with adv. [e.g. “tūṣṇīm āsīt” , and often with part.,

[e.g. perf. Pass. p. “prasthitāḥ sma” ; fut. p.p. “hantavyo ‘smi” ; fut. p.

especially with Pot., and only in “yadi dāsyan-t-syāt”, “if he should intend

to give”]; the pf. “āsa” helps to form the periphrastic perf., and “asmi”

&c. the fut.); ([cf. Gk. [greek] Lat. ‘es-t’; Goth. ‘is-t’; Lith. ‘es-ti’.])

as cl.4.P. “asyati” (p. “asyat”; impf. “āsyat”, A.V. [cf. “parās” and “vy-

as”]; fut. p. “asiṣyat”; aor. “āsthat” [; cf. “vy-as”]; perf. P. “āsa” [cf.

“parās”] ā. “āse” [cf. “vy-as”]; Ved. Inf. “astave” to throw, cast, shoot at

(loc. dat., or gen) &c.; to drive or frighten away ; see also 1. “asta” s.v.

as “asati, -te” = “aṣ” q.v.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

as I. 2 P. [asti, āsīt, astu, syāt; defective in non-conjugational tenses, its

forms being made up from the root bhū].

(1) To be, live, exist (showing mere existence); nāsadāsīnno sadāsīt

Rv. 10. 129. 1; śrutidvaidhaṁ tu yatra syāt Ms. 2. 14; śapathe nāsti

pātakaṁ 8. 112; na tvevāhaṁ jātu nāsaṁ Bg. 2. 12; āsīdrājā nalo nāma

Nala. 1. 1; Ms. 5. 79; na as not to be, to be lost, disappear, perish,

nāyamastīti duḥkhārtā Nala. 7. 16; asti bhoktuṁ Sk. it has to be eaten;

(for other uses of asti see asti s. v.).

(2) To be (used as a copula or verb of incomplete predication, being

followed by a noun or adjective or adverb, or some other equivalent);

bhaktosi me sakhā ca Bg. 4. 3; dhārmike sati rājani Ms. 11. 11; ācārye

saṁsthite sati 5. 80; so evameva syāt, tūṣṇīmāsīt &c.

(3) To belong to, be in the possession of (expres. sed in English by

have), with gen. of possessor; yanmamāsti harasva tat Pt. 4. 76; yasya

nāsti svayaṁ prajñā 5. 70; na hi tasyāsti kiṁcitsvaṁ Ms. 8. 417; nāsti

buddhirayuktasya Bg. 2. 66.

(4) To fall to the share of, to happen to or befall any one (with gen.);

yadicchāmi te tadastu S. 4; tasya pretya phalaṁ nāsti Ms. 3. 139 he

cannot enjoy or get.

(5) To arise, spring out, occur; āsīcca mama manasi K. 142 (this)

occurred to my mind.

(6) To become; tāṁ dṛṣṭvā daśavistārāmāsaṁ viṁśatiyojanaḥ Ram.;

also śuklīsyāt, rājasāt syāt &c. Sk.

(7) To lead or tend to, turn out or prove to be (with dat.); sa sthāṇuḥ

sthirabhaktiyogasulabho niḥśreyasāyāstu vaḥ V. 1. 1; saṁgataṁ

śrīsarasvatyorbhūtayestu sadā satāṁ 5. 24; oft. with dat. alone without

as; yatastau svalpaduḥkhāya Pt. 1.

(8) To suffice (with dat.); sā teṣāṁ pāvanāya syāt Ms. 11. 86;

anyairnṛpālaiḥ paridīyamānaṁ śākāya vā syāllavaṇāya vā syāt

Jagannātha.

(9) To stay, reside, dwell, live; hā pitaḥ kvāsi he subhru Bk. 6. 11.

(10) To take place, happen.

(11) To be in a particular relation, to be affected (with loc.); kiṁnu

khalu yathā vayamasyāmevamiyamapyasmāt prati syāt S. 1. astu well, let

it be; evamastu, tathāstu so be it, amen. The form āsa joined to roots in

forming their periphrastic perfect is sometimes separated from the root

and used by itself; taṁ pātayāṁ prathamamāsa papāta paścāt R. 9. 61,

16. 86. [Cf. L. est and Gr. esti with asti; esse; Zend. āsti; Pers. hast,

ast]. –WITH ati to be over, excel, surpass. –anu to be at hand, reach. —

api (with loc. or an adv. of place) 1. to be in anything. –2. to belong to,

be closely connected with. –abhi 1. to belong to, to fall to one’s share;

yanmamābhiṣyāt Sk. –2. to be over. –3. to excel, surpass. –4. to

domineer or to tyrannize over, rule over. –āvis to arise, spring up, be

visible; ācāryakaṁ vijayi mānmathamāvirāsīt Mal. 1. 26. –upa to be near

to or in. –pari 1. to be in the way. –2. to surpass. –3. to pass or spend

(time). –4. to pervade. –pra 1. to be in front of. –2. to be in an

extraordinary degree, to preponderate, excel, surpass. –prati 1. to be

equal to, be a match for. –2. to rival, emulate, vie with. –3. to be a

representative of, stand in place of. –prādus to appear, spring up;

prādurāsīttamonudaḥ Ms. 1. 6; R. 11. 15. –vyati (Atm. vyatihe, vyatise;

vyatiste) to excel, surpass, be above or superior to, out-weigh; anyo

vyatiste tu mamāpi dharmaḥ Bk. 2. 35. –II 4 P. (asyati, āsa, āsthat,

asituṁ, asta)

(1) To throw, cast, hurl, discharge, shoot (with loc. of the mark);

tasminnāsthadiṣīkāstraṁ R. 12. 23; Bk. 15. 91, 14. 77; sometimes with

dat. or gen.; dasyave hetimasya Rv. 1. 103. 3.

(2) To drive away, remove.

(3) To frighten or scare away.

(4) To throw or take away, let go, leave, give up; as in astamāna,

astaśoka, astakopa; see asta. –WITH ati to shoot beyond or at,

overpower (with arrows); atyasta having shot beyond, having surpassed

or excelled; joined in acc. Tat. comp.; P. II. 1. 24. –abhipra to throw over

or upon, hurl at. –parini to stretch. –III. 1 U. (asati-te, asita).

(1) To go.

(2) To take or receive, seize.

(3) To shine (The examples usually cited to illustrate this sense are

niṣprabhaśca prabhurāsa bhūbhṛtāṁ R. 11. 81; tenāsa lokaḥ pitṛmān

vinetrā 14. 23; lāvaṇya utpādya ivāsa yatnaḥ Ku. 1. 35. But the sense of

didīpe or ‘shone’ is far-fetched, though Vamana is disposed to take it. It

seems preferable to regard āsa in these instances as equivalent to

babhūva, either taking it, as Śakaṭāyana does, as an indeclinable

tiṅaṁtapratirūpakamavyayaṁ, or considering it, as Vallabha does, as an

ungrammatical form used against the rules of grammar, prāmādikaḥ

prayogaḥ; see Malli. on Ku. 1. 35).

“āttha” () 3. du. “āhatuḥ” to say, speak &c.; (with lexicographers) to

express, signify; to call (by name, “nāmnā”) ; to call, hold, consider,

regard as (with two acc., for one of which may be substituted a phrase

with “iti”) &c.; to state or declare with reference to (acc.) ; to

acknowledge, accept, state ; to adjudge anything (acc.) to any one

(gen.), ‘ag-all’, “speech”; ‘eigh-im’, “I call”; Goth. ‘af-aika’, “I deny”; Lat.

‘nego’ for ‘n’-ego’, “to say no”; ‘ad-ag-ium’, ‘ajo’, &c.]

ah cl.5.P. “ahnoti”, to pervade or occupy

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ah I. 1 A. or 10 U.

(1) = aṁh q. v. –II. 1 P. To sing together, compose, celebrate,

prepare. –III. 5 P. (ahnoti, āhīt, āha) To pervade. –IV. (a defective verb

preserved only in five forms ātya, āhathuḥ, āha, āhatuḥ, āhuḥ)

(1) To say, speak, mention.

(2) To acknowledge, accept, state.

(3) To declare, express, signify.

(4) To hold, consider, regard.

(5) To call.

&c.) surely, certainly ; (as explaining, defining) namely ; (as admitting,

limiting, &c.) it is true, I grant, granted, indeed, at least ([For the rules

of accentuation necessitated in a phrase by the particle “aha” cf.

aha n. (only Ved.; nom. pl. “ahā” ; gen. pl. “ahānām” = “aḥar” q.v., a

day

n. often ifc. “aha” m. (e.g. “dvādaśāha, try-aha, ṣaḍ-aha”, &c.) or n.

(e.g. “puṇyāha, bhadrāha”, and “sudināha”)

aha n. see also “ahna” s.v.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aha ind. A particle implying

(a) praise (pūjā);

(b) separation;

(c) resolution, ascertainment, certainty; and translated by ‘surely,’

‘certainly,’ ‘yes,’ ‘well’;

(d) rejecting;

(e) sending;

(f) deviation from custom, impropriety; tvamaha grāmaṁ gaccha,

tvamaha rathetāraṇyaṁ gaccha Sk.; svayamaha rathena yāti 3

upādhyāyaṁ padātiṁ gamayati Sk.

ā ind. a particle of reminiscence ; also of compassion or pain [more

correctly written 1. “ās” q.v.], and of assent ([This particle remains

unaltered in orthography even before vowels (which causes it to be

sometimes confounded with 1. “ās”)

ā m. N. of śiva

m. grandfather

ā f. N. of Lakṣmī

ā (as a prefix to verbs, especially of motion, and their derivatives) near,

near to, towards (see “ā-kram” &c.; in the Veda, of course, the prefix is

separable from the verb; in a few cases , a verb in the imperative is to be

supplied; with roots like “gam, yā”, and “i”, “to go”, and 1. “dā”, “to

give”, it reverses the action; e.g. “ā-gacchati”, “e comes”; “ā-datte”, “e

takes”). (As a prep. with a preceding acc.) near to, towards, to ; (with a

preceding noun in the acc., as “joṣam” or “varam”) for ; (with a following

acc.) up to.. exclusively ; (with a preceding abl.) from ; out of, from

among (e.g. “bahubhya ā”, “from among many”) ; towards (only in

“asmad ā”, “towards us”) ; (with a following abl. cf. up to, to, as far as

&c.; from ; (with a preceding loc.) in, at, on (As an adv. after words

expressing a number or degree) fully, really, indeed (e.g. “trir ā divas”,

“quite or fully three times a day”; “mahimā vām indrāgnī paniṣṭha, ā”,

“your greatness, O Indra and Agni, is most praiseworthy indeed”, &c.) ;

(after a subst. or adj.) “as, like”, (or it simply strengthens the sense of

the preceding word) , (after a verb) ; (as a conjunctive particle)

moreover, further, and (it is placed either between the two words

connected [rarely after the second , or after both or, if there are more,

after the last [ iv, 57, 1 and x, 75, 5]; see also “ātaś ca” s.v.) In classical

Sanskṛit it may denote the limit “to”, “until”, “as far as”, “from”, either

not including the object named or including it (sometimes with acc. or

abl. or forming an adv.) e.g. “ā-maraṇam” or “ā-maranāt”, “till death”

(cf. “ā-maraṇānta” &c.); “ā-gopālā dvijātayaḥ”, “the twice-born including

the cowherds” ; “ā-samudram” or “ā-samudrāt”, “as far as the ocean” or

“from the ocean” (but not including it); “ā-kumāram”, “from a child” or

“from childhood” or “to a child” (cf. Lat. ‘a puero’) ; “ā-kumāram yaśaḥ

pāṇineḥ”, “the fame of Pāṇini extends even to children”; “ājānu-bāhu”

mfn. “one whose arms reach down to the knees” ; (see also “ākarṇa-”

and “ājanma-“); (cf. “ā-jarasam, ā-vyuṣam, ā-saptama, otsūyam”.)

Prefixed to adj. ([rarely to subst.; cf. “ā-kopa”]) it implies diminution “a

little” e.g. “ā-piṇjara” mfn. a little red, reddish ; (see also “ā-pakva,

oṣṇa”, &c.) Some commentaries (e.g. on occasionally give to “ā” in this

application the meaning “samantāt”, “all through, completely”, as “ā-

nīla”, “blue all round.”

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ā The second letter of the Alphabet.

ā

(1) Used as a particle or interjection showing

(a) assent; ‘yes’, ‘verily’.

(b) Compassion (anukaṁpā) ‘Ah’.

(c) Pain or regret (usually written ās or āḥ q. v.), ‘alas’.

(a) Recollection (smaraṇa) ‘Ah’, ‘Oh’; ā evaṁ kilāsīt U. 6.

(e) But (used as a disjunctive conjunction). f) And (used as a

cumulative conjunction).

(g) Sometimes used as an expletive; ā evaṁ manyase. In all these

senses ā is treated as a Pragṛhya vowel (does not form any Sandhi with a

following vowel) P. I. 1. 14.

(2) (As a prefix to verbs and nouns)

(a) it expresses the senses of near, near to, towards, from all

sides, all around (see the several verbs).

(b) With verbs of motion, taking, carrying &c. it shows the reverse

of the action; as gam to go, āgam to come; dā to give, ādā to take; nī to

carry, ānī to bring.

(3) (As a separable preposition with abl.) it shows either

(a) the limit inceptive (abhividhi), from, ever since, away from, out

of, off, from among; āmūlāt śrotumicchāmi S. 1; bahubhya ā from out of

many; ā janmanaḥ S. 5. 25 ever since (her) birth; ā manoḥ U. 6. 18.

(b) Or, it expresses the limit exclusive or conclusive (maryādā),

till, until, upto, as far as, unto; āṅ maryādābhividhyoḥ P. II. 1. 13; see

abhividhi; ā paritoṣādviduṣāṁ S. 1. 2 till the learned are satisfied; ā

kailāsāt Me. 11 upto or as far as Kailasa; odakāṁtāt S. 4; U. 1. 37; V. 2.

2. In this sense ā sometimes governs the acc.; śatamā jātīḥ upto a

hundred births.

(c) In both these senses ā frequently enters into compound,

forming either Avyayībhava comp. or compound adjectives; ābālaṁ (or ā

bālebhyaḥ) haribhaktiḥ commencing with or including children; āmukti (or

āmukteḥ) saṁsāraḥ Sk. till final emancipation; āmekhalaṁ Ku. 1. 5 as far

as.; āmaraṇaṁ Pt. 1 till death; āgopālaṁ nanṛtuḥ K. 70 down to the

cowherd; āgopālā dvijātayaḥ including the cowherds. Sometimes the

compound so formed stands as the first member of other compounds,

so’hamājanmaśuddhānāmāphalodayakarmaṇāṁ .

āsamudrakṣitīśānāmānākarathavartmanāṁ R. 1. 5; āgaṁḍavilaṁbi S. 6.

17; ākarṇalaṁbi M. 5. 10.

(d) Used with loc. it has the sense of ‘in’, ‘at’ (mostly Ved.); gāvo

na yavaseṣvā Rv. 1. 91. 13.

(4) With adjectives (or sometimes with nouns) ā has a diminutive

force; āpāṁḍura a little white, whitish; ālakṣya S. 7. 17 slightly visible;

ākaṁpaḥ gentle shaking; so ānīla, ārakta.

(5) (As a separable adverb) ā chiefly occurs in the Vedas and means

near, near to, or towards, there to, further; and also, even; in many

cases it emphasizes the word which precedes it, and when placed after

prepositions it strengthens their sense.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ākīm ind. Ved. From(with abl.); leaving, excluding.

“-kṣiyema”) to abide, dwell in (acc.), inhabit ; “-kṣeti”, to possess, take

possession of (acc.) cl.6. “-kṣiyati”, to exist

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ākṣi 2. 6. P. Ved.

(1) To abide, dwell in, stay (with).

(2) To be or exist.

(3) To possess.

pronounced as that letter in “kill” &c.

i ind. an interjection of anger, calling, sorrow, distress, compassion, &c.,

(g. “cādi”

i base of Nom. and Acc. sing. du. and pl. of the demonstrative pronoun

“idam”, “this” or “that”; ([cf. “itara, itas, iti” “id, idā, iyat, iva, iha”: cf.

also Lat. ‘id’; Goth. ‘ita’; Eng. ‘it’; Old Germ. ‘iz’; Mod. Germ. ‘es’.])

i m. N. of Kāmadeva

i cl.2.P. “eti” (Impv. 2. sg. “ihi”) and 1. P. ā. “ayati, ayate” ([cf. “ay”]),

(pf. “iyāya” [2. sg. “iyatha” “iyetha” fut. “eṣyati”; aor. “aiṣīt”; inf. “etum,

etave” and , “etavai” “etos” “ityai” to go, walk; to flow; to blow; to

advance, spread, get about; to go to or towards (with acc.), come &c.;

to go away, escape, pass, retire ; to arise from, come from ; to return (in

this sense only fut.) ; (with “punar”) to come back again, return &c.; to

succeed ; to arrive at, reach, obtain &c.; to fall into, come to; to

approach with prayers, gain by asking (cf. “ita”); to undertake anything

(with acc.); to be employed in, go on with, continue in any condition or

relation (with a part. or instr. e.g. “asura-rakṣasāni mṛdyamānāni yanti”,

“the Asuras and Rakshases are being continually crushed” ;

“gavāmayaneneyuḥ”, “they, were engaged in the [festival called]

Gavāmayana” ; to appear, be Intens. ā. “īyate” ( i, 30, 18; p. “iyāna” ;

inf. “iyadhyai” to go quickly or repeatedly; to come, wander, run, spread,

get about ; to appear, make one’s appearance ; to approach any one with

requests (with two acc.), ask, request Pass. “īyate”, to be asked or

requested Caus. “āyayati”, to cause to go or escape ; ([cf. Gk. [greek];

Lat. ‘e-o’, ‘i-mus’, ‘i-ter’, &c.; Lith. ‘ei-mi’, “I go”; Slav. ‘i-du’, “I go”, ‘i-ti’,

“to go”; Goth. ‘i-ddja’, “I went.”])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

i The third letter of the Devanāgarī alphabet.

i I. 2 P. (In Dhātup. written as iṇ) (eti, iyāya, agāt, etuṁ, ita)

(1) To go, go to or towards, come to or near; śaśinaṁ punareti

śarvarī R. 8. 56; īyurbharadvājamunerniketaṁ Bk. 3. 40.

(2) To arrive at, reach, obtain, attain to, go to or be reduced to a

particular state, fall into; nirbuddhiḥ kṣayameti Mk. 1. 14 goes to (ruin, is

ruined; so vaśaṁ, śatrutvaṁ, śūdratāṁ &c.

(3) To return.

(4) To go away, retire; elapse, pass.

(5) To spring from, come or arise from.

(6) To undertake anything (with acc.); satramāyan Vaj.

(7) To ask, beg.

(8) To be; to appear.

(9) To be employed in, go on with, be in a particular condition or

relation, with a part. or instr.; kṛṣaṁto ha sma vaivapaṁto yaṁti Śat. Br.;

gavāmayaneneyuḥ Katy. (10) To thrive, prosper. –II. 1 U. = ay q. v. –III.

4 A.

(1) To come, appear.

(2) To run, wander.

(3) To go quickly or repeatedly.

(4) To ask, request. –Caus. To cause to go or come. [cf. L. eo; Gr.

eimi with emi].

particle of affirmation) even, just, only; indeed, assuredly (especially, in

strengthening an antithesis, e.g. “yathā vaśanti devās tahed asat”, as the

gods wish it, thus indeed it will be ; “dipsanta id ripavo nāha debhuḥ”, the

enemies wishing indeed to hurt were in nowise able to hurt “id” is often

added to words expressing excess or exclusion (e.g. “viśva it”, every one

indeed; “śaśvad it”, constantly indeed; “eka it”, one only). At the

beginning of sentences it often adds emphasis to pronouns, prepositions,

particles (e.g. “tvam it”, thou indeed; “yadi it”, if indeed, &c.) “id” occurs

often in the ṛig-veda and Atharva-veda, seldom in the Brāhmaṇas, and its

place is taken in classical Sanskṛit by “eva” and other particles.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

id ind.

(1) A particle of affirmation, even, just, only; especially in

strengthening a statement; arthajña itsakalaṁ bhadramaśnute Nir.

(2) It is often added to words expressing excess or exclusion; viśva it,

eka it &c.

(3) At the beginning of sentences it often adds emphasis to pronouns,

prepositions &c. (Its place is taken by eva in classical Sanskrit).

sleep cl.10. P. “ilayati” (Impv. 2. pl. “ilayatā” or “elayati” ( 3-1, 51) aor.

“aililat” or “ailayīt”, to keep still, not to move; to become quiet ; ([a

various reading has the form “iL”: cf. Old Germ. ‘illu’, ‘Illo’, for ‘Ilju’; Mod.

Germ. ‘Eile’; Cambro-Brit. ‘il’, “progress, motion”; Gk. [greek] ])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

il 6 P. (ilati, iyela, ailīt, elituṁ, ilita) or 10 U. (ilayati or elayati, ailayīt or

aililat).

(1) To go, to move.

(2) To sleep.

(3) To throw, send, cast.

(4) To keep still, not to move.

(5) To become quiet. [cf. Germ. Eile, Gr. elao].

seek, search cl.4. P. “iṣyati” and 9. P. ā. “iṣṇāti” (p. “iṣṇat” “iṣṇāna” ; pf.

3. pl. “īṣus” “īṣire” ; “aiṣīt”; inf. “iṣadhyai” to cause to move quickly, let

fly, throw, cast, swing ; to send out or off, stream out, pour out,

discharge; to deliver (a speech), announce, proclaim ; to impel, incite,

animate, promote

iṣ ifc. mfn. moving quickly, speedy. see “aram-iṣ”.

iṣ cl.6.P., ep. and Ved. also ā. “ic-chati” (Subj. “icchāt” , “icchate” ( xi, 5,

17; impf. “aicchat, iyeṣa” and “īṣe, eṣiṣyate, aiṣīt, eṣitum” or “eṣṭum”), to

endeavour to obtain, strive, seek for ; to endeavour to make favourable;

to desire, wish, long for, request; to wish or be about to do anything,

intend &c.; to strive to obtain anything (acc.) from any one (abl. or loc.);

to expect or ask anything from any one &c.; to assent, be favourable,

concede ; to choose ; to acknowledge, maintain, regard, think Pass.

“iṣyate”, to be wished or liked; to be wanted &c.; to be asked or

requested; to be prescribed or ordered ; to be approved or

acknowledged; to be accepted or regarded as &c.; to be worth; to be

wanted as a desideratum see 2. “iṣṭi”: Caus. “eṣayati”, (in surg.) to

probe Desid. “eṣiṣiṣati”; [with “iṣ” cf. Old Germ. ‘eiscom’, “I ask”; Mod.

Germ. ‘heische’; Angl. Sax. ‘asciani’ cf. also Gk. [greek]; Lith. ‘jeskoti’;

Russ. ‘iskate’, “to seek.”]

iṣ mfn. ifc. seeking for (see “gav-iṣ, paśv-iṣ”, &c.)

iṣ f. wish ([cf. “iṭ-cara”]).

iṣ f. anything drunk, a draught, refreshment, enjoyment

f. libation

f. the refreshing waters of the sky

f. sap, strength, freshness, comfort, increase

f. good condition, affluence

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

iṣ I. 6 P. (icchati, iyeṣa, aiṣīt, eṣituṁ-eṣṭuṁ, iṣṭa)

(1) To wish, desire, long for; icchāmi saṁvardhitamājñayā te Ku. 3. 3;

oft. with pot. or imperat. mood; icchāmi bhuṁjīta or bhuṁktāṁ bhavān;

bhuṁjīyetīcchati Sk.

(2) To choose; mūtreṇa mauṁḍyamicchet tu kṣatriyaṁ daṁḍameva

vā Ms. 8. 384.

(3) To endeavour to obtain, strive or seek for; bhūtimicchatā, svargaṁ

&c.

(4) To be willing, be about to do anything, mean or intend (with. inf.).

(5) To ask or expect anything (acc.) from any one (loc. or abl.);

deveṣu yajñe bhāgamīṣire Śat. Br.

(6) To acknowledge, regard.

(7) To request, ask.

(8) To be favourable.

(9) To try to make favourable. (10) To assent or consent. –pass.

(1) To be wished or liked.

(2) To be asked, or requested.

(3) To be prescribed or laid down; hastacchedanamiṣyate Ms. 8. 322;

trirātraṁ daśarātraṁ vā śāvamāśaucamiṣyate Y. 3. 18.

(4) To be approved, accepted, or regarded as; jaṁbho daṁtepi

ceṣyate Trik. –II. 4 P. (iṣyati, iyeṣa, eṣiṣyati, eṣituṁ)

(1) To move; to cause to move.

(2) To let fly, cast, throw.

(3) To raise (as one’s voice).

(4) To sprinkle. –III. 9 P. (iṣṇāti)

(1) To cause to move quickly, let fly, cast.

(2) To fly off, escape.

(3) To strike, smite.

(4) To impel, urge, incite, animate, promote. –IV. 1 U. (eṣati-te,

aiṣīt-aiṣiṣṭa) To go, move.

iṣ a.

(1) Speedy, going quickly.

(2) Wishing, desirous. –f. Ved.

(1) A draught, refreshment, food.

(2) Libation.

(3) Strength, power, sap, freshness.

(4) Comfort; increase.

(5) Affluence.

(6) Refreshing waters of the sky.

(7) Wish.

aor. “aiḍiṣṭa”. inf. “īḍitum”, Ved. “īLe”, &c.) to implore, request, ask for

(with two acc.); to praise &c.: Caus. P. “īḍayati”, to ask; to praise

īḍ f. praise, extolling

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

īḍ 2 A. (īṭṭe, īḍāṁcakre, aiḍiṣṭa, īḍituṁ, īḍita)

(1) To praise; agnimīḍe purohitaṁ Rv. 1. 1. 1;

śālīnatāmavrajadīḍyamānaḥ R. 18. 17; neḍiṣe yadi kākutsthaṁ Bk. 9. 57,

18. 15.

(2) To implore, request, ask for (with two acc.); upasthāya

mātaramannamaiṭṭa Rv. 3. 48. 3. –Caus.

(1) To ask.

(2) To praise.

īḍ f. Refreshment, libation.

restriction (generally after short words at the beginning of a period, or

after the relative pronouns, the conjunction “yad”, prepositions and

particles such as “āt, uta, atha”, &c.) “īm” has also the sense “now” (=

“idānīm”), and is by sometimes considered as an acc. case for “enam”

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

īm ind. [ī-bā- muc] Ved.

(1) A particle of affirmation or restriction; usually after short words at

the beginning of a sentence, after yat, relative pronouns, prepositions and

particles like uta, atha &c.

(2) Now.

(3) This, here (enaṁ).

inf. “iradhyai” , to go, move, rise, arise from ; to go away, retire ; to

agitate, elevate, raise (one’s voice) Caus. P. “īrayati” (cf. “īl”), to

agitate, throw, cast; to excite &c.; to cause to rise; to bring to life; to

raise one’s voice, utter, pronounce, proclaim, cite &c.; to elevate ā. to

raise one’s self

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

īr 2 A. (irte, īrāṁcakre, airiṣṭa, īrituṁ, īrṇa); also 1 P. (p. p. īrita)

(1) To go, move, shake (trans. also).

(2) To rise, arise or spring from.

(3) To go away, retire.

(4) To agitate, elevate; raise one’s voice. (10) U. or Caus. (īrayati,

īrita)

(1) To agitate, throw, cast; Śi. 8. 39; discharge, dart, hurl; airiracca

mahādrumaṁ Bk. 15. 52; R. 15. 20.

(2) To excite, prompt, urge; Bk. 12. 6.

(3) To cause to rise, produce.

(4) To utter, pronounce, proclaim, say, repeat; Māl. 1. 25; itīrayaṁtīva

tayā niraikṣi N. 14. 21; Śi. 9. 69; Ki. 1. 26; R. 9. 8; nibodha cemāṁ

giramīritāṁ mayā Sāv. 5. 23.

(5) To cause to go, set in motion, move, shake;

vāteritapallavāṁgulibhiḥ S. 1; aparāgasamīraṇeritaḥ Ki. 2. 50; Śi. 8. 20.

(6) To draw towards, attract; Śi. 10. 32.

(7) To employ, use.

(8) To bring to life, revive.

(9) To elevate. (10) To raise oneself (A.).

pf. 3. pl. “īśire, īśiṣyati, īśitum”) to own, possess ; to belong to ; to

dispose of, be valid or powerful; to be master of (with gen., or Ved. with

gen. of an inf., or with a common inf., or the loc. of an abstract noun)

&c.; to command; to rule, reign &c.; to behave like a master, allow ;

([cf. Goth. ‘aigan’, “to have”; Old Germ. ‘eigan’, “own”; Mod. Germ.

‘eigen’.])

īś m. master, lord, the supreme spirit

m. N. of śiva.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

īś 2 A. (īṣṭe, īśāṁcakre, aiśiṣṭa, īśitā, īśituṁ, īśita)

(1) To rule, be master of, govern, command (with gen.) nāyaṁ

gātrāṇāmīṣṭe K. 312 v. l.; arthānāmīśiṣe tvaṁ vayamapi ca girāmīśmahe

yāvadarthaṁ Bh. 3. 30; sometimes with acc.; imāṁllokānīśata īśanībhiḥ

Śvet. Up. (also used in the Veda with gen. of an infinitive or loc. of an

abstract noun).

(2) To be able, have power; expressed by ‘can’; mādhuryamīṣṭe

hariṇān grahītuṁ R. 18. 13, 14. 38; kamiveśate ramayituṁ na guṇāḥ Ki.

6. 24; U. 7. 4; Śi. 1. 38; Mal. 10. 13.

(3) To act like a master, allow.

(4) To own, possess.

(5) To belong to.

īś m. A master, lord, the Supreme spirit.

‘u’ in ‘full’.

u ind. an interjection of compassion, anger ; a particle implying assent,

calling, command

u ind. an enclitic copula used frequently in the Vedas; (as a particle

implying restriction and antithesis, generally after pronominals,

prepositions, particles, and before “nu” and “su”, equivalent to) and, also,

further; on the other hand (especially in connexion with a relative e.g. “ya

u”, he on the contrary who &c.) This particle may serve to give emphasis,

like “id” and “eva”, especially after prepositions or demonstrative

pronouns, in conjunction with “nu, vai, hi, cid”, &c. (e.g. “ayam u vām

purutamo”.. “johavīti” [ iii, 62, 2], this very person [your worshipper]

invokes you &c.) It is especially used in the figure of speech called

Anaphora, and particularly when the pronouns are repeated (e.g. “tam u

stuṣa indram tam gṛṇīṣe” [ ii, 20, 4], him I praise, Indra, him I sing). It

may be used in drawing a conclusion, like the English “now” (e.g. “tad u

tathā na kuryāt” [ v, 2, 2, 3], that now he should not do in such a

manner), and is frequently found in interrogative sentences (e.g. “ka u

tac ciketa” [ i, 164, 48], who, I ask, should know that?) Pāṇini calls this

particle “uṇ” to distinguish it from the interrogative “u”. In the Pada-

pāṭha it is written “ūm”. In the classical language “u” occurs only after

“atha, na”, and “kim”, with a slight modification of the sense, and often

only as an expletive (see “kim”); “u” – “u” or “u” – “uta”, on the one hand

– on the other hand; partly – partly; as, well – as.

u cl.5.P. “unoti” (see “vy-u” cl.2. ā. (1. sg. “uve” cl.1. ā. “avate” ; to call

to, hail; to roar, bellow (see also “ota” = “ā-uta”).

u m. N. of śiva

m. also of Brahman

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

u I. 1 A. (avate, ūve, auṣṭa, otuṁ, uta]

(1) To sound, make a noise.

(2) To roar, bellow (as a bull &c.). –II. 5P. (unoti) Ved. To ask,

demand.

[; for “vavakṣa” &c. see “vakṣ”]; “aukṣat” and “aukṣīt, ukṣitum”) to

sprinkle, moisten, wet &c.; to sprinkle or scatter in small drops; to emit;

to throw out, scatter (as sparks) &c.; to emit seed (as a bull); to be

strong Caus. ā. “ukṣayate”, to strengthen ([cf. Lith. ‘Ukana’: Hib. ‘uisg’,

‘uisge’, “water, a river”; ‘uisgeach’, “aquatic, watery, fluid, moist,

pluvial:” Gk. [greek]: Lat. ‘uveo’ (for ‘ugveo’), ‘Umor’, &c.])

ukṣ mfn. ifc. dropping, pouring see “bṛhad-ukṣ”

mfn. becoming strong see “sākam-ukṣ”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ukṣ 1. 6. U. (ukṣati, ukṣāṁcakāra, vavakṣa-kṣe Ved., aukṣīt, ukṣituṁ,

ukṣita)

(1) To sprinkle, wet, moisten, pour down upon; aukṣan

śoṇitamaṁbhodāḥ Bk. 17. 9, 3. 5; Śi. 5. 30; R. 11. 5, 20; Ku. 1. 54.

(2) To emit, send forth.

(3) To scatter, throw out (as sparks).

(4) To clean, purify.

(5) To grow up, become strong (Ved.).

238. “a”), upper, higher, superior (e.g. “uttare dantās”, the upper teeth)

&c.

mfn. northern (because the northern part of India is high) &c.

mfn. left (opposed to “dakṣiṇa” or right, because in praying the face

being turned to the east the north would be on the left hand) &c.

mfn. later, following, subsequent, latter, concluding, posterior, future

&c. (opposed to “pūrva”, &c. e.g. “uttaraḥ kālaḥ”, future time; “uttaraṁ

vākyam”, a following speech, answer, reply; “phalam uttaram”,

subsequent result, future consequence; “varṣottareṣu”, in future years)

mfn. followed by (e.g. “smottara” mfn. followed by “”sma””

mfn. superior, chief, excellent, dominant, predominant, more powerful

mfn. gaining a cause (in law)

mfn. better, more excellent

uttara m. N. of a son of Virāṭa

uttara m. of a king of the Nāgas

uttara m. N. of a mountain

uttara m. of several men

uttara m. pl. N. of a school

uttara m. (“ā”), of. (scil. “diś”) the northern quarter, the north &c.

uttara m. N. of each of the Nakshatras that contain the word “”uttara””

(cf. “uttara-phalgunī”, &c.)

uttara m. N. of a daughter of Virāṭa and daughter-in-law of Arjuna

uttara m. of a female servant

uttara mfn. (“e”) f. du. the second and third verse of a Tṛica (or a stanza

consisting of three verses)

uttara n. upper surface or cover &c.

uttara n. the north

uttara n. the following member, the last part of a compound

uttara n. answer, reply &c.

uttara n. (in law) a defence, rejoinder, a defensive measure

uttara n. contradiction

uttara n. (in the Mimāṁsā philosophy) the answer (the fourth member of

an adhikaraṇa or case)

uttara n. superiority, excellence, competency &c.

uttara n. result, the chief or prevalent result or characteristic, what

remains or is left, conclusion, remainder, excess, over and above, (often

ifc. e.g. “bhayottara”, attended with danger, having danger as the result;

“dharmottara”, chiefly characterized by virtue; “ṣaṣṭy-uttaraṁ sahasram”,

one thousand with an excess of sixty, i.e. 1060; “saptottaraṁ śatam”,

107)

uttara n. remainder, difference (in arithmetic)

uttara n. N. of a song

uttara n. N. of each of the Nakshatras that contain the word “”uttara””

uttara n. a particular figure in rhetoric

uttara n. N. of the last book of the Rāmāyaṇa

uttara n. “asrottaram īkṣitā”, looked at with tears at the close i.e. with a

glance ending in tears

uttara n. afterwards, thereafter

uttara n. behind

uttara n. in the following part (of a book)

uttara n. ([cf. Gk. [greek]. ])

uttara &c. see p.178, col.1; for 2. see “ut-tṝ”, col.2.

uttara “ut-tara” mfn. (for 1. see p.178, col.1), crossing over

mfn. to be crossed (cf. “dur-uttara”).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

uttara a. [ud-tarap]

(1) Being or produced in the north, northern (declined like a pronoun).

(2) Upper, higher (opp. adhara); uttareadhare daṁtāḥ Śat. Br.;

avanatottarakāyaṁ R. 9. 60; P. II. 2. 1.

(3)

(a) Laterlatter, following, subsequent (opp. pūrva); pūrvameghaḥ,

uttarameghaḥ, -bhīmāṁsā; uttarārdhaḥ &c.; -rāmacaritaṁ later

adventures of Rāma U. 1. 2; pūrvaḥ-uttaraḥ former-latter H. 1. 9; Ms. 2.

136.

(b) Future, concluding; -kālaḥ subsequent time; -phalaṁ; –

vacanaṁ a reply.

(4) Left (opp. dakṣiṇa).

(5) Superior, chief, excellent; dominant, powerful.

(6) Exceeding, transgressing, beyond; tarkottarāṁ Mv. 2. 6.

(7) More, more than (generally as the last member of a comp. with

numerals); ṣaḍuttarā viṁśatiḥ 26; aṣṭottaraṁ śataṁ 108.

(8) Accompanied or attended with, full of, consisting chiefly of,

followed by (at the end of comp); rājñāṁ tu caritārthatā duḥkhottaraiva

S. 5; caṣakottarā R. 7. 49; asrottaramīkṣitāṁ Ku. 5. 61; utsavottaro

maṁgalavidhiḥ Dk. 39, 166; K. 311; H. 1. 150; pravāla- puṣpaśayye R. 6.

50 over spread with; dharmottaraṁ 13. 7 rich in; 18. 7; kaṁpa- 13. 28;

17. 12; 19. 23.

(9) To be crossed over. –raḥ

(1) Future time, futurity.

(2) N. of Viṣṇu.

(3) N. of Śiva. –rā

(1) The north; astyuttarasyāṁ diśi devatātmā Ku. 1. 1.

(2) A lunar mansion.

(3) N. of the daughter of Virāṭa and wife of Abhimanyu. –raṁ

(1) An answer, reply; pracakrame ca prativaktumuttaraṁ R. 3. 47;

uttarāduttaraṁ vākyaṁ vadatāṁ saṁprajāyate Pt. 1. 60 a reply is

suggested to a reply.

(2) (In law) Defence, a rejoinder.

(3) The last part or following member of a compound.

(4) (In Mīm.) The fourth member of an adhikaraṇa q. v.; the answer.

(5) The upper surface or cover.

(6) Conclusion.

(7) Remainder, rest, what followed or took place next; U. 3. 26.

(8) Superiority, excellence.

(9) Result, the chief or prevalent result or characteristic. (10) Excess,

over and above; see above (uttara a. 8).

(11) Remainder, difference (in arith.). –raṁ ind.

(1) Above.

(2) Afterwards, after; tata uttaraṁ, ita uttaraṁ &c.

— Comp.

–adhara a. higher and lower (fig. also). (

–rau du.) the upper and under lip, the two lips; punarvivakṣuḥ

sphuritottarādharaḥ Ku. 5. 83; (spharaṇabhūyiṣṭho’dharo yasya Malli.).

–adhikāraḥ, –ritā, –tvaṁ right to property, heirship, inheritance.

–adhikārin m. an heir or claimant (subsequent to the death of the

original owner).

–aparā north-west.

–ayanaṁ (-yaṇaṁ na being changed to ṇa) 1. the progress of the

sun to the north (of the equator); Bg. 8. 24. –2. the period or time of the

summer solstice.

–araṇiḥ, –ṇī f. the upper araṇi (which by cutting becomes the

pramaṁtha or churner).

–artha a. for the sake of what follows.

–ardhaṁ 1. the upper part of the body. –2. the northern part. –3.

the latter half (opp. pūrvārdha). –4. the further end.

–ardhya a. being on the northern side.

–ahaḥ the following day.

–ābhāsaḥ a false reply, an indirect, evasive, or prevaricating reply.

-tā, –tvaṁ the semblance of a reply without reality.

–āśā the northern direction. -adhipatiḥ, –patiḥ the regent of the

northern direction, an epithet of Kubera.

–āṣāḍhā the 21st lunar mansion consisting of three stars.

–āsaṁgaḥ 1. an upper garment; kṛtottarāsaṁgaṁ K. 43; Śi. 2. 19;

Ku. 5. 16. –2. contact with the north.

–itara a. other than uttara i. e. southern. (

–rā) the southern direction.

–uttara a. [uttarasmāduttaraḥ] 1. more and more, higher and

higher, further and further. –2. successive, ever increasing; -snehena

dṛṣṭaḥ Pt. 1; Y. 2. 136. (

–raṁ) 1. a reply to an answer, reply on reply; alamuttarottareṇa

Mu. 3. –2. conversation, a rejoinder. –3. excess, exceeding quantity or

degree. –4. succession, gradation, sequence. –5. descending. (

–raṁ) ind. higher and higher, in constant continuation, more and

more; uttarottaramutkarṣaḥ K. P. 10; uttarottaraṁ vardhate H. 1.

–uttarin a. 1. ever-increasing. –2. one following the other.

–oṣṭhaḥ the upper lip (u ttaro-rau-ṣṭhaḥ). –kāṁḍaṁ the seventh

book of the Ramayaṇa.

–kāyaḥ the upper part of the body; R. 9. 60.

–kālaḥ 1. future time. –2. time calculated from one full moon to

another.

–kuru (m. pl.) one of the nine divisions of the world, the country of

the northern Kurus (said to be a country of eternal beatitude).

–kosalāḥ (m. pl.) the northern Kosalas;

pituranaṁtaramuttarakosalān R. 9. 1.

–kośalā the city of Ayodhyā; yadupateḥ kva gatā mathurā purī

raghupateḥ kva gatottarakośalā .. Udb.

–kriyā funeral rites, obsequies.

–khaṁḍaṁ the last section or book.

–khaṁḍanaṁ refutation.

–graṁthaḥ supplement to a work.

–chadaḥ a bed-covering, covering (in general); R. 5. 65, 17. 21;

nāgacarmottaracchadaḥ Mb.

–ja a. born subsequently or afterwards; Y. 1. 59.

–jyā the versed sine of an arc (Wilson); the second half of the

chord halved by the versed sine (B. and R.).

–jyotiṣāḥ (m. pl.) the northern Jyotishas.

–taṁtraṁ N. of a supplementary section in the medical work of

Suśruta.

–dāyaka a. replying, disobedient, pert, impertinent; H. 2. 121.

–diś f. the north. -īśaḥ, –pālaḥ 1. Kubera, the regent of the north.

–2. the planet budha. -balin 1. the planet Venus. –2. the moon.

–deśaḥ the country towards the north.

–dheya a. to be done subsequently.

–pakṣaḥ 1. the northern wing or side. –2. the dark half of a lunar

month. –3. the second part of an argument, i. e. a reply, the reason pro.

(opp. pūrvapakṣa); prāpayan pavanavyādhergiramuttarapakṣatām Śi. 2.

15. –4. a demonstrated truth or conclusion –5. the minor proposition in a

syllogism. –6. (in Mīm.) the fifth member of an Adhikarana q. v.

–paṭaḥ 1. an upper garment. –2. a bed-covering (uttaracchadaḥ).

–pathaḥ the northern way, way leading to the north.

–pathika a. travelling in the northern country.

–padaṁ 1. the last member of a compound. –2. a word that can

be compounded with another.

–padika, padakīya a. relating to, studying, or knowing the last

word or term.

–paścārdhaḥ the northwestern half.

–paścima a. northwestern. (

–maḥ) the north-western country. (–mā) [uttarasyāḥ

paścimāyāśca diśoṁtarālaṁ] the north-west.

–pādaḥ the second division of a legal plaint, that part which

relates to the reply or defence; pūrvapakṣaḥ smṛtaḥ pādo

dvitīyaścottaraḥ smṛtaḥ . kriyāpādagtṛtīyaḥ syāccaturyonirṇayaḥ smṛtaḥ ..

–purastāt ind. north-eastward (with gen.).

–puruṣaḥ = uttamapuruṣaḥ q. v.

–pūrva a. northeastern. (

–rvā) the north-east.

–pracchadaḥ a coverlid, quilt.

–pratyuttaraṁ 1. a dispute, debate, a rejoinder, retort. –2. the

pleadings in a lawsuit.

–pha (phā) lgunī the twelith lunar mansion consisting of two stars

(having the figure of a bed).

–bhādrapad-dā the 26th lunar mansion consisting of two stars

(figured by a couch).

–maṁdrā a loud but slow manner of singing.

–mātraṁ a mere reply.

–mīmāṁsā the later Mīmāmsā, the Vedānta philosophy, an inquiry

into the nature of Brahma or Jñāna Kāṇḍa (distinguished from

māṁmāṁsā proper which is usually called pūrvamīmāṁsā). –rahita a.

without a reply.

–rāmacaritaṁ-traṁ N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti, which

describes the later life of Rāma.

–lakṣaṇaṁ the indication of an (actual) reply.

–loman a. having the hair turned upwards.

–vayasaṁ, -s n. old age, the declining period of life.

–vastiḥ a kind of small syringe.

–vastraṁ, –vāsas n. an upper garment, mantle, cloak.

–vādin m. 1. a defendant, respondent; Y. 2. 17. –2. one whose

claims are of later date than another’s.

–vediḥ 1. the northern altar made for the sacred fire. –2. N. of a

Tīrtha near the kurukṣetra. –sakyaṁ the left thigh.

–saṁjñita a. denoted or named in reply (as a witness). (

–taḥ) hearsay-witness.

–sākṣin m. 1. a witness for the defence. –2. a witness deposing to

facts from the reports of others.

–sādhaka a. 1. finishing what remains or follows, assisting at a

ceremony. –2. who or what proves a reply. (

–kaḥ) an assistant, helper.

–hanuḥ Ved. the upper jaw bone.

uttara a.

(1) Crossing over.

(2) To be crossed over, as in duruttara.

the upper side of (opposed to “adhas” and, “nīcā” e.g. “upari-yā”, to go

upwards; sometimes written with a following word as if compounded

with it see below); besides, in addition to, further (“sahasraṁ śatāny

upari cāṣṭau”, 1000 and 800 in addition); afterwards (e.g. “upari payaḥ

pibet”, he should drink milk afterwards); “upary upari”, higher and higher;

repeatedly, continuously &c. (As a separable preposition, with acc. loc.,

or gen.) over, above, upon, on, at the head of, on the upper side of,

beyond (e.g. “upari śailaṁ-gam”, to go over the mountain; “upari

laṅkāyāṁ samprāptaḥ saḥ”, he arrived over Laṅkā; “upary upari sarveṣām

atiṣṭhat”, he stood at the very head of all; “ātmānaṁ tasya upari

kṣiptvā”, having thrown himself upon him); in connection with, with

reference to, with regard to, towards (with gen. e.g. “mamopari

vikāritaḥ”, changed in feeling with regard to me; “putrasyopari kruddhaḥ”,

enraged towards his son); after (with abl. e.g. “muhūrtād upari”, after a

minute; see also “tad-upari” &c.) ([cf. Zend ‘upairi’; Goth. ‘ufar’; Old

Germ. ‘obar’; Mod. Germ. ‘Ѓber’; Eng. ‘over’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘super’.])

upari may stand first in a compound, as in the following examples:

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

upari ind.

(1) As a separable preposition (usually with gen., rarely with acc. or

loc.) it means

(a) Above, over, upon, on, towards; (opp. adhaḥ) (with gen.);

gatamupari ghanānāṁ S. 7. 7; avāṅmukhasyopari vṛṣṭiḥ papāta R. 2. 60;

arkasyopari S. 2. 8; prāsādānāṁ Mal. 7. 5; U. 5. 2; Śi. 16. 9; 12. 37; so –

sthāpanaṁ, -sthita &c.; with loc. uparyeva sa laṁkāyāṁ Ram.; or acc.

yaṁtrāṇyupari yaṁtrāṇi ibid; oft. at the end of comp.; ratha-, taruvara,-

tad-.

(b) At the end of, at the head of; sarvānaṁdānāmupari vartamānā

K. 158.

(c) Beyond, in addition to; paṇasyopari saṁsthāpya vyayaṁ Y. 2.

253; bhuktasyopari Suśr.

(d) In connection with, with regard to, towards, upon;

parasparasyopari paryacīyata R. 3. 24; Śānti. 3. 23; tasyopari kruddhaḥ,

mamopari duṣṭabuddhiḥ &c.; tavopari prāyopaveśanaṁ kariṣyāmi on your

account.

(e) After; muhūrtādupari upādhyāyaścedāgacchet P. III. 3. 9 Sk.

upari joined to upari (with acc. or gen. or by itself) means

(a) Just above; lokānuparyuparyāste mādhavaḥ Vop.

(b) higher and higher, far high, high above; uparyupari

sarveṣāmāditya iva tejasā Mb.

(2) (As a separable adverb) It means

(a) high above, upon, towards the upper side of (opp. adhaḥ);

uparyupari paśyaṁtaḥ sarva eva daridrati H. 2. 2; so upariyā; -sthāpana,

-sthita &c.; oft. in comp. svamudroparicihnitaṁ Y. 1. 319.

(b) Besides, in addition, further, more; śatānyupari caivāṣṭau tathā

bhūyaśca saptatiḥ Mb.

(c) Afterwards; yadā pūrvaṁ nāsīdupari ca tathā naiva bhavitā

Śānti. 2. 7; sarpiḥ pītvopari payaḥ pibet Suśr.; uparyupari more and more,

repeatedly, continuously. [cf. Zend upairi, upara; Gr. huper; L. super; Old

Germ. obar; Germ. uber; Eng. over; Hind. upar].

— Comp.

–āsanaṁ sitting on high.

–gata a. gone up, ascended.

–cara a. moving above (as a bird).

–cita a. piled over or above.

–ja a. produced above, elevated, high.

–tana, stha a. upper, higher.

–pruta a. Ved. coming from above.

–budhna a. Ved. raised above the ground.

–bhāgaḥ the upper portion or side.

–bhāvaḥ being above or higher.

–bhūmiḥ f. the ground above

–martyaṁ ind. Ved. above men.

–śayanaṁ a place of rest.

–śreṇika a. being in the upper line or series.

–sada a. lying or sitting above. (–m.) a class of gods.

–sadyaṁ sitting above.

the sound of that letter in the word “rule”).

ū ind. an interjection of calling to; of compassion; a particle implying

promise to protect ; a particle used at the beginning of a sentence.

ū mfn. (“av” , helping, protecting

ū mfn. (“ūs”) m. the moon

mfn. N. of śiva

ū mfn. (“ve” , weaving, sewing.

(connected with “vah”, q.v., and in some forms not to be distinguished

from it), to push, thrust, move, remove (only when compounded with

prepositions); to change, alter, modify on

ūh cl.1.P. ā. “ūhati, -te” (Ved. “ohate”), “ūhāṁ-cakāra”, &c. (by native

authorities not distinguished from 1. “ūh” above ), to observe, mark,

note, attend to, heed, regard ; to expect, hope for, wait for, listen for ; to

comprehend, conceive, conjecture, guess, suppose, infer, reason,

deliberate upon &c.: Caus. “ūhayati” (aor. “aujihat”), to consider, heed ;

to cause to suppose or infer

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ūh I. 1 U. (ūhati-te, ūhāṁcakāra-vakre, ūhituṁ, ūhita)

(1) To note, mark, observe.

(2) To guess, conjecture, infer; anuktamapyūhati paṁḍito janaḥ Pt. 1.

43.

(3) To comprehend, conceive, perceive, expect; ūhāṁcakre jayaṁ na

ca Bk. 14. 72, 3. 48, 15. 123.

(4) To reason, deliberate about.

(5) To reckon upon (with loc.).

(6) To wait for.

(7) To be regarded as. -II. 1 P.

(1) To change or modify.

(2) To push, thrust, remove (with a prep.) –Caus. To cause to

reason, think, infer or conjecture; Ki. 16. 19.

(resembling the sound of “ri” in “merrily”).

ṛ ind. an interjection expressing laughter ; a particle implying abuse ; a

sound inarticulate or reiterated as in stammering

ṛ m. heaven

ṛ f. N. of Aditi

ṛ cl.1.3.5.P. “ṛcchati, iyarti, ṛṇoti”, and “ṛṇvati” (only Ved.); “āra, ariṣyati,

ārat”, and “ārṣīt”, to go, move, rise, tend upwards &c.; to go towards,

meet with, fall upon or into, reach, obtain &c.; to fall to one’s share,

occur, befall (with acc.) &c.; to advance towards a foe, attack, invade ;

to hurt, offend ; to move, excite, erect, raise, (“iyarti vācam”, he raises

his voice ; “stomān iyarmi”, I sing hymns Caus. “arpayati”, to cause to

move, throw, cast &c.; to cast through, pierce ; to put in or upon, place,

insert, fix into or upon, fasten &c.; to place on, apply &c.; to direct or

turn towards &c.; to deliver up, surrender, offer, reach over, present,

give &c.; to give back, restore &c.: Ved. Intens. “alarti” ; (2. sg. “alarṣi”

; to move or go towards with speed or zeal: Class. Intens. ā. “arāryate” (

7-4, 30), to wander about, haste towards ; ([cf. Gk. [greek] &c.: Zend

‘ir’: Lat. ‘or-ior’, ‘re-mus’, ‘aro’: Goth. ‘argan’: Angl. Sax. ‘ar’: Old High

Germ. ‘ruo-dar’, ‘ar-an’: Lith. ‘ir-ti’, “to row”; ‘ar-ti’, “to plough.”])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ṛ ind. An interjection of

(1) calling;

(2) ridicule;

(3) censure or abuse;

(4) used at the beginning of a sentence.

ṛ I. 1 P. (ṛcchati, āra, ārṣīt, ariṣyati, ṛta; caus. arpayati; desid. aririṣati)

(1) To go, move; aṁbhaśchāyāmacchāmṛcchati Śi. 4. 44.

(2) To rise, tend towards. –II. 3 P. (iyarti, ārat, ṛta) (Mostly used in

the Veda)

(1) To go.

(2) To move, shake.

(3) To obtain, gain, acquire, reach, meet with.

(4) To move, excite, raise (as voice, words &c.) vācamiyarti.

(5) To display. –III. 5 P. (ṛṇoti, ṛṇa)

(1) To injure, hurt.

(2) To attack. –Caus. (arpayati, ārpipat, arpita)

(1) To throw, cast, fling; fix or implant in; hṛdi śalyamarpitaṁ R. 8.

87.

(2) To put or place on, fix upon, direct or cast towards (as the eye

&c.); vāmaprakoṣṭhārpitahemavetraḥ Ku. 3. 41; S. 6. 5, 17, 3. 26; R. 17.

79; S. 6. 8; Bk. 5. 90; Ku. 6. 11; R. 15. 77; Bg. 8. 7, 12. 14;

karapallavārpita Śi. 9. 54.

(3) To place in, insert, give, set or place; apathe padamarpayaṁti hi

R. 9. 74, 78; citrārpitāṁ S. 6. 15 drawn in a picture; R. 2. 31; dvāradeśe

Amaru. 62; V. 4. 35; Mu. 7. 6; Bh. 3. 18; lokottaraṁ caritamarpayati

pratiṣṭhāṁ R. G.

(4) To hand or make over, give to, give in charge of, consign, deliver;

iti sūtasyābharaṇānyarpayati S. 1, 4. 19; Bk. 8. 118; Y. 2. 65.

(5) To give up, sacrifice (as the inherent sense); atra

kaliṁgagaṁgāśabdau ātmānamarpayataḥ S. D. 2.

(6) To give back, restore; R. 19. 10; Bk. 15. 16; Amaru. 94; Ms. 8.

191; Y. 2. 169.

(7) To pierce through, perforate, penetrate.

“arka”.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ṛc 6 P. (ṛcati, ānarca, ārcīt, arcituṁ)

(1) To praise, extol, celebrate; yābhyāṁ gāyatramṛcyate Rv. 8. 38.

10.

(2) To cover, screen.

(3) To shine.

ṛc f. [ṛcyate stūyate’nayā, ṛc karaṇe kvip]

(1) A hymn (in general).

(2) A single verse, stanza, or text; a verse of the Ṛgveda (opp. yajus

and sāman); tredhā vihitā vāgṛco yajūṁṣi sāmāni Śat. Br.

(3) The collective body of the Ṛgveda (pl.); ṛcaḥ sāmāni jajñire Rv.

10. 90. 9.

(4) Splendour (for. ruc).

(5) Praise.

(6) Worship.

— Comp.

–ayanaṁ [ṛcāmayanaṁ] N. of a book; ṛkpārāyaṇa; -ādi N. of a

collection of words in Pāṇini.

–āvānaṁ the time for reciting the Vedas.

–gāthā N. of a certain song.

–taṁtraṁ, –vyākaraṇaṁ N. of the Pariśiṣṭas of the Sama-veda.

–bhāj a. partaking of a Ṛk, (as a deity who is addressed with it).

–vidhānaṁ the performance of certain rites by reciting verses of

the Ṛg-veda.

–vedaḥ the oldest of the four Vedas, and the most ancient sacred

book of the Hindus. [The Ṛgveda is said to have been produced from fire;

cf. Ms. 1. 23. This Veda is divided, according to one arrangement, into 8

Aṣṭakas, each of which is divided into as many Adhyāyas: according to

another arrangement into 10 Maṇḍalas, which are again subdivided into

1000 Anuvākas, and comprises 1000 sūktas. The total number of verses

or Riks is above 1000].

–saṁhitā the arranged collection of the hymns of Ṛgveda.

–sāma (-me dual) the verses Ṛk and Sāman. -śṛṁgaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

be firm; to obtain, acquire; to be strong or healthy: Caus. “arjayati”, to

obtain, get, acquire ; ([cf. “arj”, p.90, col.1.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ṛj 1 A. (arjate, ārjiṣṭa, arjituṁ, ṛjita)

(1) To go.

(2) To obtain, acquire.

(3) To stand or be firm.

(4) To be healthy or strong. –II. 1 P. To acquire, earn; cf. arj.

“ṛdhat”; cf. “ṛdhad” below) “ṛdhyati; ṛdhnoti; ṛṇaddhi; ānardha, ardhitā,

ardhiṣyati”, &c., to grow, increase, prosper, succeed &c.; to cause to

increase or prosper, promote, make prosperous, accomplish Pass.

“ṛdhyate”, to be promoted, increase, prosper, succeed Caus. “ardhayati”,

to satisfy Desid. “ardidhiṣati” or “īrtsati”; ([cf. “rādh” and “vṛdh”.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ṛdh 4. 5. P. (ṛdhyati, ṛdhnoti, ānardha, ārdhīt, ardhituṁ, ṛddha);

sometimes 7 P. (ṛṇaddhi)

(1) To prosper, flourish, thrive, succeed; nābrahma kṣatramṛdhnoti

Ms. 9. 322.

(2) To grow, increase (fig. also).

(3) To cause to succeed, make prosperous.

(4) To satisfy, gratify, please, propitiate; Mal. 5. 29.

(5) To accomplish. –Desid. īrtsati or ardidhiṣati.

quick motion ; to bring near by flowing ; ([cf. Gk. [greek] (?);

[characters], “flowing back”; [characters], “darting back.”])

ṛṣ cl.6.P. “ṛṣati, ānarṣa, arṣitā”, to go, move ; to stab, kill ; to push,

thrust.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ṛṣ I. 6 P. (ṛṣati, ārṣīt, ānarṣa, arṣituṁ, ṛṣṭa)

(1) To go, approach.

(2) To kill, injure, pierce.

(3) To push. –II. 1 P. (arṣati)

(1) To flow.

(2) To glide.

thus in the acc. sing. du. pl. [“enam, enām, enad”, &c.], inst. sing.

[“enena, enayā”] gen. loc. du. [“enayos”, Ved. “enos”]; the other cases

are formed fr. the pronom. base “a” see under “idam”), he, she, it; this,

that, (this pronoun is enclitic and cannot begin a sentence; it is generally

used alone, so that “enam puruṣam”, “that man”, would be very unusual

if not incorrect. Grammarians assert that the substitution of “enam” &c.

for “imam” or “etam” &c. takes place when something is referred to

which has already been mentioned in a previous part of the sentence; see

Gr. 223 and 836); ([cf. Gk. [greek]; Goth. ‘ains’; Old Pruss. ‘ains’; Lat.

‘oinos’, ‘unus’.])

ena and #enā , Ved. instr. of “idam” q.v.

ena (cf. “eṇa”), a stag. see “an-ena”.

86, 24 reads “cakāra”), to be confused, suffer mentally; to grieve; to

confound; to kill or hurt; to call; to cry or shed tears

kad ind. (originally the neuter form of the interrogative pronoun “ka”), a

particle of interrogation (= Lat. ‘nonne’, “num”) ; anything wrong or bad

(cf. below); = “sukha” ; “kad” is used, like “kim”, with the particles

“cana” and “cid”, “sometimes, now and then”; “kac-cana” with the

negation “na”, “in no way or manner” ; “kac-cid” is also used, like the

simple “kad”, as a particle of interrogation (e.g. “kaccid dṛṣṭā tvayā rājan

damayantī”, was Damayantī seen by thee, O king?) “kaccid” may be

translated by “I hope that”; at the beginning of a compound it may mark

the uselessness, badness or defectiveness of anything, as in the following

examples.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kad I. 4 A. (kadyate) To be confounded or confused, to suffer mentally.

–II. 1 A. (kadate) also 1 P.

(1) To cry, to weep or shed tears.

(2) To grieve.

(3) To call.

(4) To kill or hurt; see kaṁd.

kad ind. [kad-kvip] Ved. A particle of interrogation, ‘where’. This particle

which is a substitute for the word ku is often used as the first member of

a comp. and expresses the senses of badness, littleness, deterioration,

uselessness, defectiveness &c. of anything.

— Comp.

–akṣaraṁ 1. a bad letter. –2. bad writing.

–agniḥ a little fire.

–adhvan a bad road.

–annaṁ bad food.

–apatyaṁ a bad child, bad posterity.

–abhyāsaḥ a bad habit or custom.

–artha a. 1. useless, unmeaning. –2. having what purpose or aim?

(

–rthaḥ) a useless thing.

–arthanaṁ, –nā troubling, tormenting, torture.

–arthayati Den. P. 1. to despise, slight. –2. to trouble, torment;

Bh. 3. 100; N. 8. 75.

–arthita a. 1. despised, disdained, slighted; kadarthitasyāpi hi

dhairyavṛtterna śakyate dhairyaguṇaḥ pramāṁrṣṭu Bh. 2. 106. –2.

tormented, teased; āḥ kadarthito’hamebhirvāraṁvāraṁ

vīrasaṁvādavighnakāribhiḥ U. 5. –3. insignificant, mean. –4. bad, vile.

–arthīkṛ 8 U. to disdain, despise.

–arthīkṛta a. 1. despised, disdained. –2. rendered useless and

unavailing.

–arya a. 1. avaricious, miserly. –2. little, insignificant, mean. –3.

bad, disagreeable. (

–ryaḥ) a miser; Ms. 4. 210, 224; Y. 1. 161. -tā-tvaṁ 1. avarice. —

2. insignificance. –3. badness. -bhāvaḥ avarice, stinginess.

–aśvaḥ a bad horse.

–ākāra a. deformed, ugly.

–ācāra a. following evil practices, wicked, depraved. (

–raḥ) bad conduct.

–iṁdriyaṁ a bad organ of sense.

–uṣṭraḥ a bad camel.

–uṣṇa (also koṣṇa) a. tepid, lukewarm. (

–ṣṇaṁ) lukewarmness.

–tṛṇaṁ 1. a fragrant grass. –2. the plant kuṁbhikā. –toyaṁ an

intoxicating drink, wine.

–tri m. pl. three inferior articles.

–rathaḥ a bad chariot or carriage; yudhi kadrathavadbhīmaṁ

babhaṁja dhvajaśālinaṁ Bk. 5. 103.

–vada a. 1. speaking ill or inaccurately or indistinctly; yena jātaṁ

priyāpāye kadvadaṁ haṁsakokilaṁ Bk. 6. 75; vāgvidāṁ varamakadvado

nṛpaḥ Śi. 14. 1. –2. vile, contemptible.

(aor. 1. sg. “akāniṣam”, 2. sg. “kāniṣas” , to be satisfied or pleased ; to

agree to, accept with satisfaction ; to shine; to go Intens. P. (Subj.

“cākanat”; Pot. “cākanyāt”; pf. 1. sg. “cākana”); ā. (Subj. 3. pl.

“cākananta” and “cakananta” , to be satisfied with, like, enjoy (with loc.

gen., or instr.) ; to please, be liked or wished for (with gen. of the

person) ; to strive after, seek, desire, wish (with acc. or dat.) ; ([cf. “kā,

kai, kam, kvan”, and “can”: cf. also Zd. ‘-kan’; Gk. [greek]; Angl. Sax.

‘hana’; Lat. ‘canus’, ‘caneo’, ‘candeo’, ‘candela’ (?); Hib. ‘canu’, “full

moon.”])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kan 1 P. Ved. (kanati, kaṁtuṁ).

(1) To be satisfied or contented.

(2) To love, wish.

(3) To shine.

(4) To go.

placed after the word to which it belongs with an affirmative sense,

“yes”, “well” (but this sense is generally so weak that Indian

grammarians are perhaps right in enumerating “kam” among the

expletives ; it is often found attached to a dat. case, giving to that case a

stronger meaning, and is generally placed at the end of the Pāda, e.g.

“ajījana oṣadhīr bhojanāya kam”, thou didst create the plants for actual

food ; “kam” is also used as an enclitic with the particles “nu, su”, and

“hi” (but is treated in the Pada-pāṭha as a separate word; in this

connection “kam” has no accent but once ; a particle of interrogation (like

“kad” and “kim”) ; (sometimes, like “kim” and “kad”, at the beginning of

compounds) marking the strange or unusual character of anything or

expressing reproach ; head ; food ; water ; happiness, bliss

kam cl.1.ā. (not used in the conjugational tenses) “cakame, kamitā,

kamiṣyate, acakamata” to wish, desire, long for &c.; to love, be in love

with, have sexual intercourse with Caus. ā. (ep. also P.) “kāmayate, -ti,

kāmayāṁ-cakre, acīkamata”, &c.; to wish, desire, long for (with acc. or

inf. or Pot. ; e.g. “kāmaye bhuṇjīta bhavān”, I wish your worship may eat;

“kāmaye dātum”, I wish to give &c.; to love, be in love with, have sexual

intercourse with &c.; to cause any one to love (in that sense P. ; (with

“bahu” or “aty-artham”) to rate or value highly Desid. “cikamiṣate” and

“cikāmayiṣate”: Intens. “caṁkamyate”; ([cf. Lat. ‘comis’; also ‘amo’, with

the loss of the initial, for ‘camo’; ‘cA-rus’ for ‘cam-rus’: Hib. ‘caemh’,

“love, desire; fine, handsome, pleasant”; ‘caomhach’, “a friend,

companion”; ‘caomhaim’, “I save, spare, protect”; Armen. ‘kamim’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kam ind. Ved. A particle used as an expletive or enclitic.

kam 1. 10. A. (kāmayate, kāmita, cakabhe-kāmayāṁcakre, kāṁta)

(1) To love, be enamoured of, be in love with; kanye kāmayamānaṁ

māṁ na tvaṁ kāmayase kathaṁ Kāv. 1. 63 (an instance of grāmyatā);

kalahaṁsako maṁdārikāṁ kāmayate Mal. 1.

(2) To long for, wish, desire; na vīrasūśabdamakāmayetāṁ R. 14. 4;

niṣkraṣṭumarthaṁ cakame kuberāt 5. 26; 4. 48; 10. 53; Bk. 14. 82.

(3) To have intercourse with.

(4) To value highly.

“śuśubhe” to beam, shine Intens. “canīkasīti, canīkasyate” (cf. “kaś,

kaṁs, niḥ-kas”, and “vi-kas”.)

kas “kaste” v.l. for “kaṁs, kaṁste”

kas in the Bhāṣā = “kṛṣ”

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kas I. 1 P. (kasati, kasita) To move, go, approach. –II. 2 A. (kaste or

kaṁste) To go.

(2) To destroy.

kis, kī-dṛkṣa, kī-dṛś, kī-dṛśa, kīvat”.

ki cl.3.P. “ciketi”. see “ci”.

ki m. n. an ant-hill

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kit I. 1 P. (ketati)

(1) To desire.

(2) To live.

(3) (cikitsati) To heal, cure.

(4) To doubt, suspect. –II. 3 P. Ved. (cikitti) To know.

cl.6. “kuvate” ( xxviii, 108), or cl.9. P. ā. “kūnāti, kūnāte” (perf. 3. pl.

“cukuvur” , to sound, make any noise, cry out, moan, cry (as a bird), coo,

hum (as a bee) &c. cl.1. “kavate”, to move Intens. ā. “kokūyate” ( P. ā.

“kokavīti” and “cokūyate” ( 7-4, 63 , to cry aloud ; ([cf. Gk. [greek]. ])

kū ind. (= “kva”) where?

kū f. a female Piśāca or goblin

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kū 1. 6 A. (kavate, kuvate); also ku 9 U. (ku-kū-nāti, ku-kū-nīte)

(1) To sound, make noise, cry out in distress; khagāścukuvire’śubhaṁ

Bk. 14. 20; 1. 20; 14. 5; 15. 26; 16. 29.

kṛ Ved. (I) cl.2.P. 2. sg. “karṣi” du. “kṛthas” pl. “kṛtha”; ā. 2. sg. “kṛṣe”;

impf. 2. and 3. sg. “akar”, 3. sg. rarely “akat” ( iii, xi); “mithyā k-“, he

pronounces wrongly ; “kaikeyīm anu rājānaṁ kāraya”, treat or deal with

Kaikeyī as the king does Desid. “cikīrṣati” (aor. 2. sg. “acikīrṣīs” iii), ep.

also “-te”, to wish to make or do, intend to do, design, intend, begin,

strive after &c.; to wish to sacrifice or worship Intens. 3. pl. “karikrati”

(pr. p. “karikrat” see , to do repeatedly ; Class. “carkarti” or “carikarti” or

“carīkarti” ([ 7-4, 92 “carkarīti” or “carikarīti” or “carīkarīti” or “cekrīyate”

([ib. ; ([cf. Hib. ‘caraim’, “I perform, execute”; ‘ceard’, “an art, trade,

business, function”; ‘sucridh’, “easy”; Old Germ. ‘karawan’, “to prepare”;

Mod. Germ. ‘gar’, “prepared (as food)”; Lat. ‘creo’, ‘ceremonia’;

[characters].])

kṛ cl.3.P. p. “cakrat” (Pot. 2. sg. “cakriyās”; aor. 1. sg. “akārṣam” [ vii, 7,

1] or “akāriṣam” [ iv, 39, 6]), to make mention of, praise, speak highly of

(gen.) Intens. (1. sg. “carkarmi”, 1. pl. “carkirāma”, 3. pl. “carkiran”;

Impv. 2. sg. “carkṛtāt” and “carkṛdhi”; aor. 3. sg. ā. “carkṛṣe”) id. (cf.

“kāru, kīri, kīrti”.)

kṛ to injure, &c. see 2. “kṝ”.

kṛ P. “-karoti”, to make straight

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṛ I. 5 U. (kṛṇoti-kṛṇute) To hurt, injure, kill. –II. 8 U. (karoti-kurute,

cakāra-cakre, akārṣīt-akṛta, kartuṁ, kariṣyati-te, kṛta)

(1) To do (in general); tāta kiṁkaravāṇyahaṁ.

(2) To make; gaṇikāmavarodhamakarot Dk; nṛpeṇa cakre

yuvarājaśabdabhāk R. 3. 35; yuvarājaḥ kṛtaḥ &c.

(3) To manufacture, shape, prepare; kuṁbhakāro ghaṭaṁ karoti;

kaṭaṁ karoti &c.

(4) To build, create; gṛhaṁ kuru; sabhāṁ kuru madarthe bhoḥ

(5) To produce, cause, engender; ratimubhayaprārthanā kurute S. 2.

1.

(6) To form, arrange; aṁjaliṁ karoti; kapotahastakaṁ kṛtvā.

(7) To write, compose; cakāra sumanoharaṁ śāstraṁ Pt. 1.

(8) To perform, be engaged in; pūjāṁ karoti.

(9) To tell, narrate; iti bahuvidhāḥ kathāḥ kurvan &c. (10) To carry

out, execute, obey; evaṁ kriyate yuṣmadādeśaḥ Mal. 1; or kariṣyāmi

vacastava or śāsanaṁ me kuruṣva &c.

(11) To bring about, accomplish, effect; satsaṁgatiḥ kathaya kiṁ na

karoti pusāṁ Bh. 2. 23. –12. To throw or let out, discharge, emit;

mūtraṁ kṛ to discharge urine, make water; so purīṣaṁ kṛ to void

excrement.

(13) To assume, put on, take; strīrūpaṁ kṛtvā; nānārūpāṇi kurvāṇaḥ

Y. 3. 162.

(14) To send forth, utter; mānuṣīṁ giraṁ kṛtvā, kalaravaṁ kṛtvā &c.

(15) To place or put on (with loc.); kaṁṭhe hāramakaret K. 212;

pāṇimurasi kṛtvā &c.

(16) To entrust (with some duty), appoint; adhyakṣān

vividhānkuryāttatra tatra vipaścitaḥ Ms. 7. 81.

(17) To cook (as food) as in kṛtānnaṁ.

(18) To think, regard, consider; dṛṣṭistṛṇīkṛtajagattrayasattvasārā U.

6. 19.

(19) To take (as in the hand); kuru kare gurumekamayoghanaṁ N. 4.

59. (20) To make a sound, as in khātkṛtya, phūtkṛtya bhuṁkte; so

vaṣaṭakṛ, svāhākṛ &c.

(21) To pass, spend (time); varṣāṇi daśa cakruḥ spent; kṣaṇaṁ kuru

wait a moment.

(22) To direct towards, turn the attention to, resolve on; (with loc. or

dat.); nādharme kurute manaḥ Ms. 12. 118; nagaragamanāya matiṁ na

karoti S. 2.

(23) To do a thing for another (either for his advantage or injury;

prāptāgninirvāpaṇagarvamaṁbu ratnāṁkurajyotiṣi kiṁ karoti Vikr. 1. 18;

yadanena kṛtaṁ mayi, asau kiṁ me kariṣyati &c.

(24) To use, employ, make use of; kiṁ tayā kriyate dhenvā Pt. 1.

(25) To divide, break into parts (with adverbs ending in dhā); dvidhā

kṛ to divide into two parts; śatadhā kṛ, sahasradhā kṛ &c.

(26) To cause to become subject to, reduce completely to (a

particular condition, with adverbs ending in sāt); ātmasāt kṛ to subject or

appropriate to oneself; R. 8. 2; bhasmasāt kṛ to reduce to ashes.

(27) To appropriate, secure for oneself.

(28) To help, give aid.

(29) To make liable. (30) To violate or outrage (as a girl).

(31) To begin.

(32) To order.

(33) To free from.

(34) To proceed with, put in practice.

(35) To worship, sacrifice.

(36) To make like, consider equal to, cf. tṛṇīkṛ (said to be Atm. only in

the last 10 senses). This root is often used with nouns, adjectives, and

indeclinables to form verbs from them, somewhat like the English affixes

‘en’ or ‘(i) fy’, in the sense of ‘making a person or thing to be what it

previously is not’; e. g. kṛṣṇīkṛ to make that which is not already black,

black, i. e. blacken; so śvetīkṛ to whiten; ghanīkṛ to solidify; viralīkṛ to

rarefy &c. &c. Sometimes these formations take place in other senses

also; e. g. kroḍīkṛ ‘to clasp to the bosom’, embrace bhasmīkṛ to reduce to

ashes; pravaṇīkṛ to incline, bend; tṛṇīkṛ to value as little as straw;

maṁdīkṛ to slacken, make slow; so śūlākṛ to roast on the end of pointed

lances; sukhākṛ to please; samayākṛ to spend time &c. N. B. This root by

itself admits of either Pada; but it is Atm. generally with prepositions in

the following senses:

(1) doing injury to;

(2) censure, blame;

(3) serving;

(4) outraging, acting violently or rashly;

(5) preparing, changing the condition of, turning into;

(6) reciting.

(7) employing, using; see P. 1. 3. 32 and “Student’s Guide to Sanskrit

Composition” Par. 338. Note. The root kṛ is of the most frequent

application in Sanskrit literature, and its senses are variously modified, or

almost infinitely extended, according to the noun with which the root is

connected; e. g. padaṁ kṛ to set foot (fig. also); āśrame padaṁ kariṣyasi

S. 4. 19; krameṇa kṛtaṁ mama vapuṣi navayauvanena padaṁ K. 141;

manasā kṛ to think of, meditate; manasi kṛ to think; dṛṣṭvā

manasyevamakarot K. 136; or to resolve or determine; sakhyaṁ, maitrīṁ

kṛ to form friendship with; astrāṇi kṛ to practise the use of weapons;

daṁḍaṁ kṛ to inflict punishment; hṛdaye kṛ to pay heed to; kālaṁ kṛ to

die; matiṁ duddhiṁ-kṛ to think of, intend, mean; udakaṁ kṛ to offer

libations of water to the Manes; ciraṁ kṛ to delay; darduraṁ kṛ to play on

the lute; nakhāni kṛ to clean the nails; kanyāṁ kṛ to outrage or violate a

maiden; vinā kṛ to separate from, to be abandoned by, as in madanena

vinākṛtā ratiḥ Ku. 4. 21; madhye kṛ to place in the middle, to have

reference to; madhyekṛtya sthitaṁ krathakaiśikān M. 5. 2; vaśe kṛ to win

over, place in subjection, subdue; camatkṛ to cause surprise; make an

exhibition or a show; satkṛ to honour, treat with respect; tiryakkṛ to place

aside. –Caus. (kārayati-te) To cause to do, perform, make, execute &c.;

ājñāṁ kāraya rakṣebhiḥ Bk. 8. 84; bhṛtyaṁ bhṛtyena vā kaṭaṁ kārayati

Sk. –Desid. (cikīrṣīti -te) To wish to do &c.; Śi. 14. 41.

effecting, manufacturing, acting, one who accomplishes or performs

anything, author (see “su-k-, karma-k-, pāpa-k-“, &c.)

kṛt m. an affix used to form nouns from roots

kṛt m. a noun formed with that affix

kṛt cl.6.P. “kṛntati”, ep. also ā. “-te” and cl.1. P. “kartati” (perf. “cakarta”,

2nd fut. “kartsyati” or “kartiṣyati”, 1st fut. “kartitā” ; Subj. “kṛntat”; aor.

“akartīt”, Ved. 2. sg. “akṛtas”), to cut, cut in pieces, cut off, divide, tear

asunder, destroy &c.: Caus. “kartayati” id. Desid. “cikartiṣati” or

“cikṛtsati” ; ([cf. [characters]; Lith. ‘kertu’ inf. ‘kirsti’, “to cut”; Slav.

‘korju’, “to split”; Lat. ‘curtus’, ‘culter’; Hib. ‘ceartaighim’, “I prune, trim,

cut”; ‘cuirc’, “a knife.”])

kṛt cl.7.P. “kṛṇatti” (impf. 3. pl. “akṛntan”), to twist threads, spin = ( iii,

21); to wind (as a snake) f. “kṛntatī”); to surround, encompass, attire

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṛt a. [kṛ-kvip] (Generally at the end of comp.) Accomplisher, doer,

maker, performer, manufacturer, composer &c.; pāpa-, puṇya-, pratimā-

&c. –m.

(1) A class of affixes used to form derivatives (nouns, adjectives &c.)

from roots.

(2) A word so formed.

— Comp.

–aṁtaḥ a word ending with a kṛt affix.

–lopaḥ the rejection of kṛt affixes.

kṛt I. 6 P. (kṛṁtati-kṛtta)

(1) To cut, cut off, divide, tear asunder, cut in pieces, destroy;

praharati vidhirmarmacchedī na kṛṁtati jīvitaṁ U. 3. 31, 35; Bk. 9. 42; 15.

97; 16. 15; Ms. 8. 12. –II. 7 P. (kṛṇatti, kṛtta)

(1) To spin.

(2) To surround, encompass.

(3) To attire.

“karkṣyati” or “krakṣy-; kṛṣiṣy-” ; “karṣṭā” or “kraṣṭā” ; aor. “akṛkṣat” [or

“akārkṣīt”] or “akrākṣīt”, iii, 1, 44 7; inf. “kraṣṭum”), to draw, draw to

one’s self, drag, pull, drag away, tear &c.; to lead or conduct (as an

army) ; to bend (a bow) ; to draw into one’s power, become master of,

overpower ; to obtain ; to take away anything (acc.) from any one (acc.)

; to draw or make furrows, plough (ā.) (ind. p. “kṛṣṭvā”): cl.6. P. ā.

“kṛṣati, -te” (p. “kṛṣat”), to draw or make furrows, plough &c.; ā. to

obtain by ploughing ; to travel over Caus. “karṣayati”, to draw, drag

(aor. 1. sg. “acikṛṣam”) ; to draw or tear out ; to pull to and fro, cause

pain, torture, torment &c.; “to plough” see “karṣita”: Intens. (pr. p. and

Subj. 3. sg. “carkṛṣat”; impf. 3. pl. “acarkṛṣur”) to plough ; “carīkṛṣyate”

or Ved. “karīk-“, to plough repeatedly ([cf. Lith. ‘karszu’, ‘pleszau’; Russ.

‘ceshu’; Lat. ‘verro’, ‘vello’; Goth. ‘falh’.])

kṛṣ mfn. see “kaṁsa-k-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṛṣ I. 6 U. (kṛṣati-te, kṛṣṭa) To plough, make furrows. –II. 1 P. (karṣati,

kṛṣṭa)

(1) To draw, drag, pull, drag away, tear; prasahya siṁhaḥ kila tāṁ

cakarṣa R. 2. 27; V. 1. 19.

(2) To draw towards oneself, attract; Bk. 15. 47; Bg. 15. 7.

(3) To lead or conduct as an army; sa senāṁ mahatīṁ karṣan R. 4.

32.

(4) To bend (as a bow); nātyāyataṣṭakṛśāṁrgaḥ R. 5. 50.

(5) To be come master of, subdue, vanquish, overpower;

balavāniṁdriyagrāmo vidvāṁsamapi karṣati Ms. 2. 215; nakraḥ

svasthānamāsādya gajeṁdramapi karṣati Pt. 3. 46.

(6) To plough, till; anulomakṛṣṭaṁ kṣetraṁ pratilomaṁ karṣati Sk.

(7) To obtain; kulasaṁkhyāṁ ca gacchaṁti karṣaṁti ca mahadyaśaḥ

Mb.

(8) To take away from, deprive one of (with two acc.). –Caus.

(1) To draw out, tear up.

(2) To extract.

(3) To torture, torment, give pain.

(4) To plough, till, cultivate.

“krandat”; impf. “krandat” and “akrandat”; aor. 2. sg. “kradas, cakradas”,

and “akrān”, 3. sg. “akrān” and “akrān; akrandīt” ; p. “krandat”), to neigh

(as a horse), roar (metaphorically applied to the clouds and to wind and

water) ; to creak (as a wheel) ; to sound, make a noise ; to cry piteously,

weep, lament, grieve, be confused with sorrow &c.; to call out piteously

to any one (acc.) (perf. “cakranda”) Caus. “krandayati” (aor.

“acikradat”, 3. pl. “-dan”), to cause to roar ; to cause to weep or lament ;

to roar, rave ; to neigh after (acc.) Intens. P. “kanikrantti” (ā. “-ntte” ; p.

“kanikradat”, once “kanikrat” ; p. ā. “kanikradyamana” vi), to neigh, roar,

rave, cry out ; to creak, crackle ; ([cf. Goth. ‘greta’, “to lament.”])

43, ep. also “krāmate”; according to cl.4. P. “krāmyati” [“kramyati” ; aor.

“akramīt” &c.; ā. “kramiṣṭa, kraṁsate” [ i, 121, 1], 3. pl. “cakramanta” [

ii, 19, 2]; perf. “cakrāma”, or “cakrame”; p. “cakramāṇa” ; fut.

“kramiṣyati” or “kraṁsyate” ind. p. “krāntvā, krantvā”, or “kramitvā” , to

step, walk, go, go towards, approach (with “accha, adhi” acc. or loc.)

&c.; to approach in order to ask for assistance (with loc.) ; to go across,

go over &c.; Ved. to climb (as on a tree’s branch) ; to cover (in

copulation) ; to stretch over, project over, tower above, (ind. p.

“krāntvā”) ; to take possession of ; ā. to undertake, strive after, make

effort for (dat.) ; (loc.) ; ā. ( 1-. 3, 38) to proceed well, advance, make

progress, gain a footing, succeed, have effect ; to be appliable or

practicable ; P. to be liable to the peculiar arrangement of a Vedic text

called Krama (i.e. to be doubled, as a letter or word) ; ā. to read

according to the Krama arrangement of a Vedic text (“a-krānta”): Caus.

P. “kramayati”, to cause to step ; xi; “kramayati” or “krām-“, to make

liable to the peculiar arrangement called Krama (i.e. to double a letter or

word) &c.: Intens. “caṅkramyate” ( 3-1, 23 ; p. “caṅ-kramyamāṇa” [ vii,

1, 19, 3 or “-kramam-” or “caṅkramīti” ( xiv, 137 and 141; impf. 2. pl.

“caṅkramata” ; fut. p. “caṅkramiṣyat” ; ind. p. “-mitvā” ; cf. “-mita”), to

step to and fro, walk or wander about.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kram 1 U., 4 P. (krāmati, kramate, krāmyati, cakrāma, cakrame, akramīt,

akraṁsta, krāṁta)

(1) To walk, step, go; krāmatyanudite sūrye vālī vyapagataklamaḥ

Ram.; gamyamānaṁ na tenāsīdagataṁ krāmatā puraḥ Bk. 8. 2; 25.

(2) To go to, approach (with acc).; devā imān lokānakramaṁta Śat.

Br.

(3) To pass or go over, go across, traverse; U. 2. 13; sukhaṁ

yojanapaṁcāśatkrameyaṁ Ram.

(4) To leap, jump; kramaṁ babaṁdha kramituṁ sakopaḥ (hariḥ) Bk.

2. 9. 5. 51.

(5) To go up, ascend; krāmatyuccairbhūbhṛto yasya tejaḥ Śi. 16. 83.

(6)

(a) To cover, occupy, take possession of, fill; krāṁtā yathā cetasi

viramayena R. 14. 17.

(b) To reach up to, pervade, penetrate;

krāmadbhirghanapadavīmanekasaṁkhyaiḥ Ki. 5. 34.

(7) To surpass, excel; sthitaḥ sarvonnatenorvīṁ krāṁtvā

merurivātmanā R. 1. 14.

(8) To undertake, strive after, be able or competent for, show energy

for (with dat. or inf.); vyākaraṇādhyayanāya kramate Sk. dharmāya

kramate sādhuḥ Vop.; vyutpattirāvarjitakovidāpi na raṁjanāya kramate

jaḍānāṁ Vikr. 1. 16; hatvā rakṣāṁsi lavitumakramīnmārutiḥ punaḥ .

aśokavanikāmeva Bk. 9. 23.

(9) To be developed or increased to have full scope, be at home (with

loc.); kṛtyeṣu kramaṁte Dk. 170; kramaṁte’smiñśāstrāṇi, or ṛkṣu

kramate buddhiḥ Sk.; kramamāṇo’risaṁsadi Bk. 8. 22. (10) To succeed,

have effect (Atm.); na cakramasyākramatādhikaṁ dharaṁ Śi. 1. 54.

(11) To be repeated (as a letter or word in the arrangement called

krama q. v.).

(12) To fulfil, accomplish.

(13) To have sexual intercourse with. (By P. I. 3. 38 kram by itself is

used in the Atm. in the sense of ‘continuity’ or ‘want of interruption,’

‘energy or application’, and ‘development or increase’, and also

‘conquering or getting over’). –Caus. (kramayati, krāmayati)

(1) To cause to go &c.

(2) To repeat a letter (as in the krama arrangement). –Desid.

cikramiṣati, cikraṁsate &c.

to carve (meat), distribute (food) ; to take food, consume, eat sg. ā. or

dat. inf. “kṣadase”) and x, 79, 7 (perf. “cakṣade”). ([As a Sautra root

“kṣad” means “to cover, shelter.”])

kṣad see “bāhu-kṣad”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṣad 1 A. (kṣadate) Ved.

(1) To cut.

(2) To kill.

(3) To consume, eat.

(4) To cover, protect.

abstinent, fast, do penance &c.; (for “kṣip”

kṣap cl.10.P. “kṣapayati”, to throw, cast (cf. “kṣip”.)

kṣap = Caus. 4. “kṣi” q.v.

kṣap f. night

f. a measure of time equivalent to a whole day of twenty-four hours

f. darkness

f. water

kṣap f. “kṣapaḥ, kṣapaḥ”, 1. “kṣapā” acc. pl. gen. sg., instr ind. at night

kṣap f. ([cf. Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘crepus-culum’])

kṣap “kṣa-p-” m. “earth-protector”, ruler, governor

kṣap “kṣa-p-” m. (“kṣa-p-“) iii, 55, 17; vii, 10, 5 and viii, 71, 2.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṣap 1 U. (kṣapati-te, kṣapita) To fast, to be abstinent; Ms. 5. 69. –Caus.

or 10 U. (kṣapayati-te, kṣapita)

(1) To throw, send, cast.

(2) To miss.

kṣap f. Ved.

(1) Night.

(2) A measure of time.

(3) Darkness.

(4) Water.

“kṣāmyati” [cf. Impv. ā. 3. sg. “kṣamyatām” ; perf. “cakṣame” &c., 3. pl.

“-mire” ; 1. du. “cakṣaṇvahe” & 1. pl. “-ṇmahe” ; fut. 2nd “kṣaṁsyate, -ti,

kṣamiṣyati”; aor. 2. sg. “akṣaṁsthās” ; inf. “kṣantum” &c.), to be patient

or composed, suppress anger, keep quiet &c.; to submit to (dat.) ; iv; to

bear patiently, endure, put up with (acc.), suffer ; to pardon, forgive

anything (acc.) to (gen. or dat.) &c. (e.g. “kṣamasva me tad”, forgive me

that ; to allow, permit, suffer (); (with Pot.) ; to bear any one, be

indulgent to (Pass.) ; to resist ; to be able to do anything (inf.) ; to seem

good iv: Caus. P. ā. “kṣamayati, kṣāmayate”, to ask any one (acc.)

pardon for anything (acc.) ; (perf. “kṣamayām āsa”) to suffer or bear

patiently (cf. “kṣamāpaya”); ([cf. Goth. ‘hramja’ (?) Angl. Sax.

‘hremman’, “to hinder, disquiet.”])

kṣam f. (nom. “kṣās” acc. “kṣām” instr. “kṣamā” once “jmā” [ vi, 52, 15]

dat. “kṣe” [? , gen. abl. “gmas, jmas”, once “kṣmas” [ i, 100, 15], loc.

“kṣami”; du. nom. “kṣāmā” [ ii, 39, 7; x, 12, 1; cf. “dyāva-kṣāmā”]; pl.

nom. “kṣāmas” [ viii, 70, 4; “kṣāmīs” fr. “-mi” , “kṣās” acc. “kṣās” [ x, 2,

6] loc. “kṣāsu” the ground, earth, [characters]

kṣam f. ([cf. “kṣmā”; cf. also Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘humus’, ‘homo’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṣam 1 A., 4 P. (kṣamate, kṣāmyati, cakṣame, cakṣāma, kṣāṁta or

kṣamita)

(1) To permit, allow, suffer; ato nṛpāścakṣamire sametāḥ

strīratnalābhaṁ na tadātmajasya R. 7. 34; 12. 46.

(2) To pardon, forgive (as an offence); kṣāṁtaṁ na kṣamayā Bh. 3.

13; kṣamasva parameśvara; nighnasya me bhartṛnideśaraukṣyaṁ devi

kṣamasveti babhūva namraḥ R. 14. 58.

(3) To be patient or quiet, wait; R. 15. 45.

(4) To endure, put up with, suffer; api kṣamaṁte’smadupajāpaṁ

prakṛtayaḥ Mu. 2; nājñābhaṁgakarān rājā kṣameta svasutānapi H. 2.

107.

(5) To oppose, resist.

(6) To be competent or able (to do anything); ṛne raveḥ kṣālayituṁ

kṣameta kaḥ kṣapātamaskāṁḍamalīmasaṁ nabhaḥ Śi. 1. 38, 9. 65.

kṣam f. Ved. The ground, earth.

“kṣarat”; impf. “akṣarat”; aor. 3. sg. “akṣār” (cf. ; “akṣārīt” ; p. “kṣarat”;

inf. “kṣaradhyai” , to flow, stream, glide, distil, trickle &c.; to melt away,

wane, perish ; to fall or slip from, be deprived of (abl.) ; to cause to flow,

pour out &c. (with “mūtram”, “to urine” ; to give forth a stream, give

forth anything richly 8898 (pf. “cakṣāra”) Caus. “kṣārayati”, to cause to

flow (as urine) ; to overflow or soil with acrid substances (cf. “kṣāra”)

(cf. “kṣārita”.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṣar 1 P. [kṣarati, kṣarita] (Used transitively or intransitively)

(1) To flow, glide.

(2) To send or stream forth, pour out, emit; R. 13. 74; Bk. 9. 8.

(3) To drop, trickle, ooze.

(4) To waste away, wane, perish.

(5) To become useless, have no effect; yajño’nṛtane kṣarati tapaḥ

kṣarati vismayāt Ms. 4. 237.

(6) To melt.

(7) To slip from, be deprived of (with abl.). –Caus. (kṣārayati-te) To

accuse, traduce (usually with ā). –WITH –vi to melt away, dissolve.

“kṣipat”; perf. “cikṣepa” &c.; ep. also “cikṣipe”; fut. 2nd “kṣepsyati” &c.;

ep. also “-te”; inf. “kṣeptum”; cf. , to throw, cast, send, despatch (Pass.

pr. p. “kṣipyat”, i, 1126) &c.; to move hastily (the arms or legs) ; to

throw a glance (as the eye) ; to strike or hit (with a weapon) ; to put or

place anything on or in (loc.), pour on, scatter, fix or attach to (loc.) &c.;

to direct (the thoughts) upon (loc.) ; to throw away, cast away, get rid of

; to lay (the blame) on (loc.) ; to utter abusive words, insult, revile,

abuse &c.; “to disdain” i.e. to excel, beat, outvie ; to strike down, ruin,

destroy ; (ā. “to destroy one another, go to ruin” Pot. 3. pl. “kṣiperan” ;

to pass or while away (the time or night, “kālam, kṣapām”) lv, 154; xcii,

84; to lose (time, “kālam”; cf. “kālakṣepa”) ; to skip or pass over (a day,

“dinam”.) ; (in math.) to add Caus. P. “kṣepayati”, to cause to cast or

throw into (“antar”) ; to throw into ; to cause to descend into (loc.) lxxv,

121; to pass or while away (the night, “kṣapām”) lvi, 75; (aor. Subj. 2.

sg. “cikṣipas”) to hurt, injure (cf. Subj. “kṣepayat” s.v. 2. “kṣi”); ([cf. Lat.

‘sipo’, ‘dissipo’, for ‘xipo’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṣip 6 U. (but only P. when preceded by adhi, prati and ati), 4. P.

(kṣipati-te, kṣipyati, kṣipta)

(1) To throw, cast, send, dispatch, discharge, let go (with loc. or

sometimes dat.); marudbhya iti tu dvāri kṣipedapsvadbhya ityapi Ms. 3.

88; śilāṁ vā kṣepsyate mayi Mb.; R. 12. 95; with prati also; Bh. 3. 67, Śi.

15. 86.

(2) To place, put on or upon, throw into, srajamapi śirasyaṁdhaḥ

kṣiptāṁ dhunotyahiśaṁkayā S. 7. 24; Y. 1. 230; Bg. 16. 19.

(3) To fix on, attach to (as a blame); bhṛtye doṣān kṣipati H. 2.

(4) To cast or throw off, cast away, rid oneself of; kiṁ kūrmasya

bharavyathā na vapuṣi kṣmāṁ na kṣipatyeṣa yat Mu. 2. 18.

(5)

(a) To take away, destroy; Mal. 1. 17.

(b) To kill or slay; kesarī niṣṭhurakṣiptamṛgayūtho mṛgādhipaḥ Śi.

2. 53.

(6) To reject, disdain.

(7) To insult, revile, abuse, scold; Ms. 8. 312, 270; Śānti. 3. 10.

(8) To pour on, scatter, strew. –9, To strike, hit. (10) To distract,

afflict; Mal. 4. 8. –WITH paryā to bind or tie up, collect (as hair);

(keśāṁtaṁ) paryākṣipat kācidudārabaṁdhaṁ Ku. 7. 14.

kṣip f. Ved. A finger; Rv. 3. 23. 3, 9. 97. 57.

“cakhāda” ; fut. “khetsyati” , to strike, press, press down ; to be

depressed or wearied cl.7.ā. “khintte”, to be pressed down, suffer pain

cl.4. ā. “khidyate” (rarely P. , to be pressed down or depressed, be

distressed or wearied, feel tired or exhausted &c.: Caus. P. “khedayati”

(rarely ā. , to press down, molest, disturb, make tired or exhausted 85

(v.l.) ; ([cf. Gk. [greek] ?])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

khid I. 6 P. (khiṁdati, khinna) To strike, press down, afflict. –II. 4. 7. A.

(khidyate, khiṁtte, khinna)

(1) To suffer pain or misery, to be afflicted or wearied, feel tired,

depressed or exhausted; S. 5. 7; sa puruṣo yaḥ khidyate neṁdriyaiḥ H. 2.

141 overpowered; kiṁ nāma mayi khidyate garu Ve. 1; Śānti. 3. 7; Bk. 14.

108, 17. 10. –Caus.

(1) To frighten, terrify.

(2) To exhaust, fatigue, make tired.

“canīkhudat”) id. ; (“kanīkhunat”, fr. “khun”)

“cakhyau, cakhye” ; impf. “akhyat, akhyata” ; the simple verb occurs only

in Pass. and Caus.: Pass. “khyāyate”, to be named, be known ; (aor.

“akhyāyi”) to be named or announced to (gen.) Caus. “khyāpayati”, to

make known, promulgate, proclaim &c.; to relate, tell, say, declare,

betray, denounce ; “to make well known, praise” see “khyāpita”; ([cf.

Lat. ‘in-quam’, &c.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

khyā 2 P. (m. also in non-conjugational tenses) (khyāti, khyāta) To tell,

declare, communicate (with dat. of person). –Pass. (khyāyate)

(1) To be named or called; Bk. 6. 97.

(2) To be known or famous. –Caus. (khyāpayati-te)

(1) To make known, proclaim; Ms. 7. 201.

(2) To tell, declare, relate; Bh. 2. 69; Ms. 11. 99.

(3) To extol, make renowned, praise.

gamātha” , “gamāma, gaman” ; Pot. “gamema” ; inf. “gamadhyai” cl.2.

P. “ganti” (; Impv. 3. sg. “gantu”, [2. sg. “gadhi” see “ā-“, or “gahi” see

“adhi-, abhy-ā-, ā-, upā-“], 2. pl. “gantā” or “gantana” ; impf. 2. and 3.

sg. “agan” [ pl. “aganma” [; cf. pl. “agman” ; Subj. [or aor. Subj. cf. 1.

pl. “ganma”, 3. pl. “gman” ; Pot. 2. sg. “gamyās” ; Prec. 3. sg. “gamyās” ;

pr. p. “gmat”, x, 22, 6): cl.3. P. “jaganti” ( ii, 14; Pot. “jagamyām, -yāt” ;

impf. 2. and 3. sg. “ajagan”, 2. pl. “ajaganta” or “-tana” Ved. and Class.

cl.1. P. (also ā. &c.), with substitution of “gacch” ([= [characters]]) for

“gam, gacchati” (cf. ; Subj. “gācchāti” ; 2. sg. “gacchās” [ vi, 35, 3] or

“gacchāsi” [ v, 5, 6]; 2. pl. “gacchāta” ; 3. pl. “gacchān” ; impf.

“agacchat”; Pot. “gacchet”; pr. p. “gacchat” &c.; aor. “agamat” ; for ā.

with prepositions cf. fut. “gamiṣyati” &c.; 1st fut. “gantā” [ 7-2, 58]

&c.; perf. 1. sg. “jagamā” [],3. sg. “jagāma”, 2. du. “jagmathur”, 3. pl.

“jagmur” &c.; p. “jaganvas” [ &c.] or “jagmivas” f. “jagmuṣī” &c.; Ved.

inf. “gantave, gantavai”; Class. inf. “gantum”: Ved. ind. p. “gatvāya,

gatvī”; Class. ind. p. “gatvā” [ &c.], with prepositions “-gamya” or “-

gatya” to go, move, go away, set out, come &c.; to go to or towards,

approach (with acc. or loc. or dat. [; cf. “prati” [ &c.; to go or pass (as

time e.g. “kāle gacchati”, time going on, in the course of time) ; to fall to

the share of (acc.) &c.; to go against with hostile intentions, attack ; to

decease, die ; to approach carnally, have sexual intercourse with (acc.)

&c.; to go to any state or condition, undergo, partake of, participate in,

receive, obtain (e.g. “mitratāṁ gacchati”, “e goes to friendship” i.e. he

becomes friendly) &c.; “jānubhyām avanīṁ-gam”, “to go to the earth

with the knees”, kneel down ; “dharaṇīṁ mūrdhnā-gam”, “to go to the

earth with the head”, make a bow ; “manasā-gam”, to go with the mind,

observe, perceive ; (without “manasā”) to observe, understand, guess ;

(especially Pass. “gamyate”, “to be understood or meant”) and ;

“doṣeṇa” or “doṣato-gam”, to approach with an accusation, ascribe guilt

to a person (acc.) Caus. “gamayati” ( 2-4, 46; Impv. 2. sg. Ved.

“gamayā” or “gāmaya” [ v, 5, 10], 3. sg. “gamayatāt” ; perf. “gamayāṁ

cakāra” &c.) to cause to go ( 8-1, 60 or come, lead or conduct towards,

send to (dat. , bring to a place (acc. [ 1-4, 52] or loc.) &c.; to cause to

go to any condition, cause to become &c.; to impart, grant ; to send

away ; “to let go”, not care about ; to excel ; to spend time &c.; to

cause to understand, make clear or intelligible, explain ; to convey an

idea or meaning, denote ; (causal of the causal) to cause a person (acc.)

to go by means of “jigamiṣati” another Desid. “jigamiṣati” ( “jigāṁsate”

; impf. “ajigāṁsat” to wish to go, be going ; to strive to obtain ; to wish

to bring (to light, “prakāśam”) i: Intens. “jaṅganti” (), “jaṅgamīti” or

“jaṅgamyate” ( 7-4, 85 , to visit “ganigmat”) (impf. “aganīgan”); ([cf.

[characters]; Goth. ‘qvam’; Eng. ‘come’; Lat. ‘venio’ for ‘gvemio’.])

gam gen. abl. “gmas” see 2. “kṣam”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gam 1 P. (gacchati, jagāma, agamat, gamiṣyati, gaṁtuṁ, gata desid;

jigamiṣati, jigāṁsate Atm.; freq. jaṁgamyate; jaṁgamīti or jaṁgaṁti)

(1) To go, move in general; gacchatvāryā punardarśanāya V. 5;

gacchati puraḥ śarīraṁ dhāvati paścādasaṁstutaṁ cetaḥ S. 1. 34;

kvādhunā gamyate ‘where art thou going’.

(2) To depart, go forth, go away, set forth or out; utkṣipyaināṁ

jyotirekaṁ jagāma S. 5. 30.

(3) To go to, reach, resort to, arrive at, approach; yadagamyopi

gamyate Pt. 1. 7; eno gacchati kartāraṁ Ms. 8. 19 the sin goes to (recoils

on) the doer; 4. 199; so dharaṇiṁ mūrdhnā gam &c.

(4) To pass, pass away, elapse (as time); dineṣu gacchatsu R. 3. 8 as

days rolled on, in course of time; Me. 83; kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo

gacchati dhīmatāṁ H. 1. 1; gacchatā kālena in the long run.

(5) To go to the state or condition of, become, undergo, suffer,

partake of &c. (usually joined with nouns ending in tā, –tva &c. or any

noun in the acc.); gamiṣyāmyupahāsyatāṁ R. 1. 3; paścādumākhyāṁ

sumukhī jagāma Ku. 1. 26 went by or received the name of Umā; so

tṛptiṁ gacchati becomes satis fied; viṣādaṁ gataḥ became dejected;

kopaṁ na gacchati does not become angry; ānṛṇyaṁ gataḥ became

released from debt; manasā gam to think of, remember; Ku. 2. 63;

vṛṣeṇa gacchataḥ riding a bull; Ku. 5. 80.

(6) To cohabit, have sexual intercourse with; guroḥ sutāṁ … yo

gacchati pumān Pt. 2. 107; Y. 1. 80. –Caus. (gamayati-te)

(1) To cause to go, lead or reduce to (as a state); gamitaḥ gatiṁ Ku.

4. 24; Bh. 3. 38; Ki. 2. 7.

(2) To spend, pass (as time).

(3) To make clear, explain, expound.

(4) To signify, denote, convey an idea or sense of; dvau nañau

prakṛtārthaṁ gamayataḥ ‘two negatives make one affirmative.’

(5) To send to.

(6) To bring to a place (acc.).

(7) To impart, grant, bestow.

(8) To intend, mean.

“jigātu”; aor. “agāt”; 3. pl. “agan” ; Subj. [1. sg. “geṣam” see “anu-” and

“upa-“], 2. sg. “gās”, 3. sg. “gāt”, 2. pl. “gāta”, 3. pl. “gur”; [perf. “jigāya”

see “ud-“], perf. Pot. “jagāyāt” [ ii, 14] ; inf. “gātave” ; in Class. Sanskṛit

only the aor. P. “agāt” occurs, for ā. see “adhi-“; aor. Pass. “agāyi,

agāsātām” on ; cl.2. P. “gāti” ; ā. “gāte” to go, go towards, come,

approach (with acc. or loc.) &c.; to go after, pursue ; to fall to one’s

(dat.) share, be one’s (acc.) due, viii, 45, 32 ; to come into any state or

condition (acc.), undergo, obtain &c.; to go away (from abl.; to any place

loc.) ; to come to an end ; to walk (on a path acc. or instr.) ; (“jigāti”) to

be born on Desid. “jigīṣati”, to desire to go ([cf. [characters], Old

Germ. ‘gam’, ‘gas’, &c.; Goth. ‘ga-tvo’; Eng. ‘go’.])

gā mfn. Ved. ifc. “going” (cf. “a-gā; agre-, tamo-, puro-,

samana-“and”svasti-gā”)

gā mfn. ( “gai”) ifc. “singing” see “sāma-gā”

gā f. see s.v. 3. “ga”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gā 1 or 2 A, 3 P. (gāte, jigāti)

(1) To go, see i.

(2) To come to any state or condition.

(3) To praise, sing.

gā A song, verse.

gu ifc. “going” see “adhri-gu, vanar-gu” (cf. also “priyaṁgu, śāci-gu”);

“fit for” see “tāta-gu, nigu” (cf. “agre-gū”.)

gu (= 1. “gū” q.v.) cl.6.P. “guvati”, to void by stool (cf. “vi-gūna”.)

gu ifc. = “go”, “cow; earth; ray” ( 1-2, 48) see “a-gu, anu-gu, anuṣṇa-gu,

ariṣṭagu, upa-gu, uṣṇa-gu, kṛśa-gu, tamo-gu”, &c.; (“u”) n. water ; the

hair on the body

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gu I. 6 P. (guvati, gūna) To void by stool, void excrement, discharge

faeces. –II. 1 A. Ved. (gavate) To speak indistinctly.

to string together, tie or string as a garland

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

guph , or guṁph 6 P. (gu-guṁ-phati, guṁphita)

(1) To put string or weave together, tie, wind round; guṁphitāḥ śirasi

veṇayo’bhavan Śi. 14. 30; viśvābhirāmaguṇagauravaguṁphitānāṁ Bv. 1.

71; Bk. 7. 105.

(2) (fig.) To write, compose.

“ati-, apa-, abhi-, ava-, ā-, ud-, pra-“): “gur”, or “gūr” cl.4. “gūryate”, to

hurt, xxvi, 45; to go Caus. “gorayate” or “gūray-“, to raise, lift up (or “to

make effort”), xxxiii, 21; to eat (cf. “gūr”.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gur I. 6 A. [gurate, gūrta-gūrṇa]

(1) To make an effort or exertion. –II. 4 A. (p. p. gūrṇa)

(1) To hurt, kill, injure.

(2) To go.

“gūhiṣyati” ; aor. “agūhīt”, xv; Subj. 2. sg. “ghukṣas” [vi] or Ved. “guhas”

[ viii, 6, 17]; pr. p. P. “gūhat”, iv, 51, 9; ā. “gūhamāna” &c.; Pass.

“guhyamāna” ; aor. “guhamāna” ; Ved. ind. p. “gūdhvī”, vii, 80, 2) to

cover, conceal, hide, keep secret &c.: Desid. “jughukṣati” ( 7-2, 12; 3.

du. “jugukṣatas”, Pada-p. “jughukṣ-“) to wish to conceal or hide away

guh (only acc. “guham” and instr. 1. “guhā”) f. a hiding-place

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

guh 1 U. (gūhati-te, jugūha, juguhe, agūhīt, agūhiṣṭa, agūḍha, aghukṣat-

ta, gūhiṣyati-te, ghokṣyati-te, gūhituṁ, goḍhuṁ, gūḍha) To cover, hide,

conceal, keep secret; guhyaṁ ca gūhati guṇān prakaṭīkaroti Bh. 2. 72;

gūhetkūrma ivāṁgāni Ms. 7. 105; R. 14. 49; Bk. 16. 41.

(2) To cover with clothes.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gūrdh 10 P. (gūrdhayati) Ved. To praise, extol.

“gṛṇīṣe” ; 2. pl. “gṛṇatā” ; p. P. “gṛṇat” &c.; ā. & Pass. “gṛṇāna” ; Ved.

inf. Impv. “gṛṇīṣaṇi” , to call, call out to, invoke ; to announce, proclaim ;

to mention with praise, praise, extol ; to pronounce, recite ; to relate,

teach in verses, 4, 9 ; ([cf. [characters]; Hib. ‘goirim’; Old Germ. ‘quar’,

‘quir’, &c.; Old Pruss. ‘gerbu’, “to speak”; Angl. Sax. ‘gale’; Germ.

‘Nachtigal’; Lat. ‘gallus’ ?])

gṝ cl.6.P. “girati” or (cf. P. viii, 2, 21) “gilati” ( i ā. “girate” (1. sg.

“girāmi” ; perf. “jagāra” ; aor. Subj. 3. pl. “garan” , to swallow, devour,

eat &c.; to emit or eject from the mouth Caus. (aor. 2. sg. “ajīgar”) to

swallow Intens. “jegilyate” Desid. “jigariṣati”, vii, 2, 75; ([cf. 2. “gal”, 2

“gir, gila”, 2. “gīrṇa”; Lith. ‘gerru’, “to drink”; Lat. ‘glu-tio’, ‘gula’; Slav.

‘gr-lo’; Russ. ‘zora’.])

gṝ (= 3. “kṝ”) cl.10.ā. “gārayate”, to know ; to make known, teach

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gṝ I. 9 P. (gṛṇāti, gūrṇa)

(1) To utter a sound, call out, invoke, nāmāpi nāma

gṛṇatāmamṛtatvāya kalpatāṁ Mv. 7. 15.

(2) To announce, speak, utter, proclaim; R. 10. 63.

(3) To relate, promulgate.

(4) To praise, extol; keciddhītāḥ prāṁjalayo gṛṇaṁti Bg. 11. 21; Bk. 8.

77. –WITH anu to encourage; Bk. 8. 77. –II. 6 P. (girati or gilati)

(1) To swallow, devour, eat up.

(2) To send forth, pour out, spit out, or eject, from the mouth. –WITH

ava (Atm.) to eat, devour; tathāvagiramāṇaiśca piśācairmāṁsaśoṇitaṁ

Bk. 8. 30. –III. 10 A. (gārayate)

(1) To make known, relate.

(2) To teach.

“jagrasāna” , to seize with the mouth, take into the mouth, swallow,

devour, eat, consume &c.; to swallow up, cause to disappear ; to eclipse

&c.; to swallow or slur over words, pronounce indistinctly () 27; to

suppress, stop or neglect (a lawsuit) Caus. P. “grāsayati”, to cause to

swallow or devour ; to consume, swallow ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘gra-

men’; Germ. ‘gras’; Eng. ‘grass’.])

gras mfn. ifc. “swallowing” (e.g. “piṇḍa-” q.v.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gras I. 1 A. [grasate, grasta]

(1) To swallow, devour, eat up, consume; sa imāṁ pṛthivīṁ kṛtsnāṁ

saṁkṣipya grasate punaḥ Mb.; Bg. 11. 30.

(2) To seize.

(3) To eclipse; dvāveba grasate dineśvaraniśāprāṇeśvarau bhāsurau

Bh. 2. 34; himāṁśumāśu grasate tanmradimnaḥ sphuṭaṁ phalaṁ Śi. 2.

49.

(4) To slur over words.

(5) To destory. –WITH saṁ to destroy; Bk. 12. 4. –II. 1 P., 10 U.

(grasati, grāsayati-te) To eat, devour.

“gṛbhṇāti” “gṛhṇāti” (also ā. “gṛhṇīte”, irreg. “gṛhṇate” ; 3. pl. “gṛbhṇate”

; Impv. 2. sg. “gṛhāṇa”, [“-ṇā”, Saṁhitā-p., p. Pass. nom. pl. n. x, 103,

12 &c.; “gṛbhṇāna” & “gṛhṇ-” [Ved.]; “gṛhṇa” ; “-gṛhṇāhi, -gṛbhṇīhi” see

“prati-grabh”; ā. “gṛbhṇīṣva” [ i, 18] or “gṛhṇ-“; 3. sg. P. “gṛhṇītāt”; Ved.

Impv. “gṛbhāya” &c. see s.v. “-ya” cf. “gṛhaya”; perf. “jagrāha” &c.; 1.

sg. “-grabhā” ; “-gṛbhma” ; ā. “-gṛhe”, x, 12, 5 &c.; 3. pl. “-gṛbhre” & “-

gṛbhrire” ; P. Pot. “-gṛbhyāt”, x, 31, 2; ([cf. Zd. ‘gerep’, ‘geurv’; Goth.

‘greipa’; Germ. ‘greife’; Lith. ‘grebju’; Slav. ‘grablju’; Hib. ‘grabaim’, “I

devour, stop.”])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

grah 9 U. (In Vedic literature grabh; gṛhṇāti, jagrāha, agrahīt, grahītuṁ,

gṛhīta caus. grāhayati; desid. jighṛkṣati)

(1) To seize, take, take or catch hold of, lay hold of, catch, grasp;

tayorjagahatuḥ pādān rājā rājñī ca māgadhī R. 1. 57; ālāne gṛhyate hastī

vājī valgāsu gṛhyate Mk. 1. 50; taṁ kaṁṭhe jagrāha K. 363; pāṇiṁ

gṛhītvā, caraṇaṁ gṛhītvā &c.

(2) To receive, take, accept, exact; prajānāmeva bhūtyarthaṁ sa

tābhyo balimagrahīt R. 1. 18; Ms. 7. 124; 9. 162.

(3) To apprehend, capture, take prisoner; baṁdigrāhaṁ gṛhītvā V. 1;

yāṁstatra corān gṛhṇīyāt Ms. 8. 34.

(4) To arrest, stop, catch; Bg. 6. 35.

(5) To captivate, attract; mahārājagṛhītahṛdayayā mayā V. 4; hṛdaye

gṛhyate nārī Mk. 1. 50; mādhuryamīṣṭe hariṇān grahītuṁ R. 18. 13.

(6) To win over, persuade, induce to one’s side; lubdhamarthena

gṛhṇīyāt Chaṇ. 33; Pt. 1 69, 184.

(7) (Hence) To please, gratify, satisfy, propitiate; grahītumāryān

paricaryayā muhurmahānubhāvāhi nitāṁtama rthinaḥ Śi. 1. 17. 33.

(8) To affect, seize or possess (as a demon, spirit &c.); as in

piśacagṛhīta, vetāla gṛhīta.

(9) To assume, take; dyutimagrahīd grahagaṇaḥ Śi. 9. 23; Bk. 19. 29.

(10) To learn, know, recognize, understand; Ki. 10. 8, Pt. 1. 43.

(11) To regard, consider, believe, take for; mayāpi mṛtpiṁḍabuddhinā

tathaiva gṛhītaṁ S. 6; parihāsavijalpitaṁ sakhe paramāthena na

gṛhyatāṁ vacaḥ S. 2. 18. evaṁ jano gṛhṇāti M. 1; Mu. 3.

(12) To catch or perceive (as by an organ of sense); jyāninādamatha

gṛhṇatī tayoḥ R. 11. 15.

(13) To master, grasp, comprehend; R. 18. 46.

(14) To guess, conjecture, infer; netravaktravikāraiśca

gṛhyateṁ’targataṁ manaḥ Ms. 8. 26.

(15) To utter, mention (as a name); yadi mayānyasya nāmāpi na

gṛhītaṁ K. 305; na tu nāmāpi gṛhṇīyāt patyau prete parasya tu Ms. 5.

157.

(16) To buy, purchase; kiyatā mūlyenaitatpustakaṁ gṛhītaṁ Pt. 2; Y.

2. 169; Ms. 8. 201.

(17) To deprive (one) of, take away from, rob or seize away; Bk. 9. 9;

15. 63.

(18) To wear, put on (as clothes &c.); vāsāṁsi jīrṇāni yathā vihāya

navāni gṛhṇāti naro’parāṇi Bg. 2. 22.

(19) To conceive. (20) To observe (as a fast).

(21) To eclipse.

(22) To undertake, undergo, begin.

(23) To take up, draw (water.)

(24) To stop, intercept.

(25) To withdraw, draw back.

(26) To include.

(27) To receive hospitably (as a guest). [The senses of this root may

be variously modified according to the noun with which it is joined]. —

Caus.

(1) To cause to take, catch, seize or accept.

(2) To give away in marriage; Ku. 1. 52

(3) To teach, make one acquainted with.

(4) To make one take, deliver over to.

(5) To become familiar with. –WITH anusaṁ to salute humbly. –apa

to take away, tear off. –abhi to seize forcibly. –II. 1 P., 10 U. (grahati,

grāhayati-te) To take, receive, &c.

ṇīnām”, vii, 1, 56; 3, 116 ; “i” n. “leading, chief”, vii, 1, 74 the leader or

chief of a village or community, lord of the manor, squire, leader of a

troop or army, chief, superintendent &c.

grāmaṇī “grāma-ṇī” m. (mfn. see before “-ṇi” n.) chief, pre-eminent

m. a village barber (chief person of a village)

m. a groom (“bhogika”)

m. a Yaksha

m. N. of a Gandharva chief

m. of a demon causing diseases 9556

m. of one of śiva’s attendants

m. of a locality g. “takṣaśilādi”

grāmaṇī “grāma-ṇī” f. a female peasant or villager

grāmaṇī “grāma-ṇī” f. a harlot

grāmaṇī “grāma-ṇī” f. (for “-miṇī”) the Indigo plant

grāmaṇī “grāma-ṇī” f. “-tva” n. the condition or office of a chief or leader

grāmaṇī “grāma-ṇī” f. “-putra” m. the son of a harlot

grāmaṇī “grāma-ṇī” f. “-sava” m. N. of an Ekāha rite

preceding).

gha ind. (used to lay stress on a word) at least, surely, verily, indeed,

especially (= Gk. [greek] ), (“ghā” cf. ; as a rule it is preceded by other

particles (“uta, uto, uta vā, cid, na, vā”) or by a pronoun or a preposition;

it is also found between “iva” and “id”; or between “iva” and “id aha”, or

between “vā” and “id”; sometimes it occurs in the clause which depends

on a conditional or relative sentence (e.g. “ā ghā gamad yadi śravat”, “e

will surely come when he hears” , i, 161, 8; viii, 46, 4.

gha mfn. (“han”) ifc. “striking, killing” cf. “jīva-, tāḍa-, pāṇi-, rāja-“, &c.

(cf. also “parigha”)

gha m. a rattling or gurgling or tinkling sound

m. a bell

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gha a. (Used only as the last member of comp.) Striking, killing,

destroying; as in pāṇigha, rājagha &c. –ghaḥ

(1) A bell.

(2) Rattling, gurgling or tinkling noise.

consonants, having the sound of “ch” in “church”.

ca ind. and, both, also, moreover, as well as (= [characters], Lat. ‘que’,

placed like these particles as an enclitic after the word which it connects

with what precedes; when used with a personal pronoun this must

appear in its fuller accented form (e.g. “tava ca mama ca” [not “te ca me

ca”], “both of thee and me”), when used after verbs the first of them is

accented ; it connects whole sentences as well as parts of sentences; in

the double “ca” occurs more frequently than the single (e.g. “ahaṁ ca

tvaṁ ca”, “I and thou”, viii, 62, 11); the double “ca” may also be used

somewhat redundantly in class. Sanskṛit (e.g. “kva hariṇakānāṁ jīvitaṁ

cātilolaṁ kva ca vajra-sārāḥ śarās te”, “where is the frail existence, of

fawns and where are thy adamantine arrows?” ; in later literature,

however, the first “ca” is more usually omitted (e.g. “ahaṁ tvaṁ ca”),

and when more than two things are enumerated only one “ca” is often

found (e.g. “tejasā yaśasā lakṣmyā sthityā ca parayā”, “in glory, in fame,

in beauty, and in high position” ; elsewhere, when more than two things

are enumerated, “ca” is placed after some and omitted after others (e.g.

“ṛṇa-dātā ca vaidyaś ca śrotriyo nadī”, “the payer of a debt and a

physician [and] a Brāhman [and] a river” ; in Ved. and even in class.

Sanskṛit [ iii, 20; ix, 322 “ca” would generally be used, the second may

occasionally be omitted (e.g. “indraś ca soma”, “both Indra [and thou]

Soma” ; “durbhedyaś cāśusaṁdheyaḥ”, “both difficult to be divided [and]

quickly united” i); with lexicographers “ca” may imply a reference to

certain other words which are not expressed (e.g. “kamaṇḍalau ca

karakaḥ”, “the word “karaka” has the meaning “pitcher” and other

meanings”); sometimes “ca” is = “eva”, even, indeed, certainly, just (e.g.

“su-cintitaṁ cauṣadhaṁ na nāma-mātreṇa karoty arogam”, “even a

well-devised remedy does not cure a disease by its mere name” ;

“yāvanta eva te tāvāṁśca saḥ”, “as great as they [were] just so great

was he” ; occasionally “ca” is disjunctive, “but”, “on the contrary”, “on

the other hand”, “yet”, “nevertheless” (“varam ādyau na cāntimaḥ”,

“better the two first but not the last” ; “śāntam idam āśrama-padaṁ

sphurati ca bāhuḥ”, “this hermitage is tranquil yet my arm throbs” ; “ca-

ca”, though-yet ; “ca-na ca”, though – yet not ; “ca” – “na tu” (v.l. “nanu”)

id., Mālav-. iv, 8; “na ca” – “ca”, though not – yet ; “ca” may be used for

“vā”, “either”, “or” (e.g. “iha cāmutra vā”, “either here or hereafter” ;

“strī vā pumān vā yac cānyat sattvam”, “either a woman or a man or any

other being” neg. particle is joined with “ca” the two may then be

translated by “neither”, “nor”; occasionally one “ca” or one “na” is

omitted (e.g. “na ca paribhoktuṁ naiva śaknomi hātum”, “I am able

neither to enjoy nor to abandon” ; “na pūrvāhṇe nā ca parāhṇe”, “neither

in the forenoon nor in the afternoon”); “ca-ca” may express immediate

connection between two acts or their simultaneous occurrence (e.g.

“mama ca muktaṁ tamasā mano manasijena dhanuṣi śaraś ca niveśitaḥ”,

“no sooner is my mind freed from darkness than a shaft is fixed on his

bow by the heart-born god”, vi, 8); “ca” is sometimes = “ced”, “if” (cf. ;

the verb is accented) ; “ca” may be used as an expletive (e.g. “anyaiś ca

kratubhiś ca”, “and with other sacrifices”); “ca” is often joined to an adv.

like “eva, api, tathā, tathaiva”, &c., either with or without a neg. particle

(e.g. “vairiṇaṁ nopaseveta sahāyaṁ caiva vairiṇaḥ”, “one ought not to

serve either an enemy or the ally of an enemy” ; (see “eva, api”, &c.) For

the meaning of “ca” after an interrogative see 2. “ka”, 2. “kathā, kim,

kva”); ([cf. [characters], Lat. ‘que’, ‘pe’ (in ‘nempe’ &c.); Goth. ‘uh’; Zd.

‘ca’; Old Pers. ‘ca’.])

ca mfn. pure

mfn. moving to and fro

mfn. mischievous

mfn. seedless

ca m. a thief.

ca m. the moon

ca m. a tortoise

ca m. śiva

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ca a.

(1) Seedless.

(2) Bad, vile. –caḥ An epithet of Śiva.

(2) Chewing, eating.

(3) The moon.

(4) A tortoise.

(5) A thief. –ind. A particle expressing

(1) Copulation (and, also as well as, moreover) used to join words or

assertions together; (in this sense it is used with each of the words or

assertions which it joins together; or it is used after the last of the words

or as sertions so joined, but it never stands first in a sentence): mano

niṣṭhāśūnyaṁ bhramati ca kimapyālikhati ca Mal. 1. 31; tau

gururgurupatnī ca prītyā pratinanaṁdatuḥ R. 1. 57; Ms. 1. 64; 3. 5;

kulena kāṁtyā vayasā navena guṇaiśca taistairvinayapradhānaiḥ R. 6. 79;

Ms. 1. 105; 3. 116.

(2) Disjunction (but, still, yet); śāṁtamidamāśramapadaṁ raphurati

ca bāhuḥ S. 1. 16.

(3) Certainty, determination, (indeed, certainly, exactly, quite, having

the force of eva); atītaḥ paṁthānaṁ tava ca mahimā vāṅmanasayoḥ G.

M.; te tu yāvaṁta evājau tāvāṁśca dadṛśe sa taiḥ R. 12. 45.

(4) Condition (if = cet); jīvituṁ cecchase (= icchase ced) mūḍha

hetuṁ me gadataḥ śṛṇu Mb.; lobhaścāsti (asti ced) guṇena kiṁ Bh. 2. 45

v. l.

(5) It is often used expletively (pādapūraṇārthe); bhīmaḥ

pārthastathaiva ca G. M. (Lexicographers give, besides the above, the

following senses of ca which are included in the general idea of

copulation;

(1) anvācaya joining a subordinate fact with a principal one; bho

bhikṣāmaṭa gāṁ cānaya; see anvācaya.

(2) samāhāra collective combination; as pāṇī ca pādau ca pāṇipādaṁ.

(2) itaṁratarayoga or mutual connection; as plakṣaśca nyagrodhaśca

plakṣanyagrodhau.

(4) samuccaya aggregation; as pacati ca paṭhati ca). ca is frequently

repeated with two assertions

(1) in the sense of ‘on the one hand-on the other hand’, ‘though-yet’,

to denote antithesis; na sulabhā sakaleṁdumukhī ca sā kimapi

cedamanaṁgaviceṣṭitaṁ V. 2. 9; 4. 3; R. 16. 7; or

(2) to express simultaneous or undelayed occurrence of two events

(no sooner than, as soon as); te ca prāpurudanvaṁtaṁ bubudhe

cādipūruṣaḥ R. 10. 6; 3. 40; 11. 50, 81; Ku. 3. 58, 66; S. 6. 7; Mal. 9. 39.

tenses “khyā” is substituted ; some pf. forms, however, are found) cl.2.ā.

“caṣṭe” (2. du. “cakṣathe” ; pf. p. “cakṣāṇa” [“a-” neg.]; rarely P. impf.

2. sg. “acakṣas” pl. “acakṣma” ; Ved. inf. “cakṣase” , to appear, become

visible ; to see, look at, observe, notice ; to tell, inform ; to take any one

(acc.) for (acc.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

cakṣ 2 A (caṣṭe) (Defective in non-conjugational tenses).

(1) To see, observe, perceive.

(2) To speak, say, tell (with dat. of the person).

(3) To abandon, leave.

and ā. to ask, beg (= “cad”) Caus. “cātayati, -te” (aor. “acīcattam,

acīcate” f.), “to cause to hide”, scare, frighten away (cf. “niś-, pra-, vi-“;

cf. also “cātaka, cātana, cāttra”.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

cat 1 U. (catati-te)

(1) To ask, beg, request.

(2) To go. –Caus. (cātayati -te)

(1) To cause to hide.

(2) To scare, terrify.

gladden ; ([cf. Lat. ‘candeo’, ‘candela’.])

drink ; to eat cl.5. “camnoti” Caus. “cāmayati”, xix, 69 (cf. “ā, anv-ā-;

paryā-cānta, sam-ā-camya”.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

cam 1 P. (camati, cāṁta)

(1) To drink, sip, drink off; cacāma madhu mādhvīkaṁ Bk. 14. 94.

(2) To eat.

[ &c.], 2 sg. “cacartha” ; pl. “cerur”, &c.; “-ratur” &c.; ā. “cere” ; fut.

“cariṣyati, -te”; aor. “acārīt” [ xiv &c.]; inf. “caritum” [ii or “cartum” [ iii,

xiii v], Ved. “caradhyai” [ i, 61, 12], “caritave” [113, 5], “carase” [92, 9

and v, 47, 4], “carāyai” [vii, 77, 1], “caritos” [ i, 1, 1, 7]; ind. p. “caritvā”

; “cartvā” ; “cīrtvā”, xiii, 495; p. “carat”) to move one’s self, go, walk,

move, stir, roam about, wander (said of men, animals, water, ships,

stars, &c.) &c.; to spread, be diffused (as fire) ; to move or travel

through, pervade, go along, follow &c.; to behave, conduct one’s self,

act, live, treat (with instr. or loc.) &c.; to be engaged in, occupied or

busy with (instr e.g. “yajṇena c-“, “to be engaged in a sacrifice” &c.;

(with [ iv or without [ ii, xiv] “mithunam”) to have intercourse with, have

to do with (instr.); (with a p. or adj. or ind. p. or adv.) to continue

performing or being (e.g. “arcantaś cerur”, “they continued worshipping”

; “svāminam avajṇāya caret”, “e may go on despising his master” &c.;

(in astron.) to be in any asterism or conjunction ; to undertake, set

about, under go, observe, practise, do or act in general, effect, make

(e.g. “vratāni” “to observe vows” &c.; “vighnaṁ c-“, “to put a hindrance”

; “bhaikṣaṁ c-” “to beg” ; “vivādaṁ c-“, “to be engaged in a lawsuit” ;

“mṛgayāṁ c-“, “to hunt” ; “sambandhāṁś c”, “to enter into connections”

; “mārgaṁ cacāra bāṇaiḥ”, “e made a way with arrows” ; “tapasā

indriyāṇi c-“, to exercise one’s organs with penance &c.; to consume, eat

(with acc.), graze ; to make or render (with double acc.) e.g. “narendraṁ

satya-sthaṁ carāma”, “let us make the king keep his word” Caus.

“cārayati”, to cause to move or walk about (aor. “acīcarat”) ; to pasture

; to send, direct, turn, move &c.; to cause any one (acc.) to walk

through (acc.) ; to drive away from (abl.) ; to cause any one (acc.) to

practise or perform (with acc.) ; to cause (any animal acc.) to eat ; to

cause to copulate ; to ascertain (as through a spy instr.) ; to doubt (cf.

“vi-“) Desid. “cicariṣati”, to try to go “cicarṣat”); to wish to act or

conduct one’s self ; to try to have intercourse with (instr.), vi: Intens.

“carcarīti” ā. or rarely ([ iii, 12850]) Pass. “caṇcūryate” (“-curīti” and “-

cūrti” ; ind. p. “-cūrya” ; p. once P. “-cūryat” 3602) to move quickly or

repeatedly, walk about, roam about (in loc.) &c.; to act wantonly or

coquettishly (cf. ; ([cf. [characters] &c.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

car 1 P. (carati, cacāra, acārīt, carituṁ, carita or sometimes cīrṇa)

(1) To walk, move, go about, roam, wander; naṣṭāśaṁkā hariṇaśiśavo

maṁdamadaṁ caraṁti S. 1. 15 (car may mean here ‘to graze’ also);

iṁdriyāṇāṁ hi caratāṁ Bg. 2. 67; kapayaścerurārtasya rāmasyeva

manorathāḥ R. 12. 59; Ms. 2. 23, 6. 68; 8. 236; 9. 306; 10. 55.

(2)

(a) To perform, do, act; racayati rekhāḥ salile yastu khale carati

satkāraṁ Bv. 1. 98.

(b) To practise, perform, observe; carataḥ kila duścaraṁ tapaḥ R.

8. 79; Y. 1. 60; Ms. 3. 30.

(3) To act, behave towards, conduct oneself (oft. with loc. of the

person); caraṁtīnāṁ ca kāmataḥ Ms. 5. 90; 9. 287; ātmavatsarvabhūteṣu

yaścaret Mb.; tasyāṁ tvaṁ sādhu nācaraḥ R. 1. 76 (where the root may

be also ācara).

(4) To graze; suciraṁ hi caran śasyaṁ H. 3. 9.

(5) To eat, consume.

(6) To be engaged in, be busy with.

(7) To live, continue to be, continue in any state.

(8) To spread, be diffused.

(9) To live, be, exist. (10) To move, travel through, pervade, go along,

follow. –Caus. (cārayati)

(1) To cause to move or go.

(2) To send, direct, move.

(3) To drive away.

(4) To cause to perform or practise.

(5) To cause to copulate.

(6) To cause to graze, pasture.

(7) To obtain knowledge of, acquaint oneself with.

(8) To doubt. [cf. L. curro.]

“cicāya”, vii, 3, 58; 2. “cicetha”, 2, 61 ; 3. pl. “cikyur” ; p. “cikivas” ; ā.

“cikye” and “cicye” ; p. “cikyāna” v; 2nd fut. p. “ceṣyat” ; 1st fut. “cetā” ;

aor. “acaiṣīt” on iii, 1, 42 and vii, 2, 1; Ved. “cikayām akar”, iii, 1, 42 ; 1.

sg. “acaiṣam”, 2. sg. “acais” ; 3. pl. “acaiṣur” ; ā. “aceṣṭa” ; Prec.

“ceṣīṣṭa” “cīyāt”, vii, 4, 25 ; ind. p. “citvā” &c.; Pass. “cīyate” &c.; fut.

“cāyiṣyate” & “ceṣy-” Cond. “acāyiṣyata” & “aceṣy-” to arrange in order,

heap up, pile up, construct (a sacrificial altar; P., if the priests construct

the altar for another; ā., if the sacrificer builds it for himself) ; to collect,

gather together, accumulate, acquire for one’s self ; to search through

(for collecting; cf. 2. “ci”) (); to cover, inlay, set with ; Pass. “cīyate”, to

become covered with ; to increase, thrive ( Caus. “cayayati” and

“capay-“, to heap up, gather ; “cāyayati” and “cāpay-” Desid. “cikīṣate”

(also “-ti”, vii, 3, 58 to wish to pile up ; “cicīṣati” ( 7-3, 58 ; vi, 4, 16, [ed.

“vivīṣ-“] to wish to accumulate or collect Desid. Caus. (p. “cicīṣayat”) to

cause any one to wish to arrange in order Intens. “cecīyate” on

ci Ved. cl.3. (“ciketi”, fr. “ki” ; Impv. “ciketu” ; Subj. ā. “ciketa”; impf.

“aciket” ; aor. 2. pl. ā. “acidhvam” ; 3. sg. “acait” [fr. 4. “cit” to observe,

perceive (with acc. or gen.) ; to fix the gaze upon, be intent upon ; to

seek for cl.5. “cinoti” (p. “-nvat”, ā. “-nvāna”) to seek for, investigate,

search through, make inquiries (cf. 1. “ci”) Intens. “cekite” see 4. “cit”;

([cf. Lat. ‘scio’.])

ci cl.1. “cayate” (p. “cayamāna”) to detest, hate ( iv, 25) ; to revenge,

punish, take vengeance on (acc.), ii, 27, 4; ix, 47, 2 ; ([cf. “apaciti, kāti”;

[characters]. ])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ci I. 5 U. (cinoti, cinute, cikācā-ya, cicye-kye, acaiṣīt-aceṣṭa, cetuṁ, -cita;

caus. cāyayati, cāpayati, also cayayati, capayati, desid. cicīṣati, -cikīṣati)

(1) To collect, gather, accumulate (said to govern two accusatives

being a dvikarmaka root, but this use is very rare in classical literature);

vṛkṣaṁ puṣpāṇi cinvatī.

(2) To gather for oneself, acquire, gain; cicīṣatāṁ

janmavatāmalaghvīṁ bhūtiṁ Ki. 3. 11, 2. 19, Mv. 3. 4.

(3) To search, look out for; Bh. 3. 46.

(4) To pile or heap up, place in a line; parvatāniva te

bhūmāvacairṣuvānarottamān Bk. 15. 76.

(5) To set, inlay, cover or fill with, see cita. –pass. To bear fruit,

grow, increase, thrive, prosper; sicyate cīyate caiva latā puṣpaphalapradā

Pt. 1. 222 bears fruit; cīyate bāliśasyāpi satkṣetrapatitā kṛṣiḥ Mu. 1. 3;

gajahaṁsa tava saiva śubhratā cīyate na ca na cāpacīyate K. P. 10. –II. 3

P. (ciketi) Ved.

(1) To observe, see, perceive.

(2) To look steadfastly upon.

(3) To be intent upon.

(4) To seek for, search, investigate, make inquiries, search through.

–III. 1 A. (cayate)

(1) To detest, hate.

(2) To revenge, take vengeance on. –IV. 1 U. (cāyati-te)

(1) To fear, dread, be afraid of (with acc.).

(2) To respect, honour.

(3) To observe; cf. cāy.

“-dethām”; aor. 2. sg. “codīs”; pr. p. see “a-codat”), to impel, incite,

animate ; to bring or offer quickly (as the Soma) ; ā. to hasten Caus.

“codayati”, rarely “-te” (Subj. 2. sg. “-yāsi, -yāse”; aor. “acūcudat” ; p.

“codayat”; Pan. “codyamāna”), to sharpen, whet (cf. 3, 5); ix, 50, 1; x,

120, 5; to impel, incite, cause to move quickly, accelerate &c.; (with

“cakṣus”) to direct (the eye) towards (loc.) ; to inspire, excite, animate ;

to request, petition, ask, urge on, press or importune with a request &c.;

help on, assist in the attainment of (dat.) ; to bring or offer quickly, vi,

48, 9; vii, 77, 4; to ask for ; to inquire after ; to enjoin, fix, settle ; to

object, criticise ; to be quick ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘cudo’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

cud I. 10 U. (codayati-te, –codita)

(1) To send, direct, throw forward, urge or drive on, push on;

codayāśvān S. 1.

(2) To prompt, inspire, impel, animate, excite; R. 4. 24.

(3) To hasten, accelerate.

(4) To question, ask.

(5) To press with a request.

(6) To put forward, adduce, as an argument or objection.

(7) To enjoin, lay down; Ms. 2. 165.

(8) To request, solicit.

(9) To help on. (10) To bring or offer quickly.

(11) To fix, settle, direct.

(12) To be quick. –II. 1 U. Ved. (codati te)

(1) To impel, incite.

(2) To offer quickly (Soma).

(3) To hasten, be quick.

ntam”; Subj. 1. sg. “-nadai”; Pot. “-ndet” ; cl.9.1. sg. “chinnāmi” ; impf. 2.

sg. “achinad”, or “-nas” ; pf. “ciccheda, -cchide”; p. “-cchidvas”, vii, 67 ;

aor. “acchidat” or “acchaitsīt” [Subj. “ch-” &c.] ; 2. sg. “chitsi” ; 1. pl.

“chedma” ; ā. “acchitta” and 2. sg. “-tthās” [Subj. “ch-” ; fut. “chetsyati”,

vii, 2, 10 ; ind. p. “chittvā” inf. “chettum”; Pass. “chidyate”; p. see “a-

cchidyamāna”; aor. “acchedi” and “chedi” to cut off, amputate, cut

through, hew, chop, split, pierce &c.; to divide, separate from (abl.;

exceptionally instr. ; to destroy, annihilate, efface, blot out &c.; (in

math.) to divide Pass. to be split or cut, break Caus. “chedayati” (aor.

“acicchidat”) to cut off. śṅkhśr. xvii ; to cause to cut off or through f. and

292 Desid. see “cicchitsu”: Intens. “cecchidīti” ( 7-4, 65 , “-dyate” (83 2

; fut. Ist “-ditā”, 2, 10 2 ; ([cf. [characters] &c.; Lat. ‘scindo’; Goth.

‘skeida’.])

chid mfn. ifc. ( 3-2, 61) cutting, cutting off. cutting through, splitting,

piercing (cf. “ukha-cchid, keśa-, pakṣa-, marma-, vana-, hṛdaya-“)

mfn. destroying, annihilating, removing (cf. “darpa-, duḥkha-, paṅka-,

bhava-“)

chid m. the divisor, denominator

chid f. the cutting off (with gen.)

chid f. “annihilation of (in comp.)” see “bhava-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

chid 7 U. (chinatti, chiṁtte, ciccheda, acchidat, acchaitsīt, acchitta,

chettuṁ, chinna)

(1) To cut, cut or lop off, hew, mow, tear, pierce, break asunder,

rend, split, divide; nainaṁ chiṁdaṁti śastrāṇi Bg. 2. 23; R. 12. 80; Ms. 4.

69, 70; 9. 276; Y. 2. 302.

(2) To disturb, interrupt (as sleep).

(3) To remove, drive off, destroy, quell, annihilate; tṛṣṇāṁ chiṁddhi

Bh. 2. 77; etanme saṁśayaṁ chiṁddhi matirme saṁpramuhyati Mb;

rāghavo rathamaprāptāṁ tāmāśāṁ ca suradviṣāṁ .

ardhacaṁdramukhairbāṇaiściccheda kadalīsukhaṁ .. R. 12. 96; Ku. 7. 16.

(4) To take away, remove, deprive of; na naḥ kiṁcid chidyate S. B. we

do not lose anything [cf. L. scindo].

chid a. (At the end of comp.) Cutting, dividing, destroying, removing,

splitting &c.; śramacchidāmāśramapādapānāṁ R. 5. 6; paṁkacchidaḥ

phalasya M. 2. 8. –m. The divisor, denominator.

“ajanat” ; p. “janat”), “janayati, -te” (in later language only P. Subj. “-

nayat”; impf. “ajanayat”; aor. “ajījanat”; p. “janayat”; inf. “janayitavai”

xiv), twice cl.3. (Subj. “jajanat” [ ix, 8]; cf. ; pr. “jajanti” aor. ā.

“janiṣṭa”; ā. “ajani” “jajāna”; 3. pl. “jajṇur” &c.; once “jajanur”, viii, 97,

10 p. “-jṇivas”; Ved. inf. “janitos”, iv, 6, 7 iii; [ 3-4, 6]; Ved. ind. p. “-

nitvī” to generate, beget, produce, create, cause &c.; to produce (a

song of praise, &c.) ; (cl. 10 or Caus.) to cause to be born ,; to assign,

procure cl.4. “jāyate” (ep. also “-ti”; impf. “ajāyata”; pr. p. “jayamāna”;

fut. “janiṣyate”; aor. “aaniṣṭa”; 1. [ viii, 6, 10] and 3. sg. “ajani”; 3 “sani”

“jani”, i, 141, 1; “jāni”, 7, 36; perf. “jajṇe”, 2. sg. “-jṇiṣe” 3. pl. “-jṇire”, p.

“-jṇāna”) and ([]) cl, 2. (?) ā. (2. sg. “jaṇiṣe”, 2. pl. “-jiṇre, -niṣvā” [vi,

15, 18], “-nidhvam” cf. ; impf. 3. p. “ajṇata” [aor. cl.1.ā. (impf. 3. pl.

“ajanatā” ; p. “janamāna”, viii, 99, 3) to be born or produced, come into

existence &c.; to grow (as plants, teeth) iv f. ; to be born as, be by birth

or nature (with double nom.) ; to be born or destined for (acc.) (v.l.

“jayate” for “jāy-“); to be born again Introd. 14; to become, be &c.; to

be changed into (dat.) ; to take place, happen ; to be possible or

applicable or suitable ; to generate, produce Pass. “janyate”, to be born

or produced Desid. “jijaniṣati”, 42 Intens. “jaṇjanyate” and “jājāy-“, 43

(cf. ; ([cf. [characters] Lat. ‘gigno’, ‘(g) nascor’; Hib. ‘genim’, “I beget,

generate.”])

jan “jan-” m. ( 6-4, 53) a progenitor, father, [characters] (Lat.) “genitor”

; (“janitrī”) f. a mother, [characters] ‘genitrix’

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jan 4 A. (jāyate, jajñe, ajāni-ajaniṣṭa, janituṁ, jāta; pass. janyate or

jāyate)

(1) To be born or produced (with abl. of source of birth); ajani te vai

putraḥ Ait. Br.; Ms. 1. 9; 3. 39, 41; prāṇādvāyurajāyata Rv. 10. 90. 12;

Ms. 10. 8; 3. 76; 1. 75.

(2) To rise, spring up, grow (as a plant &c.).

(3) To be, become, happen, take place, occur; aniṣṭādiṣṭalābhe’pi na

gatirjāyate śubhā H. 1. 6; raktanetro’jāni kṣaṇāt Bk. 6. 32; Y. 3. 226; Ms.

1. 99.

(4) To be possible, applicable &c.

(5) To be born or destined for anything. –Caus’ (janayati)

(1) To give birth, beget, cause, produce.

(2) To cause, occasion.

&c. [ 6-1, 189 ; Impv. “-gṛhi, -gṛtāt, -gṛtam, -gṛta”; Subj. “-garat”; Pot.

“-gṛyāt”, or “-griy-” impf. “ajāgar” [ x, 104, 9]; p. “jāgrat”; rarely ā.

“jāgramāṇa” ; pf. Ved. “jāgāra” [ sg. “-gara” [ x, 149, 5], p. “-gṛvas” [see

s.v.]; pf. class. [ 3-1, 38; vii, 3, 85; but cf. vi, 1, 8 “jajāgāra” or

“jāgaraṁ-cakāra”; fut. 2nd “jāgriṣyati” &c. [ā. fut. 1st “-ritā” 1 ; aor.

“ajāgarīt”, vii, 2, 5; Pass. impers. “ajagāri”, 3, 85; Prec. “jāgaryāt”, iii, 4,

104 to be awake or watchful &c.; to awake ; to watch over, be attentive

to or intent on, care for, provide, superintend (with loc. or loc. with

“adhi”) &c. (with acc. ; (said of fire) to go on burning Prāyaśc. i, 5; to be

evident ; to look on Caus. (aor. 2. and 3. sg. “ajīgar” Impv. “jigṛtam, –

ta”) to awaken ; “jāgarayati”, ( 7-3, 85; aor. Pass. impers. “aṇāgari” or

“-gāri” id. ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘vigilo’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jāgṛ 2 P. (jāgārti, jāgarita)

(1) To be awake, be watchful or attentive (fig. also);

so’pasarpairjajāgāra yathākālaṁ svapannapi R. 17. 51; gurau

ṣāḍguṇyaciṁtāyāmārye cārye ca jāgrati Mu. 7. 13; to sit up during the

night; yā niśā sarvabhūtānāṁ tasyāṁ jāgarti saṁyamī Bg. 2. 69.

(2) To be roused from sleep, awake.

(3) To foresee, be provident.

“ajaiṣma, jeṣma”, 2. sg. “jes” and ā. “jeṣi” Subj. “jeṣat, -ṣas, -ṣāma” ;

aor. ā. “ajeṣṭa”; fut. 1st. “jetā” &c.; fut. 2nd. “jeṣyati”, x, 34, 6 &c.; pf.

“jigāya” [ 7-3, 57], “jigetha, jigyur”; p. “jigīvas” [“-givas” ; acc. pl. “-

gyuṣas”] &c.; Inf. “jiṣe”, i, 111, 4 and 112, 12; “jetave” ; Class. “jetum”:

Pass. “jīyate, ajīyata” [ xi, 65], “ajāyi, jāyiṣyate”; for “jīyate” and cl.9.

“jināti” see “jyā”) to win or acquire (by conquest or in gambling), conquer

(in battle), vanquish (in a game or lawsuit), defeat, excel, surpass &c.

(with “punar”, “to reconquer” ; to conquer (the passions), overcome or

remove (any desire or difficulties or diseases) &c.; to expel from (abl.) ;

to win anything (acc.) from (acc.), vanquish anyone (acc.) in a game

(acc.) ; to be victorious, gain the upper hand ; often pr. in the sense of an

Impv. “long live!” “glory to” &c.: Caus. “jāpayati” ( 6-1, 48 and vii, 3, 36)

to cause to win ; (aor. 2. pl, “ajījipata” and “ajījap-“) ; to conquer (aor.

“ajījayat”): Pass. “jāpyate”, to be made to conquer Desid. “jigīṣati, -te” (

7-3, 57; p. “-ṣat, -ṣamāṇa”) to wish to win or obtain or conquer or excel

&c.; (ā.) to seek for prey Intens. “jejīyate”

ji mfn. conquering

ji m. a Piśāca

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ji 1 P. (Atm. when preceded, by parā and vi) (jayati, jigāya jigye ajaiṣīt-

ajeṣṭa, jetuṁ, jita)

(1) To conquer, defeat, overcome, vanquish, subjugate; jayati

tulāmadhirūḍho bhāsvānapi jaladapaṭalāni Pt. 1. 330; Bk. 15. 76, 19. 2.

(2) To surpass, excel; garjitānaṁtarāṁ vṛṣṭiṁ saubhāgyena jigāya sā

Ku. 2. 53; R. 3. 34; Ghaṭ. 22; Śi. 1. 19.

(3) To win (by conquest, in gambling or in a law-suit), acquire by

conquest; prāgajīyata ghṛṇā tato mahī R. 11. 65; (where ji means ‘to

conquer’ also); Ms. 7. 96.

(4) To curb, restrain, control, conquer (as passions).

(5) To be victorious, be supreme or pre-eminent (generally used in

benedictory stanzas or salutations); jayatu jayatu mahārājaḥ (in

dramas). sa jayati pariṇaddhaḥ śaktibhiḥ śaktināthaḥ Mal. 5. 1;

jitamuḍupatinā namaḥ surebhyaḥ Ratn. 1. 5; Bh. 2. 24; Gīt. 1. 1.

(6) To convict.

(7) To overcome or get the better of (as a disease &c.).

(8) To expect from (with abl.). –Caus. (jāpayati) To cause to win or

conquer. –Desid. (jigīṣati) To wish to win, acquire or excel, to vie with,

emulate, to seek for; calati nayānna jigīṣatāṁ hi cetaḥ Ki. 10. 29. –WITH

adhi to conquer, defeat, vanquish; Bk. 19. 2.

jīvīt” ; pf. “jijīva”; fut. “jīviṣyati”; Prec. “-vyāsam, -vyāsma” ; inf. “jīvitum”,

xiv &c.; Ved. “-vāse” ; “jīvitavaī”. to live, be or remain alive &c.; to

revive ; (with “punar”) ; to live by (instr.; exceptionally loc., v, 1059f.)

&c.: Caus. “jīvayati” (ep. also ā.; aor. “aījijvat” or “ajijīv-” to make alive,

restore to life, vivify &c.; to support life, keep alive &c.; to nourish, bring

up, i, xiii ; to shout “”jīva”” (i.e. long live!) cxxiv, 113; “jīvāpayati” (cf. “-

pita”) to restore to life Desid. “jijīviṣati” (ā to wish to live &c.; to seek a

livelihood, wish to live by (instr.) ; “jujyūṣati” id. ; cf. “jijyūṣita”; ([cf. Lat.

‘vivo’; Lith. ‘gIvenu’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jīv 1 P. (jīvati, jīvita)

(1) To live, be alive; yasmiñjīvati jīvaṁti bahavaḥ so’tra jīvati Pt. 1.

23; mā jīvan yaḥ parāvajñāduḥkhadagdhopi jīvati Śi. 2. 45; Ms. 2. 235.

(2) To revive, come to life.

(3) To live by, subsist on, make a livelihood by (with instr.);

satyānṛtaṁ tu vāṇijyaṁ tena caivāpi jīvyate Ms. 4. 6; vipaṇena ca

jīvaṁtaḥ 3. 152, 162; 11. 26; sometimes used with acognate accusative

in this sense; ajihmāmaśaṭhāṁ śuddhāṁ jīvedbrāhmaṇajīvikāṁ Ms. 4. 11.

(4) (Fig.) To live or prey upon, depend upon as one’s source of

existence (with loc.); caurāḥ pramatte jīvaṁti vyādhiteṣu cikitsakāḥ .

pramadāḥ kāmayāneṣu yajamāneṣu yācakāḥ .. rājā vivadamāneṣu nityaṁ

mūrkheṣu paṁḍitāḥ Mb. –Caus.

(1) To restore to life.

(2) To nourish, nurture, bring up.

“jujurvas”) to become old or decrepit, decay, perish ; to cause to grow

old or perish, i, 182, 3; cf. “a-jurya”.

jur m. an old man (),ii, 14, 3 (? see 2. “jū”)

jur mfn. “growing old” see “a-, amā-, ṛta-, dhiyā-” and “sanā-jur”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jur 6. 4. P. (jurati, jūryati) Ved.

(1) To decay, become or grow old, waste away, perish.

jur m. An old man.

ṣeta”; 3. pl. “-ṣerata” ; Impv. “-ṣatām”; impf. “ajuṣata”, ii, 37, 4; 1. sg.

“ajuṣe” ; p. “-ṣamāṇa”) cl.3.P.irr. “jujoṣati” (Subj. and p. “jujoṣat”; cf. 2;

Impv. 2. pl. “-juṣṭana” cl.1. P. “joṣati” (Subj. “joṣat”; – aor. p. “juṣāṇa”;

3. pl. “ajuṣran”, i, 71, 1; 2. sg. “joṣi”, ii, iv; 3. sg. “joṣiṣat”, ii, 35, 1 [cf.

on ; pf. “jujoṣa, -juṣe”; p. “-juṣvas”, generally “-ṣāṇa”; ind. p. “juṣṭvī” to

be pleased or satisfied or favourable &c.; to like, be fond of delight in

(acc. or gen.), enjoy (with “tanvām” or “-vas”, “to be delighted”, iii, 1, 1;

x, 8, 3) &c.; to have pleasure in granting anything (acc.) to (loc.) ; to

have pleasure in (dat.), resolve to (Ved. Inf.), i, 167, 5; iv, 24, 5 ; to give

pleasure to (loc.) ; to choose for (dat.) ; to devote one’s self to (acc.),

practise, undergo, suffer ; to delight in visiting, frequent, visit, inhabit,

enter (a carriage &c.) ; to afflict iii: Caus. ā. (Subj. 2. sg. “joṣayāse”) to

like, love, behave kindly towards (acc.), cherish ; to delight in, approve of

(acc.), choose ; (P. cf. ; ([cf. [characters]; Zd. ‘zaoSa’; Hib. ‘gus’; Goth.

‘kiusu’; Lat. ‘gus-tus’.])

juṣ mfn. ifc. liking, fond of, devoted to (once with acc. ; cf. “nikṛtiṁ-“)

mfn. dwelling in

mfn. visiting, approaching

mfn. having, showing Introd. 5l; xv, 4 169

mfn. similar

juṣ mfn. cf. “sa-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

juṣ I. 6 A. (juṣate-juṣṭa)

(1) To be pleased or satisfied.

(2) To be favourable or propitious.

(3) To like, be found of, take pleasure or delight in, enjoy; sattvaṁ

juṣāṇasya bhavāya dehināṁ Bhag.

(4) To devote or attach oneself to, practise, undergo, suffer;

paulastyo’juṣata śucaṁ vipannavaṁdhuḥ Bk. 17. 112.

(5) To frequent, visit, inhabit; jupraṁte parvataśreṣṭhamṛṣayaḥ

parvasaṁdhiṣu Mb.

(6) To enter, seat oneself, resort to; rathaṁ ca jujuṣe śubhaṁ Bk. 14.

95.

(7) To choose.

(8) To enjoy, possess, have; Māl. 5. 18.

(9) To happen to. (10) To delight in granting or performing.

(11) To show oneself favourable towards. –Caus.

(1) To like, be fond of.

(2) To fondle, cherish.

(3) To delight in, approve of, rejoice at. –II. 1 P., 10 U. (joṣati,

joṣayati-te)

(1) To reason, think.

(2) To investigate, examine.

(3) To hurt.

(4) To be satisfied.

juṣ a. (At the end of comp.)

(1) Liking, enjoying, taking delight in; Bh. 3. 103.

(2) Visiting, approaching, going to, taking, amusing, resorting to &c.;

paralokajuṣāṁ R. 8. 85; rajojuṣe janmani K. 1.

Sautra root ; Subj. 2. sg. “junās”; aor Subj. “jūjuvat”; pf. 3. pl. “jūjuvur”)

to, press forwards, hurry on, be quick ; to impel quickly, urge or drive on,

incite ; to scare ; to excite, promote, animate, inspire Caus. aor.

“ajījavat” Caus. Desid. “jijavayiṣati” ; cf. “pra-“.

jū mfn. ( 3-2, 177 and 178 2) quick, speedy, (m.) courser

jū mfn. (ii, 14, 3? acc. pl.; see 2. “jur”)

mfn. inciting, driving ,

jū f. speed

jū f. the atmosphere

jū f. a female goblin

jū f. Sarasvatī

jū f. a spot on the forehead (?) of horses and oxen

jū f. cf. “apī-, kaśo-, dhī-, nabho-, mano-, yātu-, vayo-, vasū-, viśva-,

sadyo-, sanā-“, and “senā-jū”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jū 1 U., 9 P. (javati-te, junāti)

(1) To press or hurry on, move on quickly.

(2) To impel quickly, urge or drive on.

(3) To excite, animate, inspire.

jū a. Ved. Quick, speedy.

hurt ( xv); cf. “ni-” “saṁ-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jūrv 1 P. (jūrvati) Ved.

(1) To burn.

(2) To hurt, injure, kill.

s.v.) to make old or decrepit ; to cause to grow old, vii, 67, 10; (1. “jṛ”)

to humiliate cl.4.P. “jīryati” ( &c.; also ā. “-te”; p. “jīryat”, rarely “-

yamāṇa”; once cl.1. ā. Subj. 3. pl. “jaranta” ; cl.9. “jṛṇāti” ; cl.10.

“jārayati”, xxxiv, 9; pf. “jajāra”, AX, x, 8, 26 &c.; once “jāgāra”, v, 19, 10;

3. pl. “jajarur” and “jerur” ; aor. “ajarat” and “ajārīt”, iii, 1, 38; Subj. 3. pl.

“jāriṣur” ; fut. 1st “jaritā” and “-rītā” ; ind. p. “-ritvā” and “-rītvā” to grow

old, become decrepit, decay, wear out, wither, be consumed, break up,

perish &c.; to be dissolved or digested ; Bhaṭt.: Caus. “jarayati” (ep. also

ā. “-te”; p. “-rayat” [once, “jar-“, i, 124, 10] &c.) to make old, wear out,

consume &c.; to digest ; to cause to be digested

jṝ (= “gṝ”) cl.1.ā. “jarate” (p. “jaramāṇa”) to crackle (as fire) ; ( iii, 14)

to call out to, address, invoke, praise ; cf. [characters].

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jṝ I. 1. 4. 9. P., 10 U. (jarati, jīryati, jṛṇāti, jārayati-te, jajāra, jārayāmāsa,

ajarat ajārīt, ajījarat, -jari-rī-tuṁ, jīrṇa or jārita)

(1) To grow old, wear out, wither away, decay; jīryaṁte jīryataḥ keśā

daṁtā jīryaṁti jīryataḥ . jīryataścakṣuṣī śrotre tṛṣṇaikā taruṇāyate Pt. 5.

16; Bk. 9. 41.

(2) To perish, be consumed (fig. also); ajārīdiva ca prajñā balaṁ

śokāttathā’jarat Bk. 6. 30; jerurāśā daśāsyasya 14. 112.

(3) To be dissolved or digested; jīrṇamannaṁ praśaṁsīyāt Chāṇ. 79;

udare cājarannanye Bk. 15. 150.

(4) To break up or fall to pieces. –Caus. (ja-jā-ra yati)

(1) To make old, wear out, consume.

(2) To cause to be digested; to digest. –II. 1 A. (jarate) Ved.

(1) To move, approach, come near.

(2) To crackle (as fire).

(3) To roar.

(4) To call out to, invoke, praise.

“jyāsyati” ; ind p. “-jyāya”, 42) Ved. to overpower, oppress, deprive any

one (acc.) of property (acc.) &c.; (derived fr. “jyāyas”, “senior”) to

become old cl.4. ā. “jīyate” or Pass. “-yate”, Ved. to be oppressed or

treated badly, be deprived of property (or everything, “sarva-jyānim” vii)

&c.: Caus. “jyāpayati”, to call any one old 46: Desid. (p. “jijyāsat”) to

wish to overpower Intens. “jejīyate” ; cf. “pari-“; [characters].

jyā f. = [characters] see “parama-yā”

f. excessive demand

jyā f. a bow-string, [characters] &c.

jyā f. (in geom.) the chord of an arc

jyā f. = “jyārdha”

jyā f. cf. “adhi-, uj-, parama-, vi-” and “sa-jya”

jyā f. “eka-, krama-, krānti-“.

jyā f. the earth

f. a mother

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jyā I. 9 P. (jināti)

(1) To overpower, oppress.

(2) To grow old.

(3) A. (jīyate) To be oppressed.

jyā

(1) A bow-string; viśrāmaṁ labhatāmidaṁ ca

śithilajyābaṁdhamasmaddhanuḥ S. 2. 6; R. 3. 59, 11. 15; 12. 104.

(2) The chord of an arc.

(3) The earth.

(4) A mother.

(5) Overpowering force or strength.

(6) Excessive demand, importunity.

decorate one’s self ; pf. “tatasre”) “to move”, pour out (fig. a wish)

Caus. “taṁsayati” (cl. 10. “to decorate” ; impf. “ataṁsayat”), to draw to

and fro “tantasyati”, “to afflict” or “to be distressed” (cf. “vi-taṁs”) g.

“kaṇḍv-ādi”; ([fr. “tan”?; cf. “tasara”; Goth. ‘at-pinsan’; Old Germ.

‘dinsan’, “to draw.”])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

taṁs I. 1 A. Ved. (taṁsate)

(1) To shake.

(2) To pour out.

(3) To beg, request. –II. 1 P., 10 U. (taṁsati, taṁsayatite) To

decorate.

along ; ([cf. “niṣ-ṭak, pari-takana, pra-takta”; Lith. ‘teku’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tak 1. 2. P. Ved. (takati, takti)

(1) To fly (as an arrow or bird), rush at or upon

(2) To laugh at, deride, scoff

(3) To bear, endure.

tak 1 P. (taṁkati, taṁkita)

(1) To endure, bear.

(2) To laugh.

(3) To live in distress.

“takṣati” [ 7-1, 39 ; impf. [aor.?] “atakṣma”, 2. pl. “ataṣṭa” ; once cl.5.

[“takṣṇoti” Pot. “-kṣṇuyur” ; see also “apa-“; aor, “atakṣīt” ; 3. pl. “-

kṣiṣur” ; Subj. “takṣiṣat” [ 3-4, 7 ; pf. “tatakṣa”, once ā. “-kṣe” pl. “-

kskur” , once “takṣur”, ii, 19, 8; 2. du. “takṣathur”, x, 39, 4; pr. p. f.

“takṣatī”, i, 164, 41; pf. Pass, p. “taṣṭa” see s.v.) to form by cutting,

plane, chisel, chop &c.; to cut, split ; to fashion, form (out of wood &c.),

make, create ; to form in the mind, invent ; to make (any one young;

double acc.), make able or prepare for (dat.) ; (in math.) to reduce by

dividing ; Lil. &c.; = “tvac” ; to, skin Caus. “takṣayati” (aor. “atatakṣat”)

; cf. “tvakṣ”. 2. Taksh, “paring”; see “kāṣṭha-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

takṣ 1. 5. P. (takṣati, takṣṇoti, taṣṭa)

(1) To chop, cut off, pare, chisel, slice, split; ātmānaṁ takṣati hyeṣa

vanaṁ paraśunā yathā Mb.; nidhāya takṣyate yatra kāṣṭhe kāṣṭhaṁ sa

udghanaḥ Ak.

(2) To fashion, shape, form (out of wood &c.).

(3) To make, create in general.

(4) To wound, hurt.

(5) To invent, form in the mind.

(6) To make one’s own, appropriate.

(7) To cover.

(8) To peel.

(9) To make thin. –WITH nis

(1) to slice out of.

(2) to form, create.

takṣ a. (At the end of comp.) Paring, cutting &c.; also takṣa.

tan cl.1.10. “-nati, tānayati”, to believe in ; “to assist” or “to afflict with

pain”

tan (= “stan”) cl.4. “-nyati” (aor. 2. sg. “tatanas”) to resound, roar ;

([cf. [characters] &c.])

tan cl.8.P. ā. “-noti, -nute” (3. pl. “-nvate” [“ā-” and “vi-tanvate” ; Impv.

“-nu” [“ava” and “vi-tanuhi” ; cf. 1 ; “-nuṣva” ; Subj. 2. sg. “-nuthās”, v,

79, 9; 1. du. “-navāvahai”, i, 170, 4; impf. 3. pl. “atanvata”, x, 90, 6 ; pf.

P. “tatāna”, once “tāt-” ; 2. sg. “tatantha” [],class. “tenitha” [ 7-2, 64 ; ā.

1. 2. 3. sg. [“ā-“] “tatane, [abhi-]tatniṣe, [vi-]tatne” ; 3. sg. irr. “tate”, i,

83, 5; 3. pl. “tatnire” [164, 5 “vi-” “ten-” [iv, 14, 4 (“vi-“) &c.; cf. ; aor. P.

“atan” ; “[ā-]atān”, 67, 6 ; “[pari-, vi-]atanat” ; “[anv-ā]atāṁsīt” ;

“atānīt” ; “tatanat, [abhi-]-tanāma, -tanan” ; 2. pl. “ataniṣṭa” ; 3. du.

“atāniṣṭām” ; ā. “atata” or “ataniṣṭa, atathās” or “ataniṣṭhās” ; 3. pl.

“atnata” ; “tatananta”, i, 52, 11; 1. sg. “atasi” pl. “ataṁsmahi” ; fut. 2nd

“taṁsyate” ; fut. 1st “[vi-]tāyitā” ; p. pr. “tanvat, -vāna”; pf. “tatanvas”;

ind. p. “tatvā, -tvāya, -tatya” ; [“vi-“] “tāya” ; inf. tantum ; Pass. “tāyate”

“-yamāna”] x, 17, 7 &c.; “tanyate” ; aor. “atāyi” to extend, spread, be

diffused (as light) over, shine, extend towards, reach to &c.; to be

protracted, continue, endure ; to stretch (a cord), extend or bend (a

bow), spread, spin out, weave &c.; to emboss ; to prepare (a way for) ;

to direct (one’s way, “gatim”) towards ; to propagate (one’s self or one’s

family, “tanūs, tantum”) 2386 ; to (spread i.e. to) speak (words) ; to

protract li, 226; to put forth, show, manifest, display, augment &c.

(Pass. to be put forth or extended, increase ; to accomplish, perform (a

ceremony) &c.; to sacrifice, xiii, 2, 5, 2 127; to compose (a literary

work) ; to render (any one thirsty, double acc.) 455: Desid. “titaniṣati, –

taṁsati, -tāṁs-” Intens. “tantanyate, tantanīti”, vi, 4, 44 & vii, 4, 85 ;

([cf. [characters] &c.])

tan (only dat, “tane” and instr. “tanā”) continuation, uninterrupted

succession ; propagation, offspring, posterity ([“tanvā tanā ca” or

“tmanā tānā” or “tanve tane” (“ca”), “for one’s own person and one’s

children”]); (“tanā”, once “tanā”, x, 93, 12) instr. ind. in uninterrupted

succession, one after another, continually ; viii ff.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tan I. 8 U. (tanoti, tanute, tatāna, tene, ata-tā-nīt, tanituṁ, tata; pass.

tanyate or tāyate; desid. titaṁsati, titāṁsati, titaniṣati)

(1) To stretch, extend, lengthen, lengthen out; vāhvoḥ

sakarayostatayoḥ Ak.

(2) To spread, shed, diffuse; Bk. 2. 3, 10. 32, 15. 91; Ku. 2. 33.

(3) To cover, fill; sa tamīṁ tamobhirabhigamya tatāṁ Śi. 9. 23; Ki. 5.

11.

(4) To cause, produce, form, give, grant, bestow; tvayi vimukhe mayi

sapadi sudhānidhirapi tanute tanudāhaṁ Gīt. 4; piturmudaṁ tena tatāna

so’rbhakaḥ R. 3. 25; 7. 7; U. 3. 39; Māl. 9. 43; yo durjanaṁ vaśayituṁ

tanute manīṣāṁ Bv. 1. 95, 10.

(5) To perform, do, accomplish (as a sacrifice); iti kṣitīśo navatiṁ

navādhikāṁ mahākratūnāṁ mahanīyaśāsanaḥ .

samārurukṣurdivamāyuṣaḥ kṣaye tatāna sopānaparaṁparāmiva .. R. 3.

69; Ms. 4. 205.

(6) To compose, write (as a work &c.); as in nāmnāṁ mālāṁ

tanomyahaṁ or tanute ṭīkāṁ.

(7) To stretch or bend (as a bow).

(8) To spin out, weave.

(9) To propagate, or be propagated. (10) To continue, last.

(11) To protract, prolong, augment.

(12) To emboss.

(13) To prepare (a way for).

(14) To direct one’s way towards. [cf. L. tendo]. –II. 1 P., 10 U.

(tanati, tānayati-te)

(1) To confide, trust, place confidence in.

(2) To help, assist, aid.

(3) To pain or afflict with disease.

(4) To be harmless.

(5) To sound.

tan f. Ved.

(1) Continuation, diffusion.

(2) Offspring, posterity.

; Ved. inf. “tamitos”, with “ā” preceding, “till exhaustion” ; pf. Pass. p. “-

tānta” q.v.) to gasp for breath (as one suffocating), choke, be suffocated,

faint away, be exhausted, perish, be distressed or disturbed or perplexed

(“na mā tamat” [aor. subj.] “may I not be exhausted”) &c.; to stop (as

breath), become immovable or stiff ; to desire (cf. 2. “-ma, -mata”)

Caus. “tamayati” (aor. Pass. “atāmi” to suffocate, deprive of breath ; cf.

“a-tameru”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tam 4 P. (tāmyati, tāṁta)

(1) To choke, be suffocated.

(2) To be exhausted or fatigued; lalitaśirīṣapuṣpahananairapi tāmyati

yat Māl. 5. 31.

(3) To be distressed (in body or mind), be uneasy or pained, pine,

waste away; praviśati muhuḥ kuṁjaṁ guṁjanmuhurbahu tāmyati Gīt. 5;

gāḍhotkaṁṭhā lalitalulitairaṁgakaistāmyatīti Māl. 1. 15, 9. 33; tṛṣṇe

mudhā tāmyasi Mu. 3. 1; Amaru. 7.

(4) To stop, become immoveable.

(5) To wish, desire. –Caus. (tamayati) To suffocate, choke.

become sharp (“tetijāna”, “sharp” ; to sharpen, x, 138, 5: Caus.

“tejayati” id. ; to stir up, excite Desid. “titikṣate” ( 3-1, 5; 1. pl. “-

kṣmahe” ; fut. “-kṣiṣyate” ; ep. also P. e.g. p. “-kṣat” iii) “to desire to

become sharp or firm”, to bear with firmness, suffer with courage or

patience, endure viii &c.: Intens. “tetikte” ( 7-4, 65; p. “-tijāna” see

above ) to sharpen ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘dis-tinguo’, &c.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tij I. 1 A. (Strictly desid. of tij) (titikṣate, titikṣita)

(1) To endure, bear.

(2) To put up with, suffer patiently or with courage; titikṣamāṇasya

pareṇa niṁdāṁ M. 1. 17; tāṁstitikṣasva bhārata Bg. 2. 14; Mv. 2. 12; Ki.

13. 68; Ms. 6. 47. –II. 10 U. or Caus. (tejayati-te, tejita)

(1) To sharpen, whet; kusumacāpamatejayadaṁśubhiḥ R. 9. 39.

(2) To stir up, excite, instigate.

(pf. “tūtāva” cf. ; to go ; to injure Caus. (aor. “tūtot”, 2. sg. “-tos”) to

make strong or efficient ; cf. “ut-, saṁ-; tavas”, &c., “tīvra”; [Zd. ‘tav’,

“to be able”; Lat. ‘tumour’, ‘tueri’, ‘totus’.]

tu (never found at the beginning of a sentence or verse; metrically also

“tū” ; cf. pray! I beg, do, now, then, Lat. ‘dum’ used (esp. with the

Imper.) ; but (also with “eva” or “vai” following) &c.; and ; or, i, 68; xi,

202; often incorrectly written for “nu” ; sometimes used as a mere

expletive

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tu 2 P. (tauti and tavīti)

(1) To have authority or power, to be strong.

(2) To get, attain.

(3) To thrive, increase, become full.

(4) To go, move.

(5) To injure, hurt, strike.

tu ind. (Never used at the beginning of a sentenec, but usually after the

first word)

(1) An adversative particle meaning ‘but’, ‘on the contrary’, ‘on the

other hand’, ‘nevertheless’; sa sarveṣāṁ sukhānāmaṁtaṁ yayau . ekaṁ

tu sutamukhadarśanasukhaṁ na lebhe K. 59; viparyaye tu piturasyāḥ

samīpanayanamavasthitameva S. 5; (in this sense tu is often added to

kiṁ and paraṁ, and kiṁtu and paraṁtu are, unlike tu, always used at the

beginning of a sentence).

(2) And now, on one’s part, and; ekadā tu pratīhārī samupasṛtyābravīt

K. 8; rājā tu tāmāryāṁ śrutvā’bravīt 12.

(3) As to, as regards, as for; pravartyatāṁ brāhmaṇānuddiśya pākaḥ .

caṁdroparāgaṁ prati tu kenāpi vipralabdhāsi Mu. 1; Māl. 8. 4.

(4) It sometimes marks a difference (bheda) or superior quality;

mṛṣṭaṁ payo mṛṣṭataraṁ tu dugdhaṁ G. M.

(5) Sometimes it is used as an emphatic particle; bhīmastu

pāṁḍavānāṁ raudraḥ G. M.

(6) And sometimes it is used as a mere expletive; nirarthakaṁ tu

hītyādi pūraṇaikaprayojanaṁ Chandr. 2. 6.

tuj cl.6. (3.du. ā. “-jete”; p. P. “-jat”; inf. “jase” and “tuje”; Pass. p. “-

jyamāna”), and “tuṇj” (3. pl. P. “-janti” ā. “-jate”; p. “-jāna, tuṇjāna”, and

“tuṇjamāna”), to strike, hit, push ; to press out (“”tuṇjati”, to give” ; ā. to

flow forth, iii, 1, 16; to instigate, incite, i, iii; Pass. to be vexed, i, 11, 5:

cl.1. “tojati”, to hurt : Caus. (p. “tujayat”; aor. Pot. “tutujyāt”, p.

“tūtujāna” q.v.) to promote ; to move quickly. vii, 104, 7; “tuṇjayati”, “to

speak” or “to shine” ; “tuṇj-” or “tojayati”, to hurt, xxxii, 30; to be strong

; to give or take ; to abide ; cf. “ā-tuji”. 3.

tuj mfn. urging

tuj f. (only instr. “-jā”) shock, impulse, assault

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tuj 1 P. (tojati) To hurt, injure.

tuj f. Ved.

(1) Shock.

(2) Pressure.

(3) Assault.

to overpower, excel (inf. “turvaṇe”, vi, viii, x); to cause to overpower,

help to victory, save, vi, viii; cf. “pra-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

turv 1 P. (tu-tū-rvati) Ved.

(1) To injure, hurt, kill; vṛtraṁ yādiṁdra tūrvasi Rv. 8. 99. 6.

(2) To excel.

(3) To overpower.

(4) To save.

tuś (= “tuṣ”) cl.1. “tośate” (p. “tośamāna”) to be satisfied or pleased

with (instr.) ; to appease

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tuś Ved. 1 A. (tośate)

(1) To strike, hurt, kill.

(2) To be pressed out or extracted.

(3) To trickle.

“taradhyai, -rīṣani” cl.5. “tarute” (x, 76, 2; Pot. 1. pl. “turyāma”, v f.)

cl.3. “titarti” (; p. nom. pl. “titratas” ; Pot. “tuturyāt”, v f. viii), with

prepositions Ved. chiefly cl.6. P. ā. (“tirate” Subj. “tirāti” impf. “atirat”, p.

“tirat” inf. “tiram, tire” ; -aor. “atārīt”, i, vii; 1. pl. “-riṣma” i, vii, “-rima”

viii, 13, 21; “taruṣante” v, “-ta” i, “-ṣema” vii [cf. ; ā. and Pass. “-tāri” ; P.

“atārṣīt” ; “-ṣam” ; pf. “tatāra” &c.; 3. pl. “titirur”, i f.; “teritha, -ratur” ;

p. “titirvas” gen. “tataruṣas” ; fut. “tariṣyati, -rīṣ-, taritā, -rītā” [cf. “pra-

tar-“] ; “tarutā” ; Prec. “tīryāt, tariṣīṣṭa” ; inf. “tartum” ; “-rīt-” iv f. “-rit-”

; ind. p. “tīrtvā” ; “-tūrya” see “vi-“) to pass across or over, cross over (a

river), sail across &c.; to float, swim lxxx, 14 ; to get through, attain an

end or aim, live through (a definite period), study to the end &c.; to fulfil,

accomplish, perform i f.; to surpass, overcome, subdue, escape &c.; to

acquire, gain, viii, 100, 8 ; ā. to contend, compete ; to carry through or

over, save, vii, 18, 6 Caus. “tārayati” (p. “-rayat”) to carry or lead over or

across &c.; to cause to arrive at ; to rescue, save, liberate from (abl.)

&c.: Desid. “titīrṣati” (also “titariṣati, -rīṣ-” ; p. ā. “titīrṣamāṇa” to wish

to cross or reach by crossing iv: Intens. “tartarīti” (2. du. “-rīthas”; p.

gen. “tarilratas” [ 7-4, 65]; see also “vi-; tātarti”, 92 to reach the end by

passing or running or living through ; ([cf. “tara, tiras, tīrṇa”; Lat. ‘termo’,

‘trans’; Goth. ‘thairh’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tṝ 1 P. (tarati, tatāra, atārīt, tarirī-ṣyati, tīrṇa)

(1) To cross over, cross; kenoḍupena paralokanadīṁ tariṣye Mk. 8.

23; sa tīrtvā kapiśāṁ R. 4. 38; Ms. 4. 77.

(2)

(a) To cross over, traverse (as a way); Ku. 7. 48; Me. 19.

(b) To sail across, navigate (as a river).

(3) To float, swim; śilā tariṣyatyudake na parṇaṁ Bk. 12. 77.

(4)

(a) To get over, surmount, overcome, overpower; dhīrā hi

taraṁtyāpadaṁ K. 175; kṛcchraṁ mahattīrṇa. R. 14. 6; Pt. 4. 1; Bg. 18.

58; Ms. 11. 34.

(b) To subdue, destroy, become master of.

(5) To go to the end of, master completely; R. 3. 30.

(6) To fulfil, accomplish, perform (as a promise); daivāttīrṇapratijñaḥ

Mu. 4. 12.

(7) To be saved or rescued, escape from; gāvo varṣabhayāttīrṇā

vayaṁ tīrṇā mahābhayāt Hariv.

(8) To acquire, gain.

(9) To move forward rapidly. (10) To fill completely, pervade.

(11) To live through (a definite period).

(12) To deliver, liberate from.

(13) To strive together, compete. –Pass. (tīryate) To be crossed &c.

–Caus. (tārayati-te)

(1) To carry or lead over.

(2) To cause to arrive at.

(3) To save, rescue, deliver, liberate. –Desid. (titīrṣati. titariṣati,

titarīṣati) To wish to cross &c.; dorbhyāṁ titīrṣati taraṁgavatībhujaṁgaṁ

K. P. 10.

“tatyaja” ; fut. “tyakṣyati” ; “tyajiṣy-” ; aor. “atyāhṣīt”; inf. “tyaktum”) to

leave, abandon, quit &c.; to leave a place, go away from &c.; to let go,

dismiss, discharge ; to give up, surrender, resign, part from, renounce 1

&c. (“tanum” or “deham” or “kalevaram”, “to abandon the body, die”

&c.; “prāṇān” or “śvāsam” or “jīvitam”, “to give up breath or life, risk or

lose one’s life” &c.); P. ā. to shun, avoid, get rid of, free one’s self from

(any passion &c.) &c.; to give away, distribute, offer (as a sacrifice or

oblation to a deity; “tyajate” etymologically = [characters] ) &c.; to set

aside, leave unnoticed, disregard ; (ind. p. “tyaktvā”) to except ; Pass.

“tyajyate”, to be abandoned by, get rid of (instr.) Caus. “tyājayati” (aor.

“atityajat” to cause anyone to quit ; to cause anyone to give up lxxxiii,

34; to expel, turn out, xx, 126; to cause any one to lose, deprive of

(instr.) ; to empty the body by evacuations Desid. “tityakṣati”, to be

about to lose (one’s life, “prāṇān”)

tyaj mfn. ifc. leaving, abandoning

mfn. giving up, offering

tyaj mfn. cf. “tanu-, tanū-, su-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tyaj 1 P. (tyajati, tatyāja, atyākṣīt, tyakṣyati, tyakta)

(1) To leave (in all senses), abandon, quit, go away from; vartma

bhānostyajāśu Me. 39; Ms. 6. 77, 9. 177; S. 5. 26.

(2) To let go, dismiss, discharge; Bk. 6. 122.

(3) To give up, renounce, resign, surrender; Bh. 3. 16; Ms. 2. 95, 6.

33; Bg. 6. 24, 16. 21.

(4) To shun, avoid.

(5) To get rid of, free oneself from; Bg. 2. 3.

(6) To set aside, disregard; ta ime’vasthitā yuddhe prāṇāṁstyaktvā

dhanāni ca Bg. 1. 33.

(7) To except.

(8) To distribute, give away; kṛtaṁ (saṁcayaṁ) āśvayuje tyajet Y. 3.

47; Ms. 6. 15.

(9) To shoot off. –Caus.

(1) To cause to give up &c., to deprive (a person) of anything.

(2) To expel, turn out.

(3) To quit. –Desid. (tityakṣati) To wish to leave &c.

“trapayati”, or “trāp-” id. ; “trap-“, to make perplexed or ashamed, śāntiś.

iv, 15; cf. “apa-, vy-apa-; tṛpala” and “tṛpra” (?).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

trap 1 A. (trapate, trapita) To be ashamed or abashed, be embarrassed;

trapaṁte tīrthīni tvaritamiha yasyāddhṛtividhau G. L. 28. –WITH apa to

turn away or retire through shame; tasmādbalerapatrepe Bk. 14. 84;

yenāpatrapate sādhurasādhustena tuṣyati Mb.

& “tisṛbhis”, &c. ; only once “tribhis” [viii, 59, 5] with the later

accentuation, cf. ; gen. “trīṇām” [ x, 185, 1; cf. and “tisṝṇām” [ viii, 19,

37 and 101, 6], later on [fr. “-ya”] “trayāṇām” [ and “tisṛṇām” [ v, 69, 2

against metre; cf. ; ifc., vii, 2, 99 f. ; ([cf. [characters] Lat. ‘tres’; Goth.

‘threis’; &c.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tri num. a. [Uṇ. 5. 66](declined in pl. only, nom. trayaḥ m., tisraḥ f. trīṇi

n.) Three; ta eva hi trayo lokāsta eva traya āśramāḥ &c. Ms. 2. 229;

priyatamābhirasau tisṛbhirbabhau R. 9. 18; trīrṇi varṣāṇyudīkṣeta

kumāryutṛmatī satī Ms. 9. 90. [Cf. L. tres; Gr. treis; A. S., Zend thri; Eng.

three.]

— Comp.

–aṁśaḥ 1. a three-fold share. –2. a third part. –3. three-fourths.

–akṣa a. triocular.

–akṣaḥ, –akṣakaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

–akṣaraḥ 1. the mystic syllable om consisting of three letters; see

under a. –2. a match-maker or ghaṭaka (that word consisting of three

syllables.) –3. a genealogist. (

–rī) knowledge, learning; see vidyā. –aṁkaṭaṁ, –aṁgaṭaṁ 1.

three strings suspended to either end of a pole for carrying burdens. –2.

a sort of collyrium. (

–ṭaḥ) N. of Śiva.

–aṁjanaṁ the three kinds of collyrium; i. e. kālāṁjana,

rasāṁjana, and puṣpāṁjana. –aṁjalaṁ, –li three handfuls taken

collectively.

–adhipatiḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu.

–adhiṣṭhānaḥ the soul. (

–naṁ) spirit, life (catanya). –adhvagā, –mārgagā, –vartmagā

epithets of the river. Ganges (flowing through the three worlds).

–anīka a. having the three properties of heat, rain and cold; Rv. 3.

56. 3. (

–kā) an army consisting of horses, elephants and chariots.

–aṁbakaḥ (also triyaṁbaka in the same sense though rarely used

in classical literature) ‘having three eyes’, N. of Śiva; triyaṁbakaṁ

saṁyaminaṁ dadarśa Ku. 3. 44; jaḍīkṛtastryaṁbakavīkṣaṇena R. 2. 42, 3.

49. -sakhaḥ an epithet of Kubera.

–aṁbakā an epithet of Pārvatī.

–abda a. three years old. (bdaṁ) three years taken collectively.

–aśīta a. eighty-third.

–aśītiḥ f. eighty-three.

–aṣṭan a. twentyfour.

–aśra, –asra a. triangular. (

–sraṁ) a triangle.

–ahaḥ 1. a period of three days. –2. a festival lasting three days.

–āhika a. 1. performed or produced in three days. –2. recurring

after the third day, tertian (as fever). –3. having provision for three days.

–ṛcaṁ (tṛcaṁ also) three Riks taken collectively; Ms. 8. 106.

–aihika a. having provision for three days.

–kakud m. 1. N. of the mountain Trikūṭa. –2. N. of Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa.

–3. the highest, chief. –4. a sacrifice lasting for ten nights.

–kakbh m. Ved. 1. Indra. –2. Indra’s thunderbolt.

–karman n. the chief three duties of a Brāhmaṇa i. e. sacrifice,

study of the Vedas, and making gifts or charity. (–m.) one who engages

in these three duties (as a Brāhmaṇa).

–kāyaḥ N. of Buddha.

–kālaṁ 1. the three times; the past, the present, and the future,

or morning, noon and evening. –2. the three tenses (the past, present,

and future) of a verb. (

–laṁ) ind. three times, thrice. -jña, -darśin a. omniscient. (m.) 1.

a divine sage, seer. –2. a deity. –3. N. of Buddha. -vid m. 1. a Buddha.

–2. an Arhat (with the Jainas).

–kūṭaḥ N. of a mountain in Ceylon on the top of which was

situated Laṅkā, the capital of Rāvaṇa; Śi. 2. 5.

–kūrcakaṁ a knife with three edges.

–koṇa a. triangular, forming a triangle. (

–ṇaḥ) 1. a triangle. –2. the vulva

–khaṁ 1. tin. –2. a cucumber.

–khaṭvaṁ, –khadvī three bedsteads taken collectively.

–gaṇaḥ an aggregate of the three objects of worldly existence; i.

e. dharbha, artha and kāma; na bādhataṁ’sya trigaṇaḥ parasparaṁ Ki. 1.

11; see trivarga below.

–gata a. 1. tripled. –2. done in three days.

–gartāḥ (pl.) 1. N. of a country, also called jalaṁdhara, in the

north-west of India.

(2) the people or rulers of that country. –gartā 1. a lascivious woman,

wanton. –2. a woman in general. –3. a pearl. –4. a kind of cricket. —

guṇa a. 1. consisting of three threads; vratāya mauṁjīṁ triguṇāṁ

babhāra yāṁ Ku. 5. 10. –2. three-times repeated, thrice, treble,

threefold, triple; sapta vyatīyustriguṇāni tasya (dināni) R. 2. 25. –3.

containing the three Guṇas satva, rajasa and tamas (–ṇaṁ) the

Pradhāna (in Sān. phil.) (–ind.) three times; in three ways’ (–ṇāḥ m. pl.)

the three qualities or constituents of nature; trayīmayāyatriguṇātmana

namaḥ K. 1. (–ṇā) 1. Māyā or illusion (in Vedānta phil.). –2. an epithet of

Durgā –cakṣus m. an epithet of Śiva. –catura a. (pl.) three or four; gatvā

javāttracaturāṇi padāni sī tā B. R. 6. 34. –catvāriṁśa a. forty third. —

catvāriṁśat f. forty-three. –jagat n. –jagatī the three worlds,

(1) the heaven, the atmosphere, and the earth; or

(2) the heaven, the earth, and the lower world. –jaṭaḥ an epithet of

Śiva. –jaṭā N. of a female demon, one of the Rākṣasa at tendants kept by

Rāvaṇa to watch over Sītā, when she was retained as a captive in the

Aśoka-vanikā. She acted very kindly towards Sītā and induced her

companions to do the same –jīdā –jyā the sine of three signs or 90-, a

radius. –ṇatā a bow. –ṇava, –ṇavan a. pl. three times nine, i. e. 27. —

ṇāciketaḥ a part of the Adhvaryu sacrifice or Yajurveda, or one who

performs a vow connected therewith (according to Kull. on Ms. 3. 185).

–ṇītā a wife (‘thrice married’; it being supposed that a girl belongs to

Soma, Gandharva and Agni before she obtains a human husband). —

takṣaṁ, takṣī three carpenters taken collectively. –daḍaṁ 1. the three

staves of a Sannyasin (who has resigned the world) tied together so as

to form one. –2. the triple subjection of thought. word, and deed. (–ḍaḥ)

the state of a religious ascetic. –daṁḍin m. 1. areligious mendicant or

Sannyasin who has renounced all worldly attachments, and who carries

three long staves tied together so as to form one in his right hand. –2.

one who has obtained command over his mind, speech, and body (or

thought, word, and deed), cf. vāgdaṁḍo’tha manodaṁḍaḥ

kāyadaṁḍastathaiva ca . yasyaite nihitā buddhau vidaṁḍīti sa ucyate ..

Ms. 12. 10. –daśāḥ (pl.) 1. thirty. –2. the thirty-three gods. (–śaḥ) a

god, an immortal; Ku. 3. 1. -aṁkuśaḥ, -āyudhaṁ Indra’s thunderbolt; R.

9. 54. -āyudhaṁ rainbow. -adhipaḥ, -īśvaraḥ, -patiḥ epithets of Indra. –

adhipatiḥ N. of Śiva. -adhyakṣaḥ -ayanaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu. -ariḥ, a

demon. -ācāryaḥ an epithet of Bṛhaspati. -ālayaḥ, -āvāsaḥ 1. heaven. –2.

the mountain Meru.

(3) a god. -āhāraḥ ‘the food of the gods’, nectar. -iṁdraḥ 1. Indra. –2.

Siva. –3. Brahman. -guruḥ an epithet of Bṛhaspati, -gopaḥ a kind of

insect; (cf. iṁdragopa); śraddadhe tridaśagopamātrake dāhaśaktimiva

kṛṣṇavartmani R. 11. 42. -dīrghikā an epithet of the Ganges. -maṁjarī the

holy basil. -vadhū, -vanitā, an Apsaras or heavenly damsel; kailāsasya

tridaśavanitādarpaṇasyatithiḥ rayāḥ Me. 58. -vartman the sky. –

śraṁṣṭhaḥ 1. Agni. –2. Brahman. –vinaṁ three days collectively. -spṛś m.

concurrence of three lunarions with one solar day. –divaṁ 1. the heaven;

trimārgayeva tridivaraya mārgaḥ Ku. 1. 28; S. 7. 3.

(2) sky, atmosphere. –3. paradise. –4. happiness. (–vā) cardamoms.

-adhīśaḥ, -īśaḥ 1. an epithet of Indra. –2. a god. -udbhavā 1. the Ganges.

–2. small cardamoms. -okas m. a god. –dṛś m. an epithet of Śiva. —

doṣaṁ vitiation or derangement of the three humours of the body, i. e.

vāta, pitta and vapha. –dhātuḥ an epithet of Gaṇeśa. –dhāman m 1. N. of

Viṣṇu. –2. of Vyāsa; –3. of Śiva. –4. of Agni. –5. death. –dhārā the

Ganges. –ṇayanaḥ (nayanaḥ) –netraḥ, –locanaḥ epithets of Śiva; R. 3.

66; Ku. 3. 66, 5. 72. –navata a. ninety-third. –navatiḥ f. ninetythree. —

nayanā Pārvatī. –nābhaḥ Viṣṇu. –netracūmaṇiḥ the moon. –paṁca a.

three-fold five, i. e. fifteen. –paṁcāśa a. fifty-third. –paṁcāśat f. fifty-

three. –paṭuḥ glass (kāca). –patākaḥ 1. the hand with three fingers

stretched out or erect. –2. the forehead marked naturally with three

horizontal lines. –patrakaḥ the Palāśa tree. –pathaṁ 1. the three patls

taken collectively, i. e. the sky, atmosphere, and the earth, or the sky,

earth and the lower world.

(2) a place where three reads meet. (–thā) an epithet of Mathurā. –

gā an epithet of the Ganges; dhṛtasatpathastripathagāmabhitaḥ sa

tamāruroha puruhūtasutaḥ Ki. 6. 1; Amaru. 99. –pad, –pād, –pāt m.

Ved. 1. Viṣṇu. –2. fever (personified). –pada a. three-footed. (–daṁ) a

tripod. –padikā 1. a tripod. –2. a stand with three feet. –padī 1. the girth

of an elephant; nāsrasatkariṇāṁ graivaṁ tripadīcchedināmapi R. 4. 48.

(2) the Gāyatrī metre. –3. a tripod. –4. the plant godhāpadī. —

parikrāṁta a. one who walks thrice round a sacred fire. –parṇaḥ the

Kimśuka tree. –pāṭaḥ 1. intersection of a prolonged side and

perpendicular (in a quadrangular figure). –2. the figure formed by such

intersection. –pāṭhin a. 1. familiar with Samhitā, Pada, and Krama. –2.

one who learns a thing after three repetitions. –pādaḥ 1. the Supreme

Being. –2. fever. –pād a. 1. having three feet. –2. consisting of three

parts, having threefourths; R. 15. 96. –3. trinomial. (–m.) 1. an epithet

of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation. –2. the Supreme Being. –puṭa a.

triangular. (–ṭaḥ) 1. an arrow. –2. the palm of the hand. –3. a cubit. –4.

a bank or shore. –puṭakaḥ a triangle. –puṭā an epithet of Durgā. –puṭin

m. the castoroil plant. –puṁḍraṁ, –puṁḍrakaṁ a mark on the forehead

consisting of three lines made with cowdung ashes. –puraṁ 1. a

collection of three cities. –2. the three cities of gold, silver, and iron in

the sky, air and earth built for demons by Maya; (these cities were burnt

down, along with the demons inhabiting them, by Śiva at the request of

the gods); Ku. 7. 48; Amaru. 2; Me. 56; Bh. 2. 123; (–raḥ) N. of a demon

or demons presiding over these cities. -adhipatiḥ N. of Maya, -aṁtakaḥ,

-ariḥ, -ghnaḥ, -dahanaḥ, -dviṣ m. -haraḥ &c. epithets of Śiva; Bh. 3. 123;

R. 17. 14. -dāhaḥ burning of the three cities; Ki. 5. 14. (–rī) 1. N. of a

place near Jabbalpura, formerly capital of the kings of Chedi. –2. N. of a

country. –puruṣa a. 1. having the length of three men. –2. having three

assistants. (–ṣaṁ) the three ancestors, father, grand-father, and great-

grand-father. –pṛṣṭhaṁ the highest heaven. –pauruṣa a. 1. belonging to,

or extending over, three generations of men. –2. offered to three (as

oblations). –3. inherited from three (as an estate). –prasrutaḥ an

elephant in rut. –phalā the three myrobalans taken collectively, (Mar.

hiraḍā, behaḍā and āṁvaLakāṭhī). –baṁdhanaḥ the individual soul. –bali,

–balī, –valiḥ, –valī f. 1. the three folds or wrinklas of skin above the

navel of a woman (regarded as a mark of beauty);

kṣāmodaroparilasattrivalīlatānāṁ Bh. 1. 93, 81; cf. Ku. 1. 39. –2. the

anus. –balīkaṁ the anus. –bāhuḥ a kind of fighting with swords. –bhaṁ

three signs of the zodiac, or ninety degrees. –bhadraṁ copulation, sexual

union, cohabitation. –bhāgaḥ 1. the third part. –2. the third part of a sign

of the zodiac. –bhujaṁ a triangle. –bhuvanaṁ the three worlds; puṇyaṁ

yāyāstribhuvamagurordhāma caṁḍīśvarasya Me. 33, Bh. 1. 99. -guruḥ

Śiva. -patiḥ Viṣṇu. –bhūmaḥ a palace with three floors. –madhu n. —

madhuraṁ sugar, honey, and ghee. –mārgā the Ganges; Ku. 1. 28. —

mukuṭaḥ the Trikūṭa mountain. –mukhaḥ an epithet of Buddha. –muni

ind. having the three sages pāṇini, kātyāyana and pataṁjali; trimuni

vyākaraṇam. –mūrtiḥ 1. the united form of Brahmā, Viṣṇu, and Maheśa,

the Hindu triad; Ku. 2. 4. –2. Buddha, or Jina. –mūrdhan m. a demon; U.

2. 15. –yaṣṭiḥ a necklace of three strings. –yāmakaṁ sin. –yāmā 1. night

(consisting of 3 watches or praharas, the first and last half prahara being

excluded); saṁkṣipyeta kṣaṇa iva kathaṁ dīrghayāmā triyāmā Me. 108,

Ku. 7. 21, 26; R. 9. 70, V. 3. 22. –2. turmeric. –3. the Indigo plant. –4.

the river Yamunā. –yugaḥ an epithet of Śiva. –yoniḥ a law-suit (in which

a person engages from anger, covetousness, or infatuation). –rasakaṁ

spirituous liquor. –rātra a. lasting for three nights. (–traḥ) a festival

lasting for three nights. (–traṁ) a period of three nights. –rekhaḥ a

conch-shell. –liṁga a. having three genders, i. e. an adjective. –2.

possessing the three Guṇas. (–gāḥ) the country called Telanga. (–gī) the

three genders taken collectively. –lokaṁ the three worlds. (–kaḥ) an

inhabitant of the three worlds. -ātman m. the Supreme Being. -īśaḥ the

sun. -nāyaḥ ‘lord of the three worlds’ an epithet of 1. Indra; R. 3. 45. –2.

of Śiva; Ku. 5. 77. –lokī the three worlds taken collectively, the universe;

satvāmeva trilokīsariti haraśiraścuṁbinīvicchaṭāyāṁ Bh. 3. 95; Śānti. 4.

22. –locanaḥ Śiva. (–nā) 1. an unchaste woman. –2. an epithet of

Durgā. –lohakaṁ the three metals: gold, silver, and copper. –vargaḥ 1.

the three objects of worldly existence, i. e. dharma, artha, and kāma; Ku.

5. 38. –2. the three states of loss, stability, and increase; kṣayaḥ

sthānaṁ ca vṛddhiśca trivargo nītivedināṁ Ak. –3. the three qualities of

nature, i. e. sattva, rajas, and tamas. –4. the three higher castes. –5.

the three myrobalans. –6. propriety, decorum. –varṇakaṁ the first three

of the four castes of Hindus taken collectively. –varṣa a. three years old.

–vāraṁ ind. three times, thrice. –vikramaḥ Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf

incarnation. –vidyaḥ a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas. –vidha a. of

three kinds, three-fold. –viṣṭapaṁ, –piṣṭapaṁ 1. the world of Indra

heaven; triviṣṭapasyeva patiṁ jayaṁtaḥ R. 6. 78. –2. the three worlds. –

sad m. a god. –vṛt a. 1. threefold. –2. consisting of three parts. (–m.) 1.

a sacrifice. –2. a girdle of three strings.

(3) an amulet of three strings. (–f.) a plant possessing valuable

purgative properties. -karaṇa combining three things, i. e. earth, water,

and fire. –veṇiḥ, –ṇī f. the place near Prayāga where the Ganges joins

the Yamunā and receives under ground the Sarasvatī. –vedaḥ a

Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas. –śaṁkuḥ 1. N. of a celebrated king

of the Solar race, king of Ayodhyā and father of Hariśchandra. [He was a

wise, pious, and just king, but his chief fault was that he loved his person

to an inordinate degree. Desiring to celebrate a sacrifice by virtue of

which he could go up to heaven in his mortal body, he requested his

family-priest Vasiṣṭha to officiate for him; but being refused he next

requested his hundred sons who also rejected his absurd proposal. He,

therefore, called them cowardly and impotent, and was, in return for

these insults, cursed and degraded by them to be a Chandala. While he

was in this wretched condition, Viśvāmitra, whose family Triśaṅku had in

times of famine laid under deep obligations, undertook to celebrate the

sacrifice, and invited all the gods to be present. They, however, declined;

whereupon the enraged Viśvāmitra by his own power lifted up Triśaṅku to

the skies with his cherished mortal body. He began to soar higher and

higher till his head struck against the vault of the heaven, when he was

hurled down headforemost by Indra and the other gods. The mighty

Viśvāmitra, however, arrested him in his downward course, saying ‘Stay

Triśaṅku’, and the unfortunate monarch remained suspended with his

head towards the earth as a constellation in the southern hemisphere.

Hence the well-known proverb; triśaṁkurivāṁtarā tiṣṭha S. 2]. –2. the

Chātaka bird. –3. a cat. –4. a grass-hopper. –5. a fire-fly. -jaḥ an epithet

of Hariśchandra. -yājin m. an epithet of Viśvāmitra. –śata a. three

hundred. (–taṁ) 1. one hundred and three. –2. three hundred. –śaraṇaḥ

a Buddha. –śālaṁ a house with three halls or chambers. –śikhaṁ 1. a

trident. –2. a crown or crest (with three points). –śiras m. 1. N. of a

demon killed by Rāma. –2. an epithet of Kubera. –3. fever. –śīrṣaḥ Śiva.

–śīrṣakaṁ, –śūlaṁ a trident. -aṁkaḥ, -dhārin m. an epithet of Śiva. —

śūlin m. an epithet of Śiva. –śṛṁgaḥ 1. the Trikuṭa mountain. –2. a

triangle. –śokaḥ the soul. –ṣaṣṭiḥ f. sixty-three. –saṁdhyaṁ, –saṁdhyī

the three periods of the day, i. e. dawn, noon, and sunset. –saṁdhyaṁ

ind. at the time of the three Sandhyās. –saptata a. seventy-third. —

saptatiḥ f. seventy-three. –saptan, –sapta a. pl. three times 7, i. e. 21.

–sama a. (in geom.) having three equal sides, equilateral. –sāmyaṁ an

equilibrium of the three (qualities). –sthalī the three sacred places, kāśī,

prayāga, and gayā. –srotas f. an epithet of the Ganges; trisrotasaṁ

vahati yo gaganapratiṣṭhāṁ S. 7. 6; R. 10. 63; Ku. 7. 15. –sītya, –halya

a. ploughed thrice (as a field). –hāyaṇa a. three years old.

tva mfn. (“tvad”). one, several

tva mfn. “tva-tva”, one-the other

tva mfn. “tvad”, partly

tva mfn. “tvadtvad”, partly-partly

tva base of the 2nd personal pron.: nom. “tvam” acc. “tvām” instr.

“tvayā” ([ and “tvā” comp. see “tvā-datta, -dāta, -vṛdha” &c.]) dat.

“tubhyam” ([& “-bhya” abl. “tvat” or “tvad” ([ and “tvat-tas” &c.]) gen.

“tava” loc. “tve” ([; cf. g. “cādi”]), “tvayi” ([ &c.]); enclitic forms are

acc. “tvā” ([ gen. dat. “te” ([ &c.; = [characters] ]); ([cf. Lat. ‘tu’ &c.])

tva mfn. thy, your, ii, 20, 2.

-riḍhvam, -riddhvam” ; Subj. 2. sg. “tvariṣṭhās” to hurry, make haste,

move with speed &c.: Caus. “tvarayati” (Impv. “-raya”; aor. “atatvarat”

to cause to hasten, quicken, urge forward (with acc. dat. or inf.) &c.;

“tvār-“, to convert quickly into the state (“bhāva” dat.) of ; cf. “tur”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

tvar 1 A. (tvarata, tvarita tūrṇa) To hurry, make haste, move with speed,

do anything quickly; bhavānsuhṛdarthe tvaratāṁ M. 2; nānunetumabalāḥ

sa tatvare R. 19. 38. –Caus. (tvarayati)

(1) To cause to hasten, expedite, urge forward, accelerate;

tvarayorvaśīṁ V. 2; Ku. 4. 36.

(2) To call quickly away; Māl. 5. 25.

“dakṣate” (p. “dakṣamāṇa”; pf. “dadakṣe”) to be able or strong, 16, 6 if.

; to grow, increase ; to act quickly ; to go, xix, 8; to hurt Caus.

“dakṣayati” (aor. “adadakṣa”), to make able or strong

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dakṣ

(1) A. (dakṣate)

(1) To grow, increase.

(2) To do, go or act quickly.

(3) To hurt, kill.

(4) To act conformably to another (Paras.).

(5) To be competent or able.

(6) To go, move.

ghma”) with “paścā”, or “-cāt”, to fall short of (cf. “a-pascā-daghvan”) ;

with “adhas”, to reach below the regular height ; to strike ; to protect (cf.

“daṅgh”) cl.4. “daghyati”, to go ; to flow ; cf. “ati-, ā-; pradaghas”;

[characters].

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dagh I. 5 P. (daghnoti)

(1) To kill, hurt.

(2) To go, leap.

(3) To protect. –II. 4 P. (daghyati) Ved.

(1) To go, flow.

(2) To reach, attain.

(3) To go away.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dad 1 A. (dadate) To give, offer, present.

bhan”, if., x and ; Pot. “-bheyam” and 5. “dabhnoti” (“to go” ; Impv. “-

nuhi” ; cf. “ā-“, -Pass. “dabhyate” ; pf. “dadābha”, v, 32, 7; “-dambha” [

1-2, 6 ; pl. “debhur” [ 6-4, 120 4 ; also “dadambhur” and 2.sg. “debhitha”

or “dadambhitha” ; aor. pl. “dadabhanta” ; “adambhiṣur” to hurt, injure,

destroy ; to deceive, abandon f. viii: Caus. (Subj. and p. “damebhayat”;

2. sg. “-yas, -ya”) to destroy ; “dambhayati” or “dābh-“, to impel ;

“dambkayate”, to accumulate, xxx, 4: Desid. “dipsati” (Subj. [ iv, 36, 1 f.

] and p. “dipsat”) to intend to injure or destroy ; “dhips-, dhīps-,

didambhiṣati”

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dabh , daṁbh I. 1. 5. P. (dabhati or dabhnoti, dabdha; desid. dhipsati,

dhīpsati, didaṁbhiṣati)

(1) To injure, hurt.

(2) To deceive, cheat.

(3) To go. –II. 10 U. (daṁbhayati-te) To impel, propel, drive onward.

Pass. “adami”, 3, 34 ; P. “-mit” to be tamed or tranquillised (Impv.

“dāmyata”); to tame, subdue, conquer (ind. p. “damitvā”) cl.9.irreg. (?

Subj. 2. sg. “danas”) id. Caus. “damayati” (p. “-mayat”; ā. to subdue,

overpower ; Desid. see “dān”; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘domare’ &c.])

dam a house (gen. pl. “damām”); “patir dan” (gen. sg.) = “dam-patis”,

99, 6; 105, 2; i, 149, 1; 153, 4; “pati dan” = “dam-patī”, 120, 6; “śiśur

dan” “a child of the house”, x, 61, 20; ([cf. [characters] &c.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dam 4 P. (dāmyati, damita, dāṁta)

(1) To be tamed.

(2) To be calm or tranquil; Ms. 4. 35, 6. 8, 7. 141.

(3) To tame, subdue, conquer, restrain; yamo dāmyati rākṣasān Bk.

18. 20; damitvāpyarisaṁghātān 9. 42, 19; 15. 37.

(4) To pacify. –Caus. (damayati te)

(1) To tame.

(2) To subdue, conquer, overpower.

(3) To afflict, crush down; atibhāreṇa damayati Pt. 4.

“-kṣam” ; 3. pl “-kskur” ; Subj. “dhāk” ; 2. sg. “dhakṣi”, iv, 4, 4; p.

“dhakṣat” [also nom. m.], vi, 3, 4 x, 91, 7 “dahṣat”, i, 130, 8; fut.

“dhakṣyati” [ 7-2, 10 6] [Pot. “dhakṣyet”, i, 8383] &c.; “dahiṣy-“, i, 2120

; inf. “dagdhum”) to burn, consume by fire, scorch roast &c.; to cauterise

; to consume, destroy completely &c.; to torment, torture, pain, distress,

disturb, grieve &c.: Pass. “dahyate” (“-ti” if., xiif.); to be burnt, burn, be

in flames &c.; to be consumed by fire or destroyed ; to be inflamed (a

wound) ; to be consumed by internal heat or grief, suffer pain, be

distressed or vexed &c.; Caus. “dāhayati” to burn or be burned &c.; to

cause to be cooked 15523 (aor. pl. “adīdahan”): Desid. “didhakṣati” (cf.

“-kṣā, -kṣu”) to be about to burn or consume or destroy i-iv (p. “-

kṣamāṇa”): Desid. Caus. (p. “-kṣayat”) to cause any one to make efforts

to burn Intens. “dandahīti, -hyate” ( 3-1, 24; 7-4, 86) to burn or destroy

completely 8726 (Impv. “-dagdhi”) ; ā. to be burnt completely 7040

([cf. Lith. ‘degu’, I am hot”; Goth. ‘dag-s’; Old Germ. ‘tah-t’, “a wick”]).

dah mfn. “burning” see “uśa-“.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dah 1 P. (dahati, dadāha, adhākṣati, dhakṣyati, dagdhuṁ, dagdha, desid.

didhakṣati)

(1) To burn, scorch (fig. also); dagdhuṁ viśvaṁ dahanakiraṇairnoditā

dvādaśārkāḥ Ve. 3. 6, 5. 20; sapadi madanānalo dahati mama mānasaṁ

dehi mukhakamalamadhupānaṁ Gīt. 10; S. 3. 17.

(2) To consume, destroy completely.

(3) To pain, torment, afflict, distress, grieve;

ityamātmakṛtamapratihataṁ cāpalaṁ dahati S. 5; tatsaviṣamiva śalyaṁ

dahati māṁ 6. 8; etattu māṁ dahati yada gṛhamasmadīyaṁ

kṣīṇāryamityatithayaḥ pasvirjayaṁti Mk. 1. 12, R. 8. 86, U. 4. 14.

(4) To cauterize (in medicine). –WITH nis 1. to burn, consume. –2. to

torment, distress, pain. –pari to burn, scorch; diśi diśi paridagdhā

bhūmayaḥ pāvakena Rs. 1. 24; Bg. 1. 30. –pra 1. to burn. –2. to burn

completely. –3. to pain, torment. –4. to trouble, tease. –saṁ to burn;

abhijanaḥ saṁdahyatāṁ vahninā Bh. 2. 39.

dā f. heat, pain

dā cl.3. “dadāti” (pl. “-dati” &c.; ā. “datte” ; 1. sg. “dadmi” if.; Impv.

“dadātu” pl. “-dahu”; 2. sg. “daddhi” f. iv, vi, viii, x; “dehi” [ 6-4, 119] f.

viii, x f. &c.; “nigaḍāni” to put on or apply fetters “pāvakam”, to set on

fire; “agnīn” to consume by fire ; “śāram”, to move a chess-man ;

“argalam”, to draw a bolt, bar ; “jānu”, to kneel upon (gen.) iii f.;

“padam”, to tread upon [loc.] ; to direct the steps 74; “viṣam”, to poison

acc.!); “garam” id. gen.); — ā. to carry, hold, keep, preserve ; to show

(aor. “adadiṣṭa; aded-” fr. “diś” Caus. “dāpayati” ( vii, 3, 36; aor.

“adīdapat”, 4, 1 and 58 to cause to give or be given, cause to bestow or

present or give up, oblige to pay, make restore &c.; to demand from

(abl.) ; to cause to utter or speak 15782 “ghoṣaṇām”, to cause to be

made known lxiv, 86; to cause to place or advance, xii, 160; to cause to

perform, v, 112 to cause to be put on (loc.) Desid. “ditsati” ( 7-4, 54 and

58; p. “didāsat” ; “ditsat”, ii, vii-ix ; Pot. “-tseyam” ; pf. 2. sg. “didāsitha”

; cf. to wish to give, be ready to bestow &c.; to wish to give in marriage

&c.: Intens. “dedīyate” ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘do’; &c.])

dā m. a giver (dat. “de”); vi, 16, 26 (nom. “dās”)

dā ifc. “giving, granting” see “an-aśva-, a-bhikṣa-, aśva-, ātma-“, &c. “-

dā”

dā m. “an-āśīr-“.

dā For “do”, to cut q.v.

dā cl.4.P. “dyati” (cf. “ā-” 4. “dā”), to bind, only in “dīṣva” ([cf.

[characters] ]).

dā For “de” q.v.

dā f. ( “de”), protection, defence

dā For “dai” q.v.

dā f. ( “das”) cleansing, purifying

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dā I. 1 P. (yacchati, datta] To give, grant. –WITH prati to exchange;

tilebhyaḥ prati yacchati māṣān Sk. –II. 2. P. (dāti,) To cut; dadāti

draviṇaṁ bhūri dāti dāridryamarthināṁ K. R. –III. 4. P. (dāyati) To bind

(?). –IV. 3 U. (dadāti, datte; dadau-dade, adāt-adita, dāsyati-te, dātuṁ,

datta; but with ā the p. p. is ātta; with upa, upātta; with ni, nidatta or

nītta, and with pra, pradatta or pratta)

(1) To give, grant, bestow, offer, yield, impart, present (usually with

acc. of the thing and dat., sometimes gen. or loc. also, of the person);

avakāśaṁ kilodanvān rāmāyābhyarthito dadau R. 4. 58; secanaghaṭaiḥ

bālapādapabhyeḥ payo dātumita evābhivartate S. 1; Ms. 3. 31, 9. 271;

kathamasya stanaṁ dāsye Hariv.

(2) To pay (as debt, fine &c.).

(3) To hand or deliver over.

(4) To restore, return.

(5) To give up, sacrifice, surrender; prāṇām dā to sacrifice one’s life;

so ātmānaṁ dā to sacrifice oneself.

(6) To put, place, apply, plant; karṇe karaṁ dadāti &c.

(7) To give in marriage; yasmai dadyāt pitā tvenāṁ Ms. 5. 151; Y. 2.

146, 3. 24.

(8) To allow, permit (usually with inf.); bāṣpastu na dadātyenāṁ

draṣṭuṁ citragatāmapi S. 6. 21. (The meanings of this root may be

variously modified or extended according to the noun with which it is

connected; mano dā to think, direct the mind to anything; nītau mano

dīyate Mu. 2. 5; avakāśaṁ dā to give place to, make room; (see

avakāśa); karṇaṁ dā to give ear to or listen; darśanaṁ dā to show

oneself to, grant audience to; śabdaṁ dā to make a noise; tālaṁ dā to

clap the hands; ātmānaṁ khedāya dā to expose oneself to trouble; ātape

dā to expose to the sun’s heat; ājñāṁ, nideśaṁ dā to issue orders,

command; āśiṣaṁ dā to pronounce a blessing; cakṣuḥ, dṛṣṭiṁ dā to cast

a glance, see; vācaṁ dā to address a speech to; prativacaḥ, –vacanaṁ

or pratyuttaraṁ dā to give reply; śokaṁ dā to cause grief; śrāddhaṁ dā

to perform a Śrāddha; mārgaṁ dā to make way for, allow to pass, stand

out of the way; varaṁ dā to grant a boon; saṁgrāmaṁ dā to fight;

argalaṁ dā to bolt, fasten or secure with a latch; nigaḍaṁ dā to put in

chains, fetter; saṁketaṁ dā to make an appointment; śāpaṁ dā to

curse; vṛttiṁ dā to enclose, fence in; agniṁ, pāvakaṁ dā to set on fire,

&c. &c. –Caus. (dāpayati-te) To cause to give, grant, &c. –Desid.

(ditsati-te) To wish to give, &c.

dā

(1) Protection, defence.

(2) Cleaning, purifying.

to ask, beg; to go; ā. “-te”, to suffer pain

div cl.4. “dīvyati, -te” &c. (perf. “dideva” ; fut. “deviṣyati”; cond,

“adeviṣyat” ; aor. “adevīt” ; &c.; infin. “devitum” &c.; ind. p. “devitvā” ;

“-dīvya” to cast, throw, esp. dice i.e. play, gamble (“akṣais” ; “akṣān” ,

with (instr. , for (instr., ii, 2061 &c.; acc. ; dat. ; gen. [“śatasya”] ; to lay

a wager, bet with (“sārdham”), upon (dat.) ; to play, sport, joke, trifle

with (acc. ; to have free scope, spread, increase ( ii, 193 B. “vardhati”);

to shine, be bright [Zd. ‘div’; (?) Lit. “dyvas”] ; to praise, rejoice, be

drunk or mad; to sleep; to wish for; to go Caus. “devayati”, to cause to

play () or to sport Desid. “dideviṣati” and “dudyūṣati” Caus. of Desid.

“dudyūṣayati”, to incite to play Intens. “dedivīti, dedyeti, dedeti” &c.

div (nom. “dyaus”; voc. “dyaus” [ vi, 51, 5 ; acc. “dyām” “divam”; instr.

“divā” or “dīvā” [see below]; dat. “dive” [“dyave” ; abl. gen. “divas”

[rarely “dyos” e.g.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

div f. [dīvyatyatra div-bā -ādhāre ḍivi Tv.] (Nom. sing. dyauḥ)

(1) The heaven; R. 3. 4, 12; Me. 30.

(2) The sky.

(3) A day.

(4) Light, brilliance.

(5) Fire, glow of fire. N. B. The compounds with div as first member

are mostly irregular; e. g. divaspatiḥ an epithet of Indra; anatikramaṇīyā

divaspaterājñā S. 6. divaspṛthivyau heaven and earth. divijaḥ, diviṣṭhaḥ,

divisthaḥ, divisa (ṣa) d m., divokas m., divaukas, –saḥ ‘inhabitant of the

heaven’, a god; S. 7; R. 3. 19, 47; diviṣadravṛṁdaiḥ Gīt. 7. divaspṛś m.

the Supreme Being. divispṛś a. reaching or pervading the sky. divodbhavā

cardamoms. divolkā a meteor. divaukas m. 1. a god. –2. the Chātaka

bird. –3. a deer. –4. a bee. –5. an elephant.

Pres. stem]; pf. “dideśa, didiśe”; fut. “dekṣyati, -te” [“deṣṭā” ; aor.

“adikṣat” &c.; “adikṣi, adiṣṭa” ; inf. “deṣṭum” etc.; “diśe” to point out,

show, exhibit ; to produce, bring forward (as a witness in a court of

justice) ; to promote, effect, accomplish ; to assign, grant, bestow upon

(dat. ; gen. ; loc. ; to pay (tribute) 16061; to order, command, bid (inf.)

Pass. “diśyate” &c.: Caus. “deśayati, -te”; aor. “adīdiśat”, to show, point

out, assign ; to direct, order, command ; teach, communicate, tell, inform

confess Desid. “didikṣati, -te”, to wish to show &c.: Intens. “dediṣṭe”, 3.

pl. “-śate”, (p. f. pl. “-śatīs”) to show, exhibit, manifest ; to order,

command Pass. “dediśyate”, to show or approve one’s self. ‘dis’; Gk.

[greek]; Lat. ‘dico’, ‘in-drcare’ &c.; Goth. ‘teihan’; O. E. ‘teon’ (fr.

‘tihan’).]

diś f. quarter or region pointed at, direction, cardinal point &c. (four in

number, viz. “prācī”, east; “dakṣiṇā”, south; “pratici”, west; and “udīcī”,

north , “dhruvā” , “ūrdhvā” , “vy-adhvā” i.e. the 4 cardinal and the 4

intermediate quarters, S. E., S. W. N. W., and N. E. [cf. “upa-“]; and

even a 9th, and 10th, “tiryak” or “adhas” and “ūrdhvam” ; “diśām pati”

[cf. “dik-pati” below] = Soma , or = Rudra

f. quarter, region, direction, place, part (pl., rarely eg. the whole world

e.g. “diśi, diśi”, in all directions, everywhere ; “digbhyas”, from every

quarter ; “diśo diśas”, hither and thither ; “diśo’valokya”, looking into the

quarter of the sky i.e. into the air “diso ‘ntāt”, from the extremities of the

world

f. country, esp. foreign country, abroad (cf. “dig-āgata” and “-lābha”,

below)

f. space (beside “kāla”)

f. the numeral 10 (cf. above )

f. a hint, reference, instance, example ; precept, order, manner ([cf.

[characters] O. H.G. ‘zeiga’ (see also “diśā”)])

f. mark of a bite

f. N. of a river

diś a vulgar form for “dṛś”, to see 13

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

diś 6 U. (diśati-te, diṣṭa; desid. didikṣati-te)

(1) To point out, show, exhibit, produce (as a witness); sākṣiṇaḥ

saṁti metyuktvā diśetyukto diśenna yaḥ Ms. 8. 57, 52, 53.

(2) To assign, allot; iṣṭāṁ gatiṁ tasya surā diśāṁti Mb.

(3) To give, grant, bestow upon, deliver or make over to;

bāṇamatrabhavate nijaṁ diśan Ki. 13. 68; R. 5. 30, 11, 2, 16. 72.

(4) To pay (as tribute).

(5) To consent to; R. 11. 49.

(6) To direct, order, command.

(7) To allow, permit; smartuṁ diśaṁti na divaḥ surasuṁdarībhyaḥ Ki.

5. 28. –Caus. (deśayati-te)

(1) To show, point out, allot, assign.

(2) To teach, communicate, tell, inform.

(3) To direct, order.

(4) To confer, bestow.

diś f. [diśati dadātpavakāśaṁ diś-kvip] (Nom. sing. dik-g)

(1) A direction, cardinal point, point of the compass, quarter of the

sky; diśaḥ prasedurmaruto vavuḥ sukhāḥ R. 3. 14; diśi diśi kirati

sajalakaṇajālaṁ Gīt. 4.

(2)

(a) The mere direction of a thing, hint, indication (of the general

lines); iti dik (often used by commentators &c.); itthaṁ laukikaśabdānāṁ

diṅmātramiha darśitaṁ Sk.

(b) (Hence) Mode, manner, method; muneḥ pāṭhoktadiśā S. D.;

digiyaṁ sūtrakṛtā pradarśitā; dāsīsabhaṁ nṛpasabhaṁ rakṣaḥsabhamimā

diśaḥ Ak.

(3) Region, space, place in general.

(4) A foreign or distant region.

(5) A point of view, manner of considering a subject.

(6) A precept, order.

(7) The number ‘ten’.

(8) A side or party.

(9) The mark of a bite. (N. B. In comp. diś becomes dig before words

beginning with vowels and soft consonants, and dik before words

beginning with hard consonants; e. g. digaṁbara, diggaja, dikpatha,

dikkarin, &c.)

— Comp.

–aṁtaḥ end of the direction or horizon, remote distance, remote

place; Bv. 1. 2; Māl. 2. 9; R. 3. 4, 5. 67, 16. 87; nānādigaṁtāgatā rājānaḥ

&c.

–aṁtaraṁ 1. another direction. –2. the intermediate space,

atmosphere, space. –3. a distant quarter, another or foreign country.

–aṁbara a. having only the directions for his clothing, stark naked,

unclothed; digaṁbaratvena niveditaṁ vasu Ku. 5. 72. (

–raḥ) 1. a naked mendicant (of the Jaina or Buddha sect.). –2. a

mendicant, an ascetic. –3. an epithet of (

(1)) Śiva; (

(2)) Skanda. –4. darkness. (–rī) an epithet of Durgā. –aṁbarakaḥ a

naked mendicant (of the Jaina sect). –īśaḥ –īśvaraḥ the regent of a

quarer; Ku. 5. 53; see aṣṭadikpāla. –kanyā, –kāṁtā, –kāminī a region of

the sky (considered as a virgin). –karaḥ 1. a youth, youthful man. –2. an

epithet of Śiva. –karikā, –karī a young girl or woman. –karin, –gajaḥ, —

daṁtin, –vāraṇaḥ m. one of the eight elephants said to guard and preside

over the eight cardinal points; (see aṣṭadiggaja); digdaṁtiśeśāḥ

kakubhaṣcakāra Vikr. 7. 1. –grahaṇaṁ observation of the quarters of the

compass. –cakraṁ 1. the horizon. –2. the whole world. –jayaḥ, –vijayaḥ

‘conquest of the directions,’ the conquest of various countries in all

directions, conquest of the world; sa digvijayamavyājavīraḥ smara

ivākarot Vikr. 4. 1. –taṭaṁ the horizon. –darśanaṁ 1. showing merely the

direction, pointing out only the general mode or manner. –2. a general

outline or survey. –3. a compass. –dāhaḥ preternatural redness of the

horizon. –nāgaḥ 1. an elephant of the quarter of the compass; see

diggaja. –2. N. of a poet said to be a contemporary of Kālidāsa. (This

interpretation is based on Mallinātha’s gloss on Me. 14 which is, however,

very doubtful). –patiḥ, –pālaḥ the regent or guardian of a quarter; (for

the names of the several regents, see aṣṭadikpāla; cf. Ms. 5. 96; 7. 303.

also). –pathaḥ the surrounding region. –bhāgaḥ a point of the compass,

direction. –maṁḍalaṁ = dikcakraṁ q. v. –mātraṁ the mere direction or

indication. –mukhaṁ any quarter or part of the sky; harati me

harivāhanadiṅmukhaṁ V. 3. 6; Amaru. 5. –mohaḥ mistaking the way or

direction. –vastra a. stark naked, unclothed. (–straḥ) 1. a Jain or

Buddhist mendicant of the digaṁvara class. –2. an epithet of Śiva. —

vibhāvita a. renowned or celebrated in all quarters.

fly away “ḍī”; Gk. [greek]. ]

dī (“dīdī” or “dīdi”). cl.3.P. 3. pl. “dīdyati” (Impv. “dīdihi” and “didīhi” ;

impf. “adīdet” ; pf. “dīdāya” or () “dīdaya; dīdetha, didiyus” ; Subj.

“dīdayati, -yat” ; “dīdayat” ; “dīdāyat” ; “dīdayante” ; Prec. “dīdyāsam” ;

p. Pres. P. “dīdiat” ā. “dīdiāna”, p. pf. “dīvas”) to shine, be bright; to

shine forth, excel, please, be admired ; bestow upon (loc. or dat.) by

shining

dī cl.4.ā. “dīyate”, to decay, perish ( xxvi, 25; “didīye; dāsyate, dātā;

adāsta” Caus. “dāpayati” Desid. “didiṣate”and”didāsate”

dī f. decay, ruin.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dī I. 4 A. (dīyate, dīna)

(1) To perish, die.

(2) To waste, decay, diminish –II. 4 P. (dīyati) (Ved). soar, fly. –III. 3

P. Ved.

(1) To shine.

(2) To please, be admired, appear good.

“dodhat”, impetuous, wild, fierce

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dudh 1 P. (dodhati) Ved.

(1) To kill, hurt, injure.

(2) To drive forward, propel.

duh mfn. (nom. “dhuk”) milking

mfn. yielding, granting (cf. “kāma-, go-” &c.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

duh I. 2 U. (dogdhi, dugdhe, dudoha-duduhe, adhukṣat-ta or adugdha,

dhokṣyati-te, dogdhuṁ, dugdha)

(1) To milk or squeeze out, extract (with two acc.); bhāsvaṁti ratnāni

mahauṣadhīśca pṛthūpadiṣṭāṁ duduhurdharitrīṁ Ku. 1. 2; yaḥ payo

dogdhi pāṣāṇaṁ sa rāmāddhūtimāptuyāt Bk. 8. 82; payo ghaṭodhnīrapi gā

duhaṁti 12. 73; R. 5. 33.

(2) To draw anything out of another (with two acc.);

prāṇānduhannivātmānaṁ śokaṁ cittamavārudhat Bk. 6. 9.

(3) To drain a thing of its contents, to make profit out of; dudoha gāṁ

sa yajñāya śasyāya maghavā divaṁ R. 1. 26.

(4) To yield or grant (any desired object); kāmāndugdhe

viprakarṣatyalakṣmīṁ U. 5. 31.

(5) To enjoy. –Caus. (dohayati-te) To cause to milk. –Desid.

(dudhukṣati-te) To wish to milk; rājan dudhukṣasi yadi kṣitidhenumetāṁ

Bh. 2. 46. –II. 1 P. (dohati) To hurt, pain, distress.

“dṛṁhantam” ; ā. “-te”, to be firm or strong &c. (trans. = P. only in

“dṛṁhethe” “dṛṁhāmahai” ; cl.4. P. ā. only Impf. “dṛhya” and “-hyasva”,

be strong ; cl.1. “darhati”, to grow ; pf. “dadarha” or “dadṛṁha”; p. ā.

“dādṛhāṇa”, fixing, holding ; fixed, firm, i, 85, 10; aor. “adadṛhanta”, they

were fixed or firm, x, 82, 1: Caus. P. ā. “dṛṁhayati, -te”, to make firm, fix,

establish

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dṛṁh I. 1 P. (dṛṁhati, dṛṁhita)

(1) To make firm, strengthen.

(2) To make fast, fasten.

(3) To fortify. –II.

(1) A. (dṛṁhate)

(1) To be firm.

(2) To grow or increase.

“divā” or “dīvā” [see below]; dat. “dive” [“dyave” ; abl. gen. “divas”

[rarely “dyos” e.g. ; loc. “divi, dyavi”; du. “dyāvā” s.v. [“dyavī” as voc.

only iv, 56, 5]; pl. nom. “dyāas” [“divas” only ix, 118, 11]; acc. “dyūn”

[rare, “divas, divas” e.g. i, 194, 2; iv, 3, 8]; instr. “dyubhis”; native

grammarians give as stems “div” and “dyo”; the latter is declined through

all cases like “go”, but really does not occur except in forms mentioned

above and in “dyo-salila” “div” and “dyu” regularly alternate before vow.

and cons.) m. (rarely f.) in Ved. f. in later Skr. heaven, the sky (regarded

in Ved. as rising in three tiers [“avama, madhyama, uttama” or “tṛtīya”

(“dyauṣ” “pitā”, while the earth is the mother [cf. “dyāvā-pṛthivī”], and

Ushas the daughter), rarely as a goddess, daughter of Prajā-pati ; m.

(rarely n.) day (esp. in pl. and in such forms as “divā”), by day (cf. s.v.);

“dyavi-dyavi”, daily, every day; “anu dyūn”, day by day, daily; “dyubhis”

and “upa dyubhis”, by day or in the course of days, a long time ; m.

brightness, sheen, glow (only “dyubhis”) ; fire (nom. “dyus”) “dyu”; Gk.

[greek] &c. = ‘dyaus’, ‘divas’; Lat. ‘Jou’, ‘Ju’ in ‘Ju-piter’, ‘Jovis’, ‘Jovi’ &c.

= ‘dyavas’, ‘dyavi’; O.E. ‘Tiw’; O.H.G. ‘ZIu’ O.N. ‘Tyr’.]

dyu cl.2.P. “dyauti” ( xxiv, 31; pf. “dudyāva”, 3 pl. “dudyuvur”) to go

against, attack, assail

dyu for 3. “div” as inflected stem and in comp. before consonants.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dyu 2 P. (dyauti) To advance towards, encounter, attack, assail; Bk. 6.

118, 14. 101.

dyu n.

(1) A day.

(2) The sky.

(3) Brightness.

(4) Heaven.

(5) Sharpness; cf. adyu. –m. Fire. (dyu is a substitute for div f. before

terminations beginning with consonants and in compounds).

— Comp.

–gaḥ a bird.

–caraḥ 1. a planet. –2. a bird.

–jayaḥ attainment or gaining of heaven.

–dalaḥ noon.

–dhuniḥ f.,

–nadī the heavenly Ganges.

–nivāsaḥ a deity, god; śokāgninā’gād dyunivāsabhūyaṁ Bk. 3. 21.

–nivāsin m. 1. a deity. –2. a virtuous man.

–patiḥ 1. the sun. –2. an epithet of Indra.

–maṇiḥ the sun.

–yoṣit f. an apsaras.

–lokaḥ heaven.

–ṣad, –sad m. 1. a god, deity; Śi. 1. 43. –2. a planet.

–sarit f. the Ganges.

dyut cl.1.ā. “dyotate” (also “-ti”) &c. (pf. “didyute”, p. “-tāna” [cf. ,

“didyota” ; “-dyutur”. ; aor. “adyutat” and “adidyutat” ; “adyaut” ,

“adyotiṣṭa” , P. “dyutat” ā. “-tāna” or “dyutāna” ; fut. “dyotiṣyati” ; ind.

p. “dyutitvā” or “dyot-” ; “-dyutya” to shine, be bright or brilliant: Caus.

“dyotayati”(“-te”, Bhsṭṭ.) to make bright, illuminate, irradiate ; to cause

to appear, make clear or manifest, express, mean Desid. “dedyutiṣati” or

“didyot-” Intens. “davidyot”, 3. pl. “-dyutati” ; “dedyutyate” , to shine,

glitter, be bright or brilliant

dyut f. shining, splendour, ray of light (cf. “danta-“).

dyut Caus. “dyotayati”, to break, tear open (cf. “abhivi-, ā-“).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dyut

(1) A. (dyetate, dyutita or dyotita; desid. didyutiṣate, didyotiṣate) To

shine, be bright or brilliant, didyute ca yathā raviḥ Bk. 14. 104; 6. 26, 7.

107; 8. 89. –Caus. (dyotayati-te)

(1) To illuminate, irradiate; Bk. 8. 46; Ku. 6. 4.

(2) To make clear, explain, elucidate.

(3) To express, mean. –WITH abhi (Caus.) to illuminate; R. 6. 36. –vi

to shine, be bright; vyadyotiṣṭa sabhāvedyāmasau naraśikhitrayī Śi. 2. 3;

1. 20.

dyut m. A ray of light.

1. “drū”).

dru 1. P. (; ep. also ā.) “dravati, -te” &c. &c. (pf. “dudrāva” ; “-drotha,

-druma” ; “-druvur” &c.; aor. “adudruvat” ; “-drot” Subj. “dudravat” ; fut.

“droṣyati” ; inf. “-drotum” ; ind. p. “druṭvā” and “-drutya” to run, hasten,

flee &c.; to run up to (acc.), attack, assault ; to become fluid, dissolve,

melt Caus. “drāvayati” (ep. also “-te; dravayate” see under “drava”) to

cause to run, make flow ; to make fluid, melt, vi, 4, 3; to drive away, put

to flight (Pass. “drāvyate”, vii, 3515) Desid. “dudrūṣati” Gr.: Desid. of

Caus” “dudrāvayiṣati” or “dud-” Intens. “dodrūyate” or “dodroti” Gr.

(“dodrāva” ([Cf.2. “drā” and “dram”; Zd. ‘dru’, ‘drvant’.])

dru mfn. running, going (cf. “mita-, raghu-, śatā”.)

dru f. going, motion

dru mn. (= 3. “dāru”) wood or any wooden implement (as a cup, an oar

&c.)

dru m. a tree or branch (cf. “indra-” “su-, harid-, hari-“).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dru I. 1 P. (dravati, druta; desid. drudrūṣati)

(1) To run, flow, run away, retreat, fly (often with acc.); yathā

nadīnāṁ bahavoṁbu’vegāḥ samudramevābhimukhaṁ dravaṁti Bg. 11.

28; rakṣāṁsi bhītāni diśāṁ dravaṁti 36; drutaṁ dravata kauravāḥ Mb.

(2) To rush, attack, assault quickly; Bk. 9. 95.

(3) To become fluid, dissolve, melt, ooze (fig. also); dravati ca

himaraśmāvudrate caṁdrakāṁtaḥ Māl. 1. 24; 8. 12; U. 6. 12; Pt. 4. 33;

dravati hṛdayametat Ve. 5. 21; Śi. 9. 9; Bk. 2. 12.

(4) To go, move. –Caus. drāvayati-te)

(1) To cause to run away, put to flight.

(2) To melt, fuse. –II. 5 P. (druṇoti)

(1) To hurt, injure; taṁ dudrāvādriṇā kapiḥ Bk. 14. 81, 85.

(2) To go.

(3) To repent.

dru m. n. [dravatyūrdhvaṁ dru-bā–ḍu]

(1) Wood.

(2) Any instrument made of wood. –m.

(1) A tree; Ms. 7. 131.

(2) A branch. –f. Motion.

— Comp.

–kilimaṁ the Devadāru tree.

–ghaṇaḥ 1. a mallet, wooden mace. –2. an iron weapon made like

a carpenter’s hammer. –3. an axe, a hatchet. –4. an epithet of Brahmā.

–ghnī a hatchet.

–nakhaḥ a thorn.

–nasa (ṇasa) a. largenosed.

–na (ṇa) haḥ a scabbard; see druṇa-ha also.

–padaṁ Ved. a pillar (in general).

–padī a splay-footed female.

–sallakaḥ a kind of tree (piyāla).

dviṣ cl.2.P. ā. “dveṣṭi, dviṣṭe” (ep. also “dviṣati, -te”; Subj. “dveṣat” ;

impf. “advet”, 3. pl. “adviṣur” and “adviṣan” pf. “didveṣa” ; aor. “dvikṣat,

-ṣata” (3. sg.) ; fut. “dvekṣyati, dveṣā” inf. “dveṣṭum” ; “dveṣṭos” to

hate, show hatred against (acc.; rarely dat. or gen.), be hostile or

unfriendly &c.; to be a rival or a match for Pass. “dviṣyate”; aor.

“adveṣi” Gr.: Caus. “dveṣayati” Desid. “didvikṣati, -te” Gr.; Intens.

“dedviṣyate, dedveṣṭi” or “dedviṣīti” Gr. ([Cf.Zd. ‘dbish’; Gk. [greek];

Germ. ‘Zwist’.])

dviṣ (nom. “dviṭ”), hostility, hatred, dislike; (also m.) foe, enemy &c.;

mfn. hostile, hating, disliking (ifc.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dviṣ 2. U. (dveṣṭi, dviṣṭe; dviṣṭa) To hate, dislike, be hostile towards; na

dvekṣi yajjanamatastvamajātaśatruḥ Ve. 3. 13; Bg. 2. 57, 18. 10; Bk. 17.

61; 18. 9; ramyaṁ dveṣṭi S. 6. 4. (Prepositions like pra, vi and saṁ are

prefixed to this root without any change of meaning.)

dviṣ a. Hostile, hating, inimical. –m. An enemy;

raṁbhrānbeṣaṇadakṣāṇāṁ dviṣāmāmiṣatāṁ yayau R. 12. 11; 3. 45; Pt. 1.

70. –f. Ved. Hostility.

— Comp.

–sevā treachery.

dhan cl.3.P. “dadhanti”. ( 6-1, 192) to cause to run or move quickly (p.

“dadhanat, dadhanvas”; Pot. “dadhanyur” ; to bear fruit Caus.

“dhanayati, -te”, to cause to move or run; to move or run (cf. “dhanv”

and “dhaniṣṭha”).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhan I. 1 P. (dhanati) To sound, –II. 3 P. (dadhaṁti) Ved. To bear fruit.

dhattas” [ 8-2, 38]; pl. “dadhmasi” or “-mas, dhattha, dādhati”; impf.

“adadhāt” pl. “-dhur”, 2. pl. “adhatta” or “adadhāta” ; Subj. “dadhat” or

“-dhāt” [ 7-3, 70 , “-dhas, -dhatas, -dhan”; Pot. “dadhyāt”; Impv.

“dādhātu” pl. “-dhatu”; 2. sg. “dhehi” [fr. “dhaddhi”; cf. “dhattāt” ; 2. pl.

“dhatta”, i, 64, 15, “dhattana”, i, 20, 7, “dadhāta”, vii, 32, 13, or “-tana”,

x, 36, 13 [cf. ; p. “dadhat, -ti” m. pl. “-tas”; ā. 1. sg. “dadhe” [at once 3.

sg. = “dhatte” and = pf. ā.], 2. sg. “dhatse”, viii, 85, 5 or “dhatse” du.

“dadhāthe, -dhāte”; 2. pl. “-dhidhve” [cf. pf.]; 3. pl. “dadhate” ; impf.

“adhatta, -tthās”; Subj. “dadhase”, viii, 32, 6 [ 3-4, 96 ; Pot. “dadhīta”

“dadhīta”, v, 66, 1; Impv. 2. sg. “dhatsva”, x, 87, 2 or “dadhiṣva”, iii, 40, 5

&c.; 2. pl. “dhaddhvam” [ 8-2, 38 or “dadhidhvam” “dadhatām” ; p.

“dadhāna”); rarely cl.1. P. ā. “dadhati, -te” ; only thrice cl.2. P. “dhāti” ;

and once cl.4. ā. Pot. “dhāyeta” (pf.P. “dadhau, -dhātha, -dhatur, -dhimā,

-dhur” &c.; ā. “dadhe” [cf. pr.], “dadhiṣe” or “dhiṣe” du. “dadhāthe, –

dhāte”, 2. pl. “dadhidhve” [cf. pr.]; 3. pl. “dadhire, dadhre”, x, 82, 5; 6, or

“dhire”, i, 166, 10 &c.; p. “dadhāna” [cf. pr.]; aor. P. “adhāt, dhāt, dhās;

adhur, dhur” &c.; Pot. “dheyām, -yur; dhetana” ; 2. sg. “dhāyīs” ; Impv.

“dhātu” [cf. 6-i, 8 3 ; 2. pl. “dhāta” or “-tana”, 3. pl. “dhāntu” ; ā.

“adhita, -thās, adhītām, adhīmahi, dhīmahi, dhimahe, dhāmahe” ; 3. sg.

“ahita, hita” ; Subj. “dhethe” , “dhaithe”, vi, 67, 7; Impv. “dhiṣvā”, ii, 11,

18, &c.; P. “adhat” ; “dhat” ; P. “dhāsur” Subj. “-sathas” and “-satha” ; ā.

“adhiṣi, -ṣata” ; Pot. “dhiṣīya” [P. vii, 4, 45]; “dheṣīya” ; fut. “dhāsyati, –

te” or “dhātā” &c.; inf. “dhātum” &c.; Ved. also “-tave, -tavai, -tos;

dhiyadhyai” ; Class. also “-dhitum”; ind. P. “dhitvā” ; “hitvā” [ 7-4, 42],

“-dhāya”and”-dhām” Pass. “dhīyate” &c. [ 6-4, 66], p. “dhīyamāna” ;

aor. “adhāyi, dhāyi” [ 7-3, 33 ; Prec. “dhāsīṣṭa” or “dhāyiṣīṣṭa” [vi, 4,

62]) to put, place, set, lay in or on (loc.) &c. &c. (with “daṇḍam”, to

inflict punishment on [with loc. gen. ; with “tat-padavyām padam”, to

put one’s foot in another’s footstep i.e. imitate, equal ii. 64); to take or

bring or help to (loc. or dat.; with “āre”, to remove) ; (ā.) to direct or fix

the mind or attention (“cintām, manas, matim, samādhim” &c.) upon,

think of (loc. or dat.), fix or resolve upon (loc. dat. acc. with “prati” or a

sentence closed with “iti”) ; to destine for, bestow on, present or impart

to (loc. dat. or gen.) &c. (Pass. to be given or granted, fall to one’s

[dat.] lot or share ; to appoint, establish, constitute ; to render (with

double acc.) iii. 82; to make, produce, generate, create, cause, effect,

perform, execute &c. (aor. with “pūrayām, mantrayām, varayām” &c. =

“pūrayām” &c. “cakāra”); to seize, take hold of, hold, bear, support,

wear, put on (clothes) &c.; (ā.) to accept, obtain, conceive (esp. in the

womb), get, take (with “okas” or “canas”, to take pleasure or delight in

[loc. or dat.]) ; to assume, have, possess, show, exhibit, incur, undergo

Caus. “-dhāpayati” (see “antar-dhā, śrad-dhā” &c.): Desid. “dhitsati, -te”

( 7-4, 54), to wish to put in or lay on (loc.) (Class. Pass. “dhitsyate;

dhitsya” see s.v.); “didhiṣati, -te”, to wish to give or present ; (ā.) to

wish to gain, strive after (p. “didhiṣāṇa”, x, 114, 1) with “avadyam”, to

bid defiance (cf. “didhiṣāyya, didhiṣu”): Intens. “dedhīyate” ‘da’,

‘dadaiti’; Gk. [greek]; Lith. ‘dedu’, ‘deti’; Slav. ‘dedja’, ‘diti’; Old Sax.

‘duan’, ‘don’, Angl. Sax. ‘don’, Engl. ‘do’; Germ. ‘tuan’; ‘tuon’, ‘thun’.]

dhā mfn. putting, placing, bestowing, holding, having, causing &c. (ifc.;

cf. 2. “dha”)

dhā m. placer, bestower, holder, supporter &c.

dhā m. N. of Brahmā or Bṛihas-pati

dhā f. see 2. “dha”

dhā instr. (= nom.) perhaps in the suffix “dhā” (which forms adverbs

from numerals e.g. “eka-dhā, dvi-dhā” &c.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhā 3 U. (dadhāti, dhatte, dadhau-dadhe, adhāt-adhita, dhāsyati-te,

dhātuṁ, hita; pass. dhīyate; caus. dhāpayati-te; desid. dhitsati-te)

(1) To put, place, set, lay, put in, lay on or upon; vijñātadoṣeṣu

dadhāti daṁḍaṁ Mb.; niḥśaṁkaṁ dhīyate (v. l. for dīyate) lokaiḥ paśya

bhasmacaye padaṁ H. 2. 173.

(2) To fix upon, direct (the mind or thoughts &c.) towards (with dat.

or loc.); dhatte cakṣurmukulini raṇatkokile bālacūte Māl. 3. 12; dadhuḥ

kumārānugame manāṁsi Bk. 3. 11, 2. 7; Ms. 12. 23.

(3) To bestow anything upon one, grant, give, confer, present; (with

dat., gen., or loc.); dhuryāṁ lakṣmīmatha mayi bhṛśaṁ dhehi deva

prasīda Mal. 1. 3; yadyasya so’dadhātsarge tattasya svayamāviśat Ms. 1.

29.

(4) To hold, contain; tānapi dadhāsi mātaḥ Bv. 1. 68; S. 4. 3.

(5) To seize, take hold of (as in the hand); Bk. 1. 26, 4. 26; Ki. 13. 54.

(6) To wear, put on, bear; gurūṇi vāsāṁsi vihāya tūrṇaṁ tanūni …

dhatte janaḥ kāmamadālasāṁgaḥ Rs. 6. 13, 16; dhatte bharaṁ

kusumapatraphalāvalīnāṁ Bv. 1. 94; dadhato maṁgalakṣaumai R. 12. 8,

9. 40; Bk. 17. 54.

(7) To assume, take, have, show, exhibit, possess; (usually Atm.);

kācaḥ kāṁcanasaṁsargāddhatte mārakatīṁ dyutiṁ H. Pr. 41; śirasi

masīpaṭalaṁ dadhāti dīpaḥ Bv. 1. 74; R. 2. 7; Amaru. 23. 67; Me. 36; Bh.

3. 46; R. 3. 1; Bk. 2. 1; 4. 16, 18; Śi. 9. 3, 10. 86; Ki. 5. 5.

(8) To hold up, sustain, bear up; gāmadhāsyatkathaṁ nāgo

mṛṇālamṛdubhiḥ phaṇaiḥ Ku. 6. 68.

(9) To support, maintain saṁpadvinimayenobhau

dadhaturbhuvanadvayaṁ R. 1. 26. (10) To cause, create, produce,

generate, make; mugdhā kuḍmalitānanena dadhatī vāyuṁ sthitā tatra sā

Amaru. 70.

(11) To suffer, undergo, incur; Śi. 9. 2, 32, 66.

(12) To perform, do

(13) Ved. To bring, convey.

(14) To appoint, fix. [The meanings of this root, like those of dā, are

variously modified according to the word with which it is connected; e. g.

manaḥ, matiṁ, dhiyaṁ, &c. dhā to fix the mind or thoughts upon, resolve

upon; padaṁ dhā to set foot on, to enter; karṇe karaṁ dhā to place the

hand on the ear &c.]. –WITH api (the a being sometimes dropped) 1.

(a) to close, shut; dhvanati madhupasamūhe śravaṇamapidadhāti

Gīt. 5; so karṇau-nayane-pidadhāti.

(b) to cover, hide, conceal; prāyo mūrkhaḥ paribhavavidhau

nābhimānaṁ pidhatte S. Til. 17 v. l. prabhāvapihitā V. 4. 2; Śi. 9. 76; Bk.

7. 69. –2. to hinder, obstruct, bar; bhujaṁgapihitadvāṁra

pātālamadhitiṣṭhati R. 1. 80. (The following verse illustrates the use of

dhā with some prepositions: adhita kāpi mukhe salilaṁ sakhī pyadhita

kāpi sarojadalaiḥ stanau . vyadhita kāpi hṛdi vyajanānilaṁ nyadhita kāpi

himaṁ sutanostanau N. 4. 111; or, better still, the following verse of

Jagannātha: nidhānaṁ dharmāṇāṁ kimapi ca vidhānaṁ navamudāṁ

pradhānaṁ tīrthānāmamalaparidhānaṁ trijagataḥ . samādhānaṁ

buddheratha khalu tirodhānamadhiyāṁ śriyāmādhānaṁ naḥ pariharatu

tāpaṁ tava vapuḥ .. G. L. 18).

abstracted fr. 1. “dhā”, of which it is the weak form.

dhi m. receptacle (only ifc.; cf. “ambu-, iṣu-” &c.)

dhi or #dhinv cl.5.P. “dhinoti” (aor. “adhinvīt” ; pf. “didhinva”; fut.

“dhinviṣyati, dhinvitā” Gr.) to nourish, satiate, satisfy ; to delight, please

dhi = “adhi”2 (e.g. in “dhi-ṣṭhita” [ for “adhi-ṣṭhita” q.v.; cf. “pi” = “api,

va” = “ava”).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhi I. 6 P. (dhiyati) To hold, have, possess. –WITH saṁ to make peace,

treat with; cf. saṁdhā. –II. or dhinv 5 P. (dhinoti) To please, delight;

satisfy; paśyaṁtī cātmarūpaṁ tadapi vilulitasragdhareyaṁ dhinoti Gīt. 12;

dhinoti nāsmāñjalajena pūjā tvayānvahaṁ tanvi vitanyamānā N. 8. 97; U.

5. 27; Ki. 1. 22.

9) “dhuvati” (cf. “ni-“; Pot. “dhūvet” ; cl.9. P. ā. (xxxi, 17) Pot. “dhunīyāt”

; p. ā. “dhunāna” ; cl.1. P. (xxxiv, 29) “dhavati”; cl.2. ā., 3. pl. “dhuvate”

(“dhunvate”?) ; p. “dhuvāna” (pf. “dudhāva” , “-dhuve” ; “dudhuvīta” and

“dūdhot” aor. “adhūṣṭa”, 3. pl. “-ṣata” ; “adhoṣṭa, adhaviṣṭa; adhauṣīt,

adhāvīt” Gr.; fut. “dhaviṣyati, -te” &c.; “dhoṣyati, -te, dhotā” & “dhavitā”

Gr.; ind. p. “dhūtvā” , “-dhūya” &c.; inf. “dhavitum” Gr.) to shake,

agitate, cause to tremble &c. &c.; to shake down from (e.g. fruits [acc.]

from a tree [acc.]) ; (oftener ā.) to shake off, remove, liberate one’s self

from (acc.) &c.; to fan, kindle (a fire) &c.; to treat roughly, hurt, injure,

destroy ; to strive against, resist Pass. “dhūyate” &c. (p. “dhūyat”

Caus. “dhāvayati” (Dhāt.xxxiv, 29) and “dhūnayati” (see “dhūna”): Desid.

“dudhūṣati, -te” Gr.; Intens. “dodhavīti” (p. “dodhuvat davidhvat” ;

“dodhūyate”, p. “-yamāna”and”-yat” ; so shake or move violently (trans.

and intr.); to shake off or down; to fan or kindle. [Cf. “dhav” and “dhāv”;

Gk. [greek]. ]

dhū f. shaking, agitating

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhū 6 P., 1. 5. 9. 10. U. (dhuvati, dhavati-te, dhunoti, dhūnute, dhūnāti,

dhunīte, dhūnayatite, dhūtadhūna)

(1) To shake, agitate, cause to move or tremble; dhunvaṁti

pakṣapavanairna nabho balākāḥ Rs. 3. 12; dhunvan kalpadrumakisalayāni

Me. 62; Ku. 7. 49; R. 4. 67; Bk. 5. 101, 9. 7; 10. 22.

(2) To shake off, remove, throw off; srajamapi śirasyaṁdhaḥ kṣiptāṁ

dhunotyahiśaṁkayā S. 7. 24.

(3) To blow away, destroy.

(4) To kindle, excite, fan (as fire); vāyunā dhūyamāno hi vanaṁ dahati

pāvakaḥ Mb.; pavanadhūtaḥ … agniḥ Rs. 1. 26.

(5) To treat roughly, hurt, injure; mā na dhāvīrariṁ raṇe Bk. 9. 50; 15.

61.

(6) To shake off from oneself, free oneself from; (sevakāḥ) ārohaṁti

śanaiḥ paścāddhunvaṁtamapi pārthivaṁ Pt. 1. 36.

(7) To strive against, resist, oppose. (The following stanza from

Kavirahasya illustrates the root in its different conjugations: –dhūnoti

caṁpakavanāni dhunotyaśokaṁ cūtaṁ dhunāti dhuvati sphuṭitātimuktaṁ

. vāyurvidhūnayati caṁpakapuṣpareṇūn yatkānane dhavati

caṁdanamaṁjarīśca ..).

“dhṛṇjati” Gr.; p. ā. “dhrājamāna” ; aor. Pot. ā. “dhrājiṣīya” to move, go,

glide, fly, sweep on. (Cf. “dhṛj” and “dhrij”.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dhraj , dhraṁj 1 P. (dhrajati &c.) To go, move.

na not-but

na the dental nasal (found at the beginning of words and before or after

dental consonants as well as between vowels; subject to conversion into

[characters]

na ind. not, no, nor, neither (“nā”, x, 34, 8) &c. &c. (as well in simple

negation as in wishing, requesting and commanding, except in prohibition

before an Impv. or an augmentless aor. [cf. a. “mā”]; in successive

sentences or clauses either simply repeated e.g. ; or strengthened by

another particle, esp. at the second place or further on in the sentence

e.g. by “u” [cf. “no”], “uta, api, cāpi, vā, vāpi” or “atha vā” ; it may even

be replaced by “ca, vā, api ca, api vā”, &c. alone, as ; often joined with

other particles, beside those mentioned above esp. with a following “tu,

tv eva, tv eva tu, ced” q.v., “khalu” q.v., “ha” [cf. g. “cādi” and ; before

round or collective numbers and after any numeral in the instr. or abl. it

expresses deficiency e.g. “ekayā na viṁśati”, not 20 by 1 i.e. 19 ;

“paṇcabhir na catvāri śatāni”, 395 ; with another “na” or an “a” priv. it

generally forms a strong affirmation [cf. e.g. “neyaṁ na vakṣyati”, she

will most certainly declare ; “nādaṇḍyo ‘sti”, he must certainly be

punished ; it may also, like “a”, form compounds [cf. below]); that not,

lest, for fear lest (with Pot.) ; like, as, as it were (only in Veda and later

artificial language, e.g. “gauro na tṛṣitaḥ piba”, drink like [lit. “not” i.e.

“although not being”] a thirsty deer; in this sense it does not coalesce

metrically with a following vowel). [Cf. Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘ne-‘; Angl. Sax.

‘ne’, “not”; Eng. ‘no’, &c.] -2.

na () mfn. thin, spare; vacant, empty; identical; unvexed, unbroken; m.

band, fetter; jewel, pearl; war; gift; welfare; N. of Buddha; N. of Gaṇeśa;

= “prastuta”; = “dviraṇḍa” (?); (“ā”) f. the navel; a musical instrument;

knowledge.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

na a.

(1) Thin, spare.

(2) Vacant, empty.

(3) Same, identical.

(4) Unwearied.

(5) Praised.

(6) Undivided. –naḥ

(1) A pearl.

(2) N. of Gaṇeśa.

(3) Wealth, prosperity.

(4) A band, tie.

(5) War.

(6) N. of Buddha.

(7) A gift. –ind.

(a) A particle of negation equivalent to ‘not,’ ‘no,’ ‘nor,’ ‘neither’,

and used in wishing, requesting, or commanding, but not in prohibition

before the imperative mood.

(b) Used with the potential mood na may sometimes have the

force of ‘lest,’ ‘for fear lest,’ ‘that not;’ kṣatriyairdhāryate śastraṁ

nārtaśabdo bhavediti Rām.

(c) In agrumentative writings na often comes after iti cet and

means ‘not so.’

(d) When a negative has to be repeated in successive clauses of

the same sentence or in different sentences, na may be simply repeated

or may be used with particles like uta, ca, api, cāpi, vā &c.;

nādhīyītāśvamārūḍho na vṛkṣaṁ na ca hastinaṁ . na nāvaṁ na kharaṁ

noṣṭraṁ neriṇattho na yānagaḥ .. Ms. 4. 120; praviśaṁtaṁ na māṁ

kaścidapaśyannāpyavārayat Mb.; Ms. 2. 195; 3. 8, 9; 4. 15; S. 6. 17.

Sometimes na may not be expressed in the second and other clauses, but

represented only by ca, vā, apivā; saṁpadi yasya na harṣovipadi viṣādo

raṇe ca dhīratvaṁ H. 1. 33.

(e) na is frequently joined with a second na or any other negative

particle to intensify or emphasize an assertion; pratyuvāca tamṛṣirna

tattvatastvāṁ na vedmi puruṣaṁ purātanaṁ R. 11. 85; na ca na paricito

na cāpyagamyaḥ M. 1. 11; na punaralaṁkāraśriyaṁ na puṣyati S. 1;

nādaṁḍyo nāma rājño’sti Ms. 8. 335; Me. 63, 106; nāsau na kāmyo na ca

veda samyag draṣṭuṁ na sā R. 6. 30; Śi. 1. 55; Ve. 2. 10.

(f) In a few cases na is retained at the beginning of a negative

Tatpurusha compound; as nāka, nāsatya, nakula; see P. VI. 3. 75.

(g) na is often joined with other particles; naca, navā, naiva natu,

naced, nakhalu &c. &c.

(h) It is also used, especially in early Vedic literature, in the sense

of ‘like,’ ‘as,’ ‘as it were’; gāvo na gavyūtīranu; Śi. 20. 4. v. l.

— Comp.

–asatyau (m. du.) Aśvins, the twin physicians of the gods.

–eka a. ‘not one’, more than one, several, various. (

–kaḥ) an epithet of Viṣṇu. -ātman a. of a manifold or diverse

nature. (–m.) N. of the Supreme Being. -cara a. ‘not living alone’,

gregarious, living in society. -jaḥ the Supreme Being. -dhā ind. in many

ways, diversely. -bheda, -rūpa a. various, multiform. -śas ind. repeatedly,

often.

–kiṁcana a. very poor, beggarly.

“nabhas”, to break or destroy (?), i, 174, 8 (cf. ; cl.4.9. P. “nabhyati,

nabhnāti” ( xxvi, 130, xxxi, 48), to hurt, injure (pf. ā. “nebhe” Caus.

“nabhayati”, to cause to burst, tear open

nabh f. or m. injury () or injurer acc. pl. “nabhas”; but cf. 1. “nabh”

above ).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nabh

(1) A. (nabhate)

(1) To hurt, injure; sugrīvaḥ praghasaṁ nebhe Bk. 14. 33.

(2) To be torn or rent, to burst.

nabh f. Ved. Hurt, injury.

“namāna” ; pf. P. “nānāma” &c.; 2. sg. “nemitha”, or “nanantha” ; Subj.

“nanamas” ; 3. pl. “nemur” ; ā. “neme” ; 3. pl. “-nanamire” ; aor. P.

“anān” ; “anaṁsīt” ; ā. “anaṁsta” Gr.; 3. pl. “anaṁsata” ; Subj. “naṁsai,

naṁsante” ; fut. “naṁsyati” ; “namiṣyati” ; “nantā” ; inf. “-namam, –

name” ; “nantum, namitum” ; ind. p. “natvā” ; “-natya” ; “-namya” to

bend or bow (either trans. or oftener intr ) to bow to, subject or submit,

one’s self (with gen. dat. or acc.) &c. &c.; (with “hiruk”) to turn away,

keep aside ; to turn towards i.e. to aim at (gen.) with (instr.) ; to yield or

give way, keep quiet or be silent ; (in gram.) to change a dental letter

into a cerebral Pass. “namyate”, to be bent or bowed; yield or submit to

Caus. “namayati” &c. &c. (“nāmayati” &c.; “nāmyati” [!] ; aor.

“anīnamat” ; Pass. “nāmyate, -ti” &c.) to cause to bow or sink, incline

&c. &c.; (with “cāpam”) to bend a bow &c.; to turn away or ward off ; to

aim at (gen.), ix, 97, 15; (in gram.) to change a dental letter into a

cerebral Desid. “ninaṁsati”, Gṛ.: Intens. “nannamīti” ; “nannamyate” (3.

sg. “namnate” impf. “anamnata”, p. “namamāna” to bow or submit one’s

self to (dat.). ‘nam’, ‘nemaiti’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘nemus’; Goth., Old Sax.,

Angl. Sax. ‘niman’; HGerm. ‘neman’, ‘nemen’, ‘nehmen’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nam 1 P., sometimes A. (namati-te, nanāma, anaṁsīt, naṁsyati, nata;

caus. namayati-te or nāmayati-te, but with a preposition namayati only;

desid. ninaṁsati)

(1) To bow to, make obeisance to, salute (as a mark of respect) (with

acc. or dat.); iyaṁ namati vaḥ sarvān trilocanavadhūriti Ku. 6. 89; Bg. 11.

37; Bk. 9. 51, 10. 31; 12. 39; Śi. 4. 57.

(2) To submit or subject oneself, bow down; aśaktaḥ saṁdhimān

namet Kam. 8. 55.

(3) To bend, sink; go down; anaṁsīdbhūrbhareṇāsya Bk. 15. 25.

nemuḥ sarvadiśaḥ K. 55; unnamati namati varṣati … meghaḥ Mk. 5. 26.

(4) To stoop, be inclined.

(5) To be bent or curved.

(6) To sound.

(7) To change a dental to a lingual letter. –Caus.

(1) To bend, make curved.

(2) To bend (as a bow); S. 2. 3.

(3) To cause to sink.

(4) To prevent, ward off.

or word; often with dat. e.g. “rāmāya namaḥ”, salutation or glory to

Rāma, often ind. [g. “svar-ādi”]; “namas-kṛ”, to utter a salutation, do

homage; ind. p. “-mas-kṛtya” [ &c.] or “-mas-kṛtvā” [; “namas-kṛta”,

worshipped, adored) &c. &c.

n. food

n. a thunderbolt, ii, 20

n. gift, donation

namas m. (?) an inarticulate cry

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

namas ind.

(1) A bow, salutation, obeisance, adoration; (this word is, by itself,

invariably used with dat.; tasmai vadānyagurave tarave namo’stu Bv. 1.

94; namastrimūrtaye tubhyaṁ Ku. 2. 4; but with kṛ, generally with acc.;

munitrayaṁ namaskṛtya Sk.; but sometimes with dat. also; namaskurmo

nṛsiṁhāya ibid. The word has the sense of a noun, but is treated as an

indeclinable.)

(2) Ved. Food.

(3) A thunderbolt.

(4) A gift, present.

(5) A sacrifice.

— Comp.

–kāraḥ, –kṛtiḥ f.

–karaṇaṁ bowing, respectful or reverential salutation, respectful

obeisance (made by uttering the word namas). –kṛta a. 1. bowed down

to, saluted. –2. revered, adored, worshipped.

–guruḥ 1. a spiritual teacher. –2. a Brāhmaṇa.

–vākaṁ ind. uttering the word namas, i. e. making a low

obeisance; idaṁ kavibhyaḥ pūrvebhyo namovākaṁ praśāsmahe U. 1. 1.

–vṛdh m. a sacrifice.

[in “pra-ṇak”] Impv. “-nakṣi”; ā. 1. sg. “naṁśi” Prec. “naśīmahi”; inf. “-

naśe”), to reach, attain, meet with, find “aś” and “nakṣ”; Lat. ‘nac-tus’

‘sum’; Lith. ‘neszti’; Slav. ‘nesti’; Goth. ‘ganahs’; Germ. ‘genug’; Angl. Sax

‘genah’; Eng. ‘enough’.]

naś cl.4.P. ( xxvi, 85) “naśyati” (rarely “-te” and 1. P. “naśati, -te”; pf.

“nanāśa”, 3. pl. “neśur”; aor. “anaśat” &c.; “aneśat, neśat” [cf. on ; fut.

“naśiṣyati” ; “naṅkṣyati, -te” [cond. “anaṅkṣyata”] ; “naśitā” ; “naṁṣṭā” ;

“naṅgdhā” ; inf. “naśitum, naṁṣum” Gr.; ind. p. “naśitvā, naṣṭva,

naṁṣṭvā” to be lost, perish, disappear, be gone, run away &c. &c.; to

come to nothing, be frustrated or unsuccessful &c.: Caus. “nāśayati”, ep.

also “-te” (aor. “-anīnaśat”; dat. inf. “-nāśayadhyai” to cause to be lost

or disappear, drive away, expel, remove, destroy, efface &c. &c.; to lose

(also from memory), give up ; to violate, deflower (a girl) ; to extinguish

(a fire) ; to disappear (in “mā” “nīnaśah” and “-naśuḥ”) Desid.

“ninaśiṣati” or “ninaṅkṣati” (cf. “ninaṅkṣu”); Desid. of Caus.

“nināśayiṣati”, to wish to destroy Intens. “nānaśyate” or “nānaṁṣṭi” Gr.

([Cf. Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘nex’, ‘nocere’]).

naś mfn. perishing (in “jīva-” q.v.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

naś I. 4 P. (naśpati, nanāśa, anaśat, naṁkṣyati, naśiṣyati naṣṭa; caus.

nāśayati; desid. ninaṁkṣati, ninaśiṣati)

(1) To be lost, to disappear, vanish, become invisible; dhruvāṇi tasya

naśyaṁti H. 1; tathā sīmā na naśyati Ms. 8. 247; Y. 2. 58;

kṣaṇanaṣṭadṛṣṭatimiraṁ Mk. 5. 24.

(2) To be destroyed, to perish, die, be ruined; jīvanāśaṁ nanāśa ca

Bk. 14. 31; Ms. 8. 166, 7. 40; Mu. 6. 8.

(3) To run away, fly away, escape; naśyaṁti vṛṁdāni dadarśa

kavīṁdraḥ Bk. 10. 12; neśuścitrā niśācarāḥ 14. 112; Ratn. 2. 3.

(4) To be frustrated, become unsuccess ful. –Caus.

(1) To cause to disappear.

(2) To destroy, remove, efface, drive away, cause to fly away.

(3) To violate, (as a virgin).

(4) To cause to be lost, lose.

(5) To forget.

(6) To extinguish, put out (as fire). –II. 1 U. (naśati-te) Ved.

(1) To reach, attain.

(2) To meet with, find.

naś f., naśaḥ, –naśanaṁ Destruction, perishing, loss, disappearing.

of us, to us; in Veda changeable into “ṇas” (4, 27; 28). [Cf. Zd. ‘na’, our;

Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘nos-ter’; Old Lat. dat. ‘nis’.]

nas cl.1.ā. ( xvi, 26) “nasate” (aor. Pot. “nasīmahi” ; pf “nese”; fut.

“nasitā” Gr.) to approach, resort to, join, copulate (esp. as husband and

wife) ; to be crooked or fraudulent (‘o’) [characters] ‘va-‘ (‘o’),

[characters]; Goth. ‘ga-nizan’, ‘nas-jan’; Angl. S. ‘genesan’; HGerm.

‘ginesan’, ‘genesen’.]

nas or #nās f. (the strong stem occurs only in du. “nāsā” , the weak

stem only in “nasā, nasi, nasos” [cf. comp.) the nose “nāsā, nāsikā”;

Lat. ‘nas-turciunm’, ‘nares’; Lith. ‘nosis’; Slav. ‘nosu’; Germ. ‘Nase’; Angl.

Sax. ‘nosu’; Eng. ‘nose’, ‘nostril’ = ‘nose-thrill’, ‘nose-hole’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nas 1 A. (nasate) Ved. 1 To approach, go towards.

(2) To copulate.

(3) To be crooked or curved, to bend.

nas f. The nose(a word optionally substituted for nāsikā after acc. dual).

— Comp.

–kṣudra a. smallnosed.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nikṣ 1 P. (nikṣati) Ved.

(1) To pierce.

(2) To kiss.

pres. stem only 2 pl. Impv. “ninikta” “nijāna” , “nije” = “ninije” ; pf.

“nineja, ninije” Gr.; fut, “nekṣyati, nektā” ; aor. “anijam, jan” ; “anaikṣīt,

nikṣi” ; ind. p. “niktvā” ; “-nijya” ; dat. inf. “-nije”. , to wash, cleanse,

purify (ā. one’s self) &c.; to nourish Pass. “nijyate”, to be washed &c.

Caus. “nejayati” ; aor. “anīnijat” Gr.: Desid. “ninikṣati” Gr.: Inteus.

“nenekti, nenikte” (cf. above; Pot. “neniyāt” ; “nenijīsti, nenijyate” Gr.),

to wash (one’s self). [Cf. Gk. [greek] for [characters]; Angl. Sax. ‘nicor’;

Germ. ‘Nix’, ‘Nixe’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nij 3 U. (nenekti, nenikte, praṇenekti, nikta)

(1) To wash, cleanse, purify; sasnuḥ payaḥ papuranenijuraṁbarāṇi Śi.

5. 28.

(2) To wash or clean oneself, to be purified (A.).

(3) To nourish. WITH nis to wash, clean, purify; R. 17. 22; Y. 1. 191;

Ms. 5. 127.

nī (for 1. see p.543, col.3) cl.1.P. ā. ( xxii. 5) “nayati” “-te” (pf. P.

“nināya”, 2. sg. “ninetha” pl. “nīnima” ; Subj. “ninīthas” Pot. “ninīyāt” ;

Impv. “ninetu” ; ā. “ninye” &c.; “-nayām āsa” ; “-nayāṁ cakre” ; aor. P.

3. du. “anītām” Subj. “neṣi, nethā” ; “anaiṣīt” Subj. “neṣati, -ṣat”, 3. pl. ā.

“aneṣata” ; “anayīt” ; fut. “neṣyati” ; “-te” ; “nayiṣyati, -te” ; “nitā,

nayitā” ; ind. p. “nītvā” ; “nayitvā” ; “nīya” &c.; inf. “neṣaṇi” ; “netavai, –

tos”and”nayitum” ; “netum” &c. &c.), to lead, guide, conduct, direct,

govern (also with “agram” and gen.; cf. “agra-ṇī”) &c. &c.; to lead &c.

towards or to (acc. with or without “prati” dat., loc. or “artham” ifc.) ; to

lead or keep away, exclude from (abl.) ; (ā.) to carry off for one’s self (as

a victor, owner &c.) ; (ā., rarely P.) to lead home i.e. marry ; to bring into

any state or condition (with acc. e.g. with “vaśam”, to bring into

subjection, subdue [ā. ; P. ; with “śūdra-tām”, to reduce to a śūdra ; with

“sākṣyam” [ā.], to admit as a witness, viii, 197; with “vyāghra-tām”, to

change into a tiger ; with “vikrayam”, to sell ; with “paritoṣam”, to satisfy

; with “duḥkham”, to pain ; rarely, with loc. e.g. “duhitṛ-tve”, to make a

person one’s daughter ; or with an adv. in “-sāt” e.g. “bhasmasāt” to

reduce to ashes ; to draw (a line &c.) ; to pass or spend (time) &c.;

(with “daṇḍam”) to bear the rod i.e. inflict punishment (with

“vyavahāram”) to conduct a process ; (with “kriyām”) to conduct a

ceremony, preside over a religious act ; to trace, track, find out,

ascertain, settle, decide (with “anyathā”, “wrongly”) &c.; (ā.) to be

foremost or chief Caus. “nāyayati, -te”, to cause to lead &c.; to cause to

be led by (instr.) (cf. 5 Desid. “ninīṣati, te” ( xix, 50, 5, w. r.

“nineṣati”), to wish to lead or bring or carry to or into (acc. or dat.) &c.;

to wish to carry away ; to wish to spend or pass (time) ; to wish to

exclude from (abl.) ; to wish to find out or ascertain, investigate Intens.

“nenīyate” to lead as a captive, have in one’s power, rule, govern

nī mfn. leading, guiding, a leader or guide (mostly ifc., cf. “agra-ṇī,

agreṇī”; but also alone cf. vi, 4, 77; 82 &c.)

nī P. “ny-eti” (3. pl. “ni-yanti”; p. “-yat”; impf. “ny-āyan” ind. p. “nītya”),

to go into (cf. “nyāya”), enter, come or fall into, incur (acc.) ; to under go

the nature of i.e. to be changed into (“-bhāvam”)

nī in comp.= 1. “ni” (p. 538, col.3).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nī 1 U. (nayati-te, nināya ninye, anaiṣīta-aneṣṭa, neṣyati-te, netuṁ, nīta)

(One of the roots that govern two accusatives, see examples below)

(1) To carry, lead, bring, convey, take, conduct; ajāṁ grāmaṁ nayati

Sk; naya māṁ navena vasatiṁ payomucā V. 4. 43.

(2) To guide, direct, govern; M. 1. 2.

(3) To lead away to, carry or bring away; sītā laṁkāṁ nītā surāriṇā

Bk. 6. 49; R. 12. 103; Ms. 6. 88.

(4) To carry off; Śānti. 3. 5.

(5) To carry off for oneself (Atm).

(6) To spend, or pass (as time); yenāmaṁdamaraṁde daladaraviṁde

dinānyanāyiṣata Bv. 1. 10; nītvā māsān katicit Me. 2; saṁviṣṭaḥ

kuśaśayane niśāṁ nināya R. 1. 95.

(6) To bring or reduce any person to any state or condition; tamapi

taralatāmanayadanaṁgaḥ K. 143; nītastvayā paṁcatāṁ Ratn. 3. 3; R. 8.

19. (In this sense the root is used with substantives much in the same

way as kṛ q. v.; e. g. duḥkhaṁ nī to reduce to misery; vaśaṁ nī to reduce

to subjection, win over; astaṁ nī to cause to set; vināśaṁ nī to destroy;

paritoṣaṁ nī to gratify, please; śūdratāṁ-dāsatvaṁ &c. nī to reduce to

the state of a Sūdra, slave &c.; sākṣyaṁ nī to admit as a witness;

daṁḍaṁ nī to inflict punishment upon, to punish; punaruktatāṁ nī to

render superfluous; vikrayaṁ nī to sell; bhasmatāṁ-bhasmasāt-nī to

reduce to ashes &c. &c.).

(8) To ascertain, investigate, inquire into, settle, decide; chalaṁ

nirasya bhūtena vyavahārānnayennṛpaḥ Y. 2. 19; evaṁ śāstreṣu bhinneṣu

bahudhā nīyate kriyā Mb.

(9) To trace, track, find out; etairligairnayet sīmāṁ Ms. 8. 252, 256;

yathā nayatyasṛkpātairmṛgasya mṛgayuḥ padaṁ 8. 44; Y. 2. 151. (10) To

marry.

(11) To exclude from.

(12) (Atm.) To instruct, give instruction in; śāstre nayate Sk. –Caus.

(nāyayati-te) To cause to lead, carry &c. (with instr. of agent); tena māṁ

sarastīramanāyayat K. 38. –Desid. (ninīṣati-te) To wish to carry &c.

nī m. (Used at the end of comp.) A leader, guide; as in grāmaṇī, senānī,

agraṇī.

“u”), ind. now, still, just, at once; so now, now then ; indeed, certainly,

surely &c. &c.; cf. (often connected with other particles, esp. with

negatives e.g. “nahi nu”, “by no means”, “nakir nu”, no one or nothing at

all”, “mā nu”, “in order that surely not”; often also “gha nu, ha nu, in nu,

nu kam” &c. [“nū cit”, either “for ever, evermore; at once, forthwith” or,

“never, never more”; so also “nū” alone ; with relat. = -cunque or –

soever; sometimes it lays stress upon a preceding word, esp. an interr.

pronoun or particle, and is then often connected with “khalu” &c. &c.; it

is also employed in questions, esp. in sentences of two or more clauses

[cf. where “nu” is either always repeated [ vi, 9] or omitted in the first

place [ib. i, 8] or in the second place and further replaced by “svid, yadi

vā” &c., and strengthened by “vā, atha vā” &c.) [Cf. 1. “nava, nūtana,

nūnam”; Zd. ‘nu’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘nun-c’; Germ. ‘nu’, ‘nun’; Angl.Sax.

‘nu’, ‘nu’; Eng. ‘now’.]

nu m. a weapon

m. time

nu cl.1.ā. “navate” (“nauti” with “apa”), to go Caus. “nāvayati”, to move

from the place, remove

nu or #nū cl.2.6. P. (Dhāt. xxiv, 26; xxviii, 104) “nauti, nuvati”, (pres.

also “navate, -ti” &c.; p. P. “nuvat, navat” ā. “navamāna” ; pf. “nunāva” ;

aor. “anūnot, anūṣi, -ṣata, anaviṣṭa” ; “anauṣit, anāvit, anuvīt” Gr.; fut.

“naviṣyati, nuv-; navitā, nuv-” ; ind. p. “-nutya, -nāvam” ; inf. “lavitum”

v.l. “nuv-” , to sound, shout, exult; praise, commend &c. &c.: Pass.

“nūyate” &c.: Caus. “nāvayati” aor. “anūnavat” Gr.: Desid. “nunūṣati” ;

Desid. of Caus. “nunāvayiṣati” Intens. “nonavīti, nonumas” (impf.

“anonavur” Subj. “navīnot”; pf. “nonāva, nonuvur” ; “nonūyate, nonoti”

Gr.), to sound loudly, roar, thunder

nu m. praise, eulogium

nu Caus. “nāvayati”, to cause to be drawn into the nose (cf. 3 “nava”).

nu (ifc.) = “nau”, a ship

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nu ind.

(1) A particle having an interrogative force and implying some ‘doubt’,

or ‘uncertainty’; svapno nu māyā nu matibhramo nu S. 6. 9;

astaśailagahanaṁ nu vivasvānāviveśa jaladhiṁ nu mahīṁ nu Ki. 9. 7; 5.

1; 8 53, 9. 15, 54; 13. 4; Ku. 1. 46; Śi. 10. 14; S. 2. 9.

(2) It is very often compounded with the interrogative pronoun and its

derivatives in the sense of ‘possibly’, ‘indeed’; kiṁ

nvetatsyātkimanyadito’thavā Māl. 1. 17; kathaṁnu guṇavadviṁdeyaṁ

kalatraṁ Dk; see kiṁnu also.

(3) Ved. Now, even now.

(4) Now therefore, now then, therefore.

(5) Like, as.

(6) Quickly.

(7) From this time forward.

nu 2 P. (nauti, praṇauti; nuta; caus. nāvayati; desid. nunūṣati)

(1) To praise, extol, commend; sarasvatī tanmithunaṁ nunāva Ku. 7.

90; Bk. 14. 112; see nū.

(2) To roar, cry.

(3) To sound, shout. II. 1 A. (navate) To go.

pl. “-dre” &c.; aor. P. “anautsīt” Gr.; ā. “anutthās” ; “nudiṣṭhās” ; Prec.

“-nudyāt” ; fut. “-notsyati” ; “-te” &c.; “nottā” Gr.; ind. p. “-nudya” ; inf.

“-nude” ; “-nudas” ; “-nodam” , to push, thrust, impel, move, remove &c.

&c.: Caus. “nodayati” (Pass. “nodyate”), to push on, urge, incite &c.:

Intens. “nonudyate”, to push or drive away repeatedly

nud mfn. pushing, impelling, driving away, removing (ifc. or with acc.)

make clear or evident Caus. “-paṇcayati” (xxxii, 108) see “pra-paṇcaya”.

pac cl.1.P.ā. ( xxiii, 27) “pacati, -te” (cl. 4. ā. “pacyate” cf. below; p.

“pacāna” [cf. “kim-pacāna”]; pf. “papāca” [2. sg. “papaktha” or “pecitha”

, “pecur; pece, pecire” [“apeciran”, i ; “peciran” on ; aor. “pakṣat” ;

“apākṣīt, apakta” Gr.; Prec. “pacyāt” ; fut. “pakṣyati, -te” or “paktā” ; ind.

p. “paktvā” ; inf. “paktave” ; “paktum, pāṇ” viii, 2, 30 , to cook, bake,

roast, boil (ā. also “for one’s self”) &c. &c.; (with double acc.) to cook

anything out of (e.g. “tandulān odanam pacati”, “e cooks porridge out of

rice-grains”) ; to bake or burn (bricks) ; to digest ; to ripen, mature, bring

to perfection or completion &c. &c.; (with double acc.) to develop or

change into (e.g. “puṇyāpuṇyaṁ sukhāsukham”, “merit and demerit into

weal or woe”) ; (intrans.) to become ripe or mature Pass. “pacyate” (“-

ti” ; aor. “apāci” Gr.), to be cooked or burnt or melted or digested or

ripened or developed &c. &c.; to be tormented ; also intrans. =

“pacyate” (cf. above ), to become ripe or mature, to develop or ripen

(with acc. of the fruit that is borne or ripens ; cf. 14 ; “lokaḥ

pacyamānaḥ”, “the developing world” Caus. “pācayati, -te” (aor.

“apīpacat” Gr.; Pass. “pācyate”, p. “-cyamāna” ; to cause to cook or be

cooked (ā. “for one’s self”), to have cooked or to cook &c. (cf. ; to cause

to ripen ; to bring to completion or to an end, cure, heal Desid.

“pipakṣati” Gr.: Intens. “pāpacīti” Gr.; “pāpacyate”, to be much cooked,

to cook very much or burn excessively, to be much afflicted Desid. of

intens. “pāpacishati, -te” Gr. ([Cf. Gk. [greek] for [characters]; Lat.

‘coquo’; Slav. ‘peka’, ‘pesti’.])

pac mfn. (ifc.; nom. “-pak” cooking, baking.

pac in comp. for 3. “pad”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pac I. 1 U. (pacati-te, papāca-pece, apākṣīt-apakta, pakṣyati-te, paktuṁ,

pakva)

(1) To cook, roast, dress (as food &c.) (said to govern two

accusatives; as taṁḍulānodanaṁ pacati, but this use is very rare in

classical Sanskrit); yaḥ pacatyātmakāraṇāt Ms. 3. 118; śūle

matsyānivāpakṣyan durbalān balavattarāḥ 7. 20; Bh. 1. 85.

(2) To bake, burn (as bricks); see pakva.

(3) To digest (as food); pacāmyanna caturvidhaṁ Bg. 15. 14.

(4) To ripen, mature.

(5) To bring to perfection, develop (as understanding.).

(6) To melt (as metals).

(7) To cook (for oneself) (Atm.). –Pass. (pacyate)

(1) To be cooked.

(2) To become ripe, matured or developed, ripen; (fig.) to bear fruit,

attain perfection or fulfilment; R. 11. 50.

(3) To be inflamed. –Caus.

(1) (pācayati-te) To cause to be cooked, to have cooked or dressed

(food &c.)

(2) To cause to ripen or develop, bring to maturity, perfection, or

completion.

(3) To cure, heal. –Desid. (pipakṣati) To wish to cook &c. –WITH pari

to ripen, mature, develop. –vi 1. to mature, develop, ripen, bear fruit; R.

17. 53. –2. to digest. –3. to cook thoroughly. –II.

(1) A. (pacate) To make clear or evident; see (paṁcate) also. –Caus.

(1) To explain fully, dilate upon, amplify.

(2) To spread.

pac a. (At the end of comp.) Cooking, baking &c.

control, own, possess, dispose of (acc. or instr.) ; to partake of, share in

(loc.) ; to be fit or serve for (dat.) Nom. of “pati”; cf. Lat. ‘potiri’.]

pat cl.1.P. ( xx, 15) “patati” (ep. also “-te”; pf. “papāta, paptima,

petatur, paptur; paptivas” ; “papatyāt” ; aor. “apaptat” ; Pass. “apāti” ;

fut. “patiṣ-yati” ; “-te, patitā” ; Cond. “apatiṣyat” ; inf. “patitum” &c. &c.;

ind. p. “patitvā” ; “-patya” or “-pātam” , to fly, soar, rush on &c. &c.; to

fall down or off, alight, descend (with acc. or loc.), fall or sink (with or

without “adhas” or “narake”, “to go down to hell”; with “caraṇau” or “-

ṇayoḥ”, “to fall at a person’s feet”) &c.; to fall (in a moral sense), lose

caste or rank or position &c.; to light or fall upon, fall to a person’s share

(loc.) &c.; to fall or get into or among (loc.) ; to occur, come to pass,

happen Caus. “patayati”, to fly or move rapidly along ; to speed (trans.;

cf. “patayat”); “-te”, to drive away or throw down (?) ; “pātayati” (ep.

also “-te”; aor. “apīpatat” ; Pass. “pātyate” &c.), to let fly or cause to

fall, to fling, hurl, throw &c. &c.; to lay low, bring down (lit. and fig.),

overthrow, ruin, destroy &c. to throw upon or in, lay on (loc.) ; (with or

scil. “ātmānam”) to throw one’s self ; to cut off (a head) ; to knock out

(teeth) ; to pour out or shed (water, tears) ; to kindle (fire) ; to cast

(dice) ; to turn, direct, fix (eyes) ; to impose or inflict (punishment) ; to

set in motion, set on foot ; to seduce to, betray into (loc.) ; (with

“dvedhā”) to divide in two ; to subtract ; (ā.) to rush on, hasten Desid.

“pipatiṣati” ( and “pitsati” ( 7-4, 54), to be about to fly or fall: Intens.

“panīpatyate” or “-pātīti” ‘pat’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘peto’.]

pat mfn. flying, falling (ifc.; cf. “akṣi-pat”).

pat in comp. for 3. “pad”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pat I. 1 P. (patati, patita)

(1) To fall, fall down, come down, descend, drop down, alight;

avāṅmukhasyopari puṣpavṛṣṭiḥ papāta vidyādharahastamuktā R. 2. 60;

vṛṣṭirbhavane cāsya petuṣī 10. 77; (reṇuḥ) patati pariṇatāruṇaprakāśaḥ

śalabhasamūha ivāśramadrumeṣu S. 1. 32; Me. 105; Bk. 7. 9, 21. 6.

(2) To fly, move through the air, soar; haṁtuṁ kalahakāro’sau

śabdakāraḥ papāta khaṁ Bk. 5. 100; see patat below.

(3) To set, sink (below the horizon); soyaṁ caṁdraḥ patati

gaganādalpaśeṣairmayūkhai S. 4 v. 1; patatpataṁgapratimastaponidhiḥ

Śi. 1. 12.

(4) To cast oneself at, throw oneself down; mayi te pādapatite

kiṁkaratvamupāgate Pt. 4. 7; so caraṇapatitaṁ Me. 105.

(5) To fall (in a moral sense), lose one’s caste, forfeit one’s rank or

position, fall off: paradharmeṇa jīvan hi sadyaḥ patati jātita; Ms. 10. 97,

3. 16, 5. 19, 9. 200; Y. 1. 38.

(6) To come down (as from heaven); pataṁti pitaro hyeṣāṁ

luptapiṁḍodakakriyāḥ Bg. 1. 42.

(7) To fall, be reduced to wretchedness or misery; prāyaḥ

kaṁdukapātenotpatatyāryaḥ patannapi Bh. 2. 123.

(8) To go down into hell, go to perdition; Ms. 11. 37; Bg. 16. 16.

(9) To fall, occur, come to pass, take place; lakṣmīryatra pataṁti

tatra vivṛtadvārā iva vyāpadaḥ Subhāṣ. (10) To be directed to, light or fall

upon (with loc.); prasādasaumyāni satāṁ suhṛjjane pataṁti cakṣūṁṣi na

dāruṇāḥ śarāḥ S. 6. 28.

(11) To fall to one’s lot or share.

(12) To be in, fall in or into. –Caus. (pātayati-te, patayati rarely).

(1) To cause to fall down, descend or sink &c.; nipataṁtī

patimapyapātayat R. 8. 38. 9. 61, 11. 76.

(2) To let fall, throw or drop down, fell down (as trees &c.).

(3) To ruin, overthrow; S. 5. 21.

(4) To shed (as tears).

(5) To cast, direct (as the sight).

(6) To dash or strike out.

(7) To throw or put in, cause to enter.

(8) To bring to ruin or misfortune.

(9) To depreciate, lower the value of anything; arghataḥ pātitāḥ Bh. 2.

15. (10) (In Arith.) To subtract, deduct.

(11) To set in motion, set on foot. –Desid. (pipatiṣati or pitsati) To

wish to fall. –II. 4 A. (patyate) Ved.

(1) To be master of.

(2) To rule, control.

(3) To possess.

(4) To be fit for, serve for (with dat.) –III. 10 U. (patayati-te)

(1) To go, move.

(2) To be master of (intransitive).

pad cl.4.ā. ( xxvi, 60) “padyate” (“-ti” ; Pot. “padyām” ; Impv. “patsva” ;

pf. “papāda” ; “pede” ; aor. “apadmahi, -dran” [Subj. “padāti” ; “apatsi,

patthās” ; Prec. “padīṣṭa” ; fut. “patsyati” ; “-te” ; “pattā” Gr.; inf.

“pattave” ; “-tos, -tum” ; “-padas” ; ind. p. “-padya” ; “-pādam” , to fall,

fall down or out, perish ; to go, resort or apply to, participate in (acc.),

keep, observe Caus. “pādayati, -te”, to cause to fall (Pass. “pādyate” ;

Desid. “pipādayiṣati” &c.); “padayate”, to go Desid. “pitsate” Intens.

“panīpadyate” ; “panīpadīti”

pad m. (in strong cases “pād”; ifc. f. “pad” or “padī”) a foot (“padā,

padbhyām” and “-bhis”, also “on foot” &c. &c.; ifc. also “sticking to the

feet of”; cf. “śrī-viṣṇu-padī”)

m. a step

m. a fourth part, a quarter ; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘pes’, ‘ped-is’; Goth.

‘fotus’; Angl. Sax. ‘fot’; Eng. ‘foot’; Germ. ‘Fuss’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pad I. 10 A. (padayate) To go or move. –II. 4 A. (padyate, panna; caus.

pādayati-te; desid. pitsate)

(1) To go, move.

(2) To go to, approach (with acc.).

(3) To attain, obtain, gain; jyotiṣāmādhipatyaṁ ca prabhāvaṁ

cāpyapadyata Mb. –4. To observe, practice; svadharmaṁ padyamānāste

Mb.

(5) Ved. To fall down with fatigue.

(6) Ved. To perish.

(7) To fall out. –III. 1 P. (padati) To stand fast or fixed.

pad m. [pad-kvip] (This word has no forms for the first five inflections; it

is optionally substituted for pada after acc. dual)

(1) A foot.

(2) A quarter, a fourth part (as of a stanza).

— Comp.

–kāṣin a. 1. rubbing or scratching the feet. –2. going on foot,

pedestrian. (–m.) a footman.

–gaḥ, (padgaḥ) a footsoldier.

–jaḥ (jjaḥ) 1. a footman. –2. a Śūdra; cf. padbhyāṁ śūdro

ajāyata. –naddhā, –nadhrī a shoe, boot.

–niṣkaḥ ene quarter of a Nishka.

–rathaḥ (padrathaḥ) a foot-soldier, footman.

–śabdaḥ noise of footsteps.

–hatiḥ, –tī f. (paddhatiḥ, tī) 1. a way, path, road, course (fig.

also); iyaṁ hi raghusiṁhānāṁ vīracāritrapaddhatiḥ U. 5. 22; R. 3. 46; 6.

55; 11. 87; kaviprathamapaddhatiṁ 15. 33 ‘the first way shown to poets’.

–2. a line, row, range. –3. a surname, title or epithet, a word denoting

caste or profession in compounds which are used as proper names; e. g.

gupta, dāsa datta &c. –4. N. of a class of writings.

–himaṁ (paddhimaṁ) coldness of the feet.

-re”; nom. pl. m. “pare, -rās, -rāsas”; cf. far, distant, remote (in space),

opposite, ulterior, farther than, beyond, on the other or farther side of,

extreme

mf (“ā”) n. previous (in time), former

mf (“ā”) n. ancient, past

mf (“ā”) n. later, future, next

mf (“ā”) n. following, succeeding, subsequent

mf (“ā”) n. final, last

mf (“ā”) n. exceeding (in number or degree), more than

mf (“ā”) n. better or worse than, superior or inferior to, best or worst,

highest, supreme, chief (in the compar. meanings [where also “-tara”],

with abl., rarely gen. or ifc.; exceptionally “paraṁ śatam”, more than a

hundred lit. “an excessive hundred, a hundred with a surplus” ; “parāḥ

koṭayaḥ” &c. &c.

mf (“ā”) n. strange, foreign, alien, adverse, hostile

mf (“ā”) n. other than, different from (abl.)

mf (“ā”) n. left, remaining

mf (“ā”) n. concerned or anxious for (loc.)

para m. another (different from one’s self), a foreigner, enemy, foe,

adversary &c. &c.

para m. a following letter or sound (only ifc. mfn. e.g. “ta-para”, having

“t” as the following letter, followed by “t”)

para m. (scil. “graha”) a subsidiary Soma-graha

para m. N. of a king of Kosala with the patr. āṭṇāra

para m. of another king

para m. of a son of Samara

para m. (sc. “prāsāda”) of the palace of Mitravindā

para m. or n. the Supreme or Absolute Being, the Universal Soul

para mf (“ā”) n. (“ā”) f. a foreign country, abroad (?)

para m. a species of plant

para m. N. of a sound in the first of its 4 stages

para m. a partic. measure of time

para m. N. of a river (v.l. “pārā, veṇā, veṇṇā”)

para m. of a goddess (cf. s.v.) n. remotest distance

para m. highest point or degree

para m. final beatitude (also “-taram” and “parāt para-taram”)

para m. the number 10, 000, 000, 000 (as the full age of Brahmā)

para m. N. of partic. Sāmans

para m. any chief matter or paramount object (ifc. [f. “ā”] having as the

chief object, given up to, occupied with, engrossed in, intent upon,

resting on, consisting of, serving for, synonymous with &c. &c.)

para m. the wider or mare extended or remoter meaning of a word

para m. (in logic) genus

para m. existence (regarded as the common property of all things)

para mf (“ā”) n. (“am”) ind. afterwards, later

para m. (with abl.) beyond, after (e.g. “paraṁ vijṇānāt”, beyond human

knowledge; “astam-ayāt p-“, after sunset; “mattaḥ p-“, after me; “ataḥ

p-” or “param ataḥ”, after this, farther on, hereafter, next; “itaḥ p-“,

henceforward, from now; “tataḥ p-” or “tataś ca p-“, after that,

thereupon; “nāsmāt p-” [for “māsmāt p-“], no more of this, enough) &c.

para m. in a high degree, excessively, greatly, completely

para m. rather, most willingly, by all means

para m. I will, so be it

para m. at the most, at the utmost, merely, no more than, nothing but

para m. but, however, otherwise (“paraṁ tu” or “paraṁ kiṁ tu” id.; “yadi

p-“, if at all, perhaps, at any rate; “na-p-“, not-but; “na paraṁ-api”, not

only-but also; “paraṁ na-api na”, not only not-but not even; “na paraṁ-

yāvat”, not only-but even)

para mf (“ā”) n. (“pareṇa”) ind. farther, beyond, past (with acc.) &c. &c.

para m. thereupon, afterwards, later than, after (with abl.or gen.). &c.

para mf (“ā”) n. (“pare”) ind. later, farther, in future, afterwards ‘para’;

Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘peren-die’; Goth. ‘fairra’; Germ. ‘fern’; Eng. ‘far’ and

‘fore’.]

para in comp. for “-ras”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

para a. [pṝ-bhāve ap, kartari ac-vā] (Declined optionally like a pronoun in

nom. and voc. pl., and abl. and loc. sing. when it denotes relative

position)

(1) Other, different, another; see para m. also.

(2) Distant, removed, remote.

(3) Beyond, further, on the other side of; mlecchadeśastataḥ paraḥ

Ms. 2. 23, 7. 158.

(4) Subsequent, following, next to, future, after, (usually with abl.);

bālyātparāmiva darśā madano’dhyuvāsa R. 5. 63; Ku. 1. 31.

(5) Higher, superior; sikatātvādapi parāṁ prapede paramāṇutāṁ R.

15. 22; iṁdriyāṇi parāṇyāhuriṁdriyebhyaḥ paraṁ manaḥ . manasastu

parā buddhiryo buddheḥ paratastu saḥ .. Bg. 3. 42.

(9) Highest, greatest, most distinguished, pre-eminent, chief, best,

principal, na tvayā draṣṭhavyānāṁ paraṁ dṛṣṭaṁ S. 2; Ki. 5. 18; parato’pi

paraḥ Ku. 2. 14 ‘higher than the highest’; 6. 19; S. 7. 27.

(7) Having as a following letter or sound, followed by (in comp.)

(8) Alien, estranged, stranger.

(9) Hostile, inimical, adverse. (10) Exceeding, having a surplus or

remainder, left over; as in paraṁ śataṁ ‘exceeding or more than a

hundred.’

(11) Final, last.

(12) (At the end of comp) Having anything as the highest object,

absorbed or engrossed in, intent on, solely devoted to, wholly engaged or

occupied in; paricaryāparaḥ R. 1. 91; so dhyānapara, śokapara,

daivapara, ciṁtāpara &c. –raḥ

(1) Another person, a stranger, foreigner; oft. in pl. in this sense;

yataḥ pareṣāṁ guṇagrahītāsi Bv. 1. 9; Śi. 20. 74; see eka, anya also.

(2) A foe, an enemy, adversary; uttiṣṭhamānastu paro nopekṣyaḥ

pathyamicchatā Śi. 2. 10; Pt. 2. 158; R. 3. 21. –raṁ

(1) The highest point or pitch, culminating point.

(2) The Supreme spirit.

(3) Final beatitude.

(4) The secondary meaning of a word.

(4) (In logic.) One of the two kinds of sāmānya or generality of

notion; more extensive kind, (comprehending more objects); e. g. pṛthvī

is para with respect to a ghaṭa). Note–The acc., instr. and loc. singulars

of para are used adverbially; e. g.

(a) paraṁ 1. beyond, over, out of (with abl.); vartmanaḥ paraṁ R.

1. 17. –2after (with abl.); asmātparaṁ S. 6. 24; R. 1. 66; 3. 39; Me. 100;

bhāgyāyattamataḥ paraṁ S. 4. 16; tataḥ paraṁ &c. –3. thereupon,

thereafter. –4. but, however. 5. otherwise. –6. in a high degree,

excessively, very much, completely, quite; paraṁ duḥkhito’smi &c.

(7) most willingly. –8. only. –9. at the utmost.

(b) pareṇa 1. farther, beyond, more than; kiṁ vā mṛtyoḥ pareṇa

vidhāsyati Māl. 2. 2. –2. afterwards; mayi tu kṛtanidhāne kiṁ vidadhyāḥ

pareṇa Mv. 2. 49. –3. after (with abl.) stanyatyāgātpareṇa U. 2, 7.

(c) pare 1. afterwards, thereupon; atha tena daśāhataḥ pare R. 8.

73. –2. in future.

— Comp.

–aṁgaṁ the hinder part of the body.

–aṁgadaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

–adanaṁ a horse found in the country of Persia or Arabia.

–adhikāracarcā officiousness, meddlesomeness.

–adhīna a. dependent on another, subject, subservient; Ms. 10.

54, 83.

–aṁtaḥ final death. (

–tāḥ) (m. pl.) N. of a people.

–aṁtakaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

–anna a. living or subsisting on another’s food. (

–nnaṁ) the food of another; paragṛhalalitāḥ parānnapuṣṭāḥ Mk. 4.

28. -paripuṣṭatā being fed with the food of others; Y. 3. 241. -bhojin a.

subsisting on the food of others; H. 1. 139.

–apara a. 1. far and near, remote and proximate. –2. prior and

posterior. –3. before and beyond, earlier and later. –4. higher and lower,

best and worst. (

–raḥ) a Guru of an intermediate class. (

–raṁ) (in logic) a property intermediate between the greatest and

smallest numbers, a species (as existing between the genus and

individual); e. g. pṛthvī which is para with respect to a ghaṭa is apara

with respect to dravya; dravyatvādikajātistu parāparatayocyate Bhaṣa P.

8.

–amṛtaṁ rain.

–ayaṇa (ayana) a. 1. attached or devoted to, adhering to. –2.

depending on, subject to. –3. intent on, solely devoted to or absorbed in

(at the end of comp.); prabhurdhanaparāyaṇaḥ Bh. 2. 56; so moha- Ku. 4.

1; agnihotra- &c. –4. connected with –5. leading or conducive to. (

–ṇaṁ) 1. the principal or highest object, chief aim, best or last

resort. –2. essence, sum. –3. Ved. going away, departure, exit. –4. firm

devotion.

–artha a. 1. having another aim or meaning. –2. intended or

designed for another, done for another. (

–rthaḥ) 1. the highest interest or advantage. –2. the interest of

another (opp. svārtha); svārtho yasya parārtha eva sa pumānekaḥ

satāmagraṇīḥ Subhāṣ.; R. 1. 29. –3. the chief or highest meaning. –4.

the highest object (i. e. sexual intercourse). (

–rthaṁ –rthe) ind. for the sake of another.

–ardhaṁ 1. the other part (opp. pūrvārdha); the latter half;

dinasya pūrvārdhaparārdhabhinnā chāyeva maitrī khalasajjanānāṁ Bh. 2.

60. –2. a particular high number; i. e. 100,000,000,000,000,000;

ekatvādiparārdhaparyaṁtā saṁkhyā T. S.

–ardhya a. 1. being on the farther side or half. –2. most distant in

number; hemaṁto vasaṁtātparārdhyaḥ Śat. Br. –3. most excellent, best,

most exalted, highly esteemed, highest, supreme; R. 3. 27, 8. 27, 10. 64;

16. 39; Śi. 8. 45. –4. most costly; Śi. 4. 11. –5. most beautiful or lovely,

finest; R. 6. 4; Śi. 3. 58. (

–rdhyaṁ) 1. a maximum. –2. an infinite number.

–avara a. 1. far and near. –2. earlier and later. –3. prior and

posterior or subsequent. –4. higher and lower. –5. traditional; Ms. 1.

105. –6. all-including. (

–rā) descendants. (

–raṁ) 1. cause and effect. –2. the whole extent of an idea. –3.

the universe. –4. totality. -dṛś a. knowing both the past and the future.

–ahaḥ the next day.

–ahṇaḥ the afternoon, the latter part of the day.

–āgamaḥ attack of an enemy.

–ācita a. fostered or brought up by another. (

–taḥ) a slave.

–ātman m. the Supreme spirit.

–āyatta a. dependent on another, subject, subservient; parāyattaḥ

prīteḥ kathamiva rasaṁ vettu puruṣaḥ Mu. 3. 4.

–āyus m. an epithet of Brahman.

–āviddhaḥ 1. an epithet of Kubera. –2. of Viṣṇu.

–āśraya a. dependent upon another. (

–yaḥ) 1. dependence upon another. –2. the retreat of enemies. (

–yā) a plant growing on another tree.

–āsaṁgaḥ dependence upon another.

–āskaṁdin m. a thief, robber.

–itara a. 1. other than inimical, i. e. friendly, kind. –2. one’s own;

Ki. 1. 14.

–īśaḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. –2. of Viṣṇu.

–iṣṭiḥ N. of Brahman.

–utkarṣaḥ another’s prosperity.

–upakāraḥ doing good to others, benevolence, beneficence,

charity; paropakāraḥ puṇyāya pāpāya parapīḍanaṁ. –upakārin a.

benevolent, kind to others.

–upajāpaḥ causing dissension among enemies.

–upadeśaḥ advising others; paropadeśe pāṁḍityam. –uparuddha

a. besieged by an enemy.

–ūḍhā another’s wife.

–edhita a. fostered or brouht up gby another. (

–taḥ) 1. a servant. –2. the (Indian) cuckoo.

–kalatraṁ another’s wife. -abhigamanaṁ adultery; H. 1. 135.

–kāryaṁ another’s business or work. -nirataḥ 1. a benevolent

man. –2. a slave, servant.

–krāṁtiḥ f. inclination of the ecliptic.

–kṣetraṁ 1. another’s body. –2. another’s field; Ms. 9. 49. –3.

another’s wife; Ms. 3. 175.

–gāmin a. 1. being with another. –2. relating to another. –3.

beneficial to another.

–guṇa a. beneficial to another.

–graṁthiḥ joint (as of a finger).

–glāniḥ f. subjugation of an enemy; ātmodayaḥ paraglānirdvayaṁ

nītiritīyatī Śi. 2. 30.

–cakraṁ 1. the army of an enemy. –2. invasion by an enemy, one

of the six ītis, q. v. –3. a hostile prince.

–chaṁda a. dependent. (

–daḥ) 1. the will of another. –2. dependence. -anuvartanaṁ

following the will of another.

–chidraṁ a weak or vulnerable point of another, a defect in

another.

–ja a. stranger

–janaḥ a stranger (opp. svajana). –jāta a. 1. born of another. –2.

dependent on another for livelihood. (

–taḥ) a servant.

–jita a. 1. conquered by another. –2. maintained by another. (

–taḥ) the (Indian) cuckoo.

–taṁtra a. dependent on another, dependent, subservient.

–dārāḥ (m. pl.) another’s wife.

–dārin m. an adulterer.

–duḥkhaṁ the sorrow or grief of another; viralaḥ

paraduḥkhaduḥkhito janaḥ; mahadapi paraduḥkhaṁ śītalaṁ samyagāhuḥ

V. 4. 13.

–devatā the Supreme being.

–deśaḥ a foreign country.

–deśin m. a foreigner.

–drohin, –dveṣin a. hating others, hostile, inimical.

–dhanaṁ another’s property.

–dharmaḥ 1. the religion of another; svadharme nidhanaṁ śreyaḥ

paradharmo bhayāvahaḥ Bg. 3. 35. –2. another’s duty or business. –3.

the duties of another caste; Ms. 10. 97.

–dhyānaṁ absolute meditation or contemplation.

–nipātaḥ the irregular posteriority of a word in a compound; i. e.

bhūtapūrvaḥ where the sense is pūrvaṁ bhūtaḥ; so rājadaṁtaḥ,

agnyāhitaḥ &c.

–pakṣaḥ the side or party of an enemy.

–padaṁ 1. the highest position, eminence. –2. final beatitude.

–pākarata a. one who depends upon others for his sustenance but

performs the usual ceremonies before cooking; paṁcayajñān svayaṁ

kṛtvā parānnamupajīvati . satataṁ prātarutthāya parapākaratastu saḥ …

–piṁḍaḥ another’s food, food given by another. -ad a. one who eats

another’s food or one who feeds at the cost of another. (–m.) a servant.

-rata a. feeding upon another’s food.

–puraṁjayaḥ a conqueror, hero.

–puruṣaḥ 1. another man, a stranger. –2. the Supreme spirit,

Viṣṇu.

(3) The husband of another woman. –puṣṭa a. fed or nourished by

another. (–ṣṭaḥ) the (Indian) cuckoo. -mahotsavaḥ the mango tree. —

puṣṭā 1. the (Indian) cuckoo. –2. a parasitical plant. –3. a harlot,

postitute. –pūrvā a woman who has had a former husband. –preṣyaḥ a

servant, menial slave. –brahman n. the Supreme spirit. –bhāgaḥ 1.

another’s share. –2. superior merit. –3. good fortune, prosperity. –4.

(a) excellence, superiority, supremacy; duradhigamaḥ parabhāgo

yāvatpuruṣeṇa pauruṣaṁ na kṛtaṁ Pt. 1. 330; 5. 34.

(b) excess, abundance, height; sthalakamalagaṁjanaṁ mama

hṛdayaraṁjanaṁ janitaratiraṁgaparabhāgaṁ Gīt. 10; ābhāti

labdhaparabhāgatayādharoṣṭhe R. 5. 70; Ku. 7. 17; Ki. 5. 30, 8. 42; Śi. 7.

33, 8. 51; 10. 86, 12. 15. –5. the last part, remainder. –bhāṣā a foreign

tongue. –bhukta a. enjoyed or used by another. –bhūta a. following,

subsequent (as words). –bhṛt m. a crow (said to nourish the cuckoo). —

bhṛta a. nourished by another. –bhṛtaḥ, –tā the (Indian) cuckoo; (so

called because she is nourished by another, i. e. by a crow); S. 5. 22; Ku.

6. 2; R. 9. 43; S. 4. 9. –mataṁ 1. another’s opinion. –2. different opinion

or doctrine. –marmajña a. knowing the secrets of another. –mṛtyuḥ a

crow. –ramaṇaḥ a married woman’s gallant or paramour; Pt. 1. 180. —

lokaḥ the next (or future) world; Ku. 4. 10. -gamaḥ, -yānaṁ death. -vidhiḥ

funeral rites; Ku. 4. 38. –vaśa, –vaśya a. subject to another, dependent.

–vācyaṁ a fault or a defect. –vāṇiḥ 1. a judge. –2. a year. –3. N. of the

peacock of Kārtikeya. –vādaḥ 1. rumour, report. –2. objection,

controversy. –vādin m. a disputant, controversialist. –veśman n. the

abode of the supreme being. –vrataḥ an epithet of Dhṛtarāṣṭra. –śvas

ind. the dayafter tomorrow. –saṁgata a. 1. associated with another. –2.

fighting with another. –saṁjñakaḥ the soul. –savarṇa a. homogeneous

with a following letter (in gram.). –sāt ind. into the hands of another. –

kṛtā a woman given in marriage. –sevā service of another. –strī

another’s wife. –svaṁ another’s property; R. 1. 27; Ms. 7. 123. -haraṇaṁ

seizing another’s property. –han a. killing enemies. –hita a. 1.

benevolent. –2. profitable to another. (–taṁ) the welfare of another.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

parṣ 1 A. (parṣate)

(1) To become wet or moist.

(2) Ved. To accept.

paśu m. (instr. “paśunā” or “-śva”; dat. “paśve” or “paśave”; gen.

“paśvas” or “-śos”; du. “paśvā”; acc. pl. “paśvas” or “-śūn”) cattle, kine

(orig. “any tethered animal”; singly or collect. “a herd”), a domestic or

sacrificial animal (as opp. to “mṛga”, “wild animal”; 5 kinds are

enumerated, “men, kine, horses, goats and sheep” [ xi, 2, 9 &c.], to

which are sometimes added mules arid asses [ vi, 155 &c.] or camels and

dogs [ iii, 10, 6 &c. &c.

paśu m. (instr. “paśunā” or “-śva”; dat. “paśve” or “paśave”; gen.

“paśvas” or “-śos”; du. “paśvā”; acc. pl. “paśvas” or “-śūn”) cattle, kine

(orig. “any tethered animal”; singly or collect. “a herd”), a domestic or

sacrificial animal (as opp. to “mṛga”, “wild animal”; 5 kinds are

enumerated, “men, kine, horses, goats and sheep” [ xi, 2, 9 &c.], to

which are sometimes added mules arid asses [ vi, 155 &c.] or camels and

dogs [ iii, 10, 6 &c. &c.

m. any animal or brute or beast (also applied contemptuously to a

man; cf. “nara-p-” and “nṛ-p-“)

m. a mere animal in sacred things i.e. an uninitiated person

m. an animal sacrifice

m. flesh

m. a goat

m. a subordinate deity and one of śiva’s followers

paśu m. (with Māheśvaras and Pāśupatas) the individual soul as distinct

from the divine Soul of the universe 89

m. Ficus Glomerata

paśu m. (pl.) N. of a people (v.l. “patti”)

paśu n. cattle (only as acc. before “manyate” [ xxiii, 30] and

“manyamāna” [ iii, 53, 23]; and pl. “paśūni” ([Cf. Zd. ‘pasu’; Lit. ‘pecu’;

Old Pruss. ‘pecku’; Goth. ‘faihu’; Germ. ‘fihu’, ‘vihe’, ‘Vieh’; Angl. Sax.

‘feoh’; Eng. ‘fee’.])

pā f. = “pūta” and “pūritaka”.

pā cl.1.P. ( xxii, 27) “pibati” (Ved. and ep. also ā. “-te”; rarely “pipati, –

te” cl.2. “pāti, pāthas, pānti” ; p. ā. “papāna” , “pipāna” (pf. P. “papau”,

2. sg. “papātha” ; “papitha” ; “papīyāt” ; p. “papivas” ; ā. “pape, papire” ;

p. “papāna” ; aor. or impf. “apāt” [cf. pl. “apuḥ” [?] ; “-pāsta” Prec. 3.

sg. “peyās” ; fut. “pāsyati, -te” &c.; “pātā” Gr.; ind. p. “pītvā” &c. &c.,

“-tvī” ; “-pāya” &c. &c.; “pītyā” ; “pāyam” ; inf. “pibadhyai” ; “pātum”

&c.; “pātave” ; “pātavaī” , to drink, quaff, suck, sip, swallow (with acc.,

rarely gen.) &c. &c.; (met.) to imbibe, draw in, appropriate, enjoy, feast

upon (with the eyes, ears &c.) &c.; to drink up, exhaust, absorb ; to

drink intoxicating liquors Pass. “pīyate” &c. &c.: Caus. “pāyayati, -te”

(pf. “pāyayām āsā” ; aor. “apīpyat” ; ind. p. “pāyayitvā” ; inf.

“pāyayitavai” , to cause to drink, give to drink, water (horses or cattle)

&c. &c.: Desid. “pipāsati” ( also “pipīṣati”), to wish to drink, thirst Desid.

of Caus. “pipāyayiṣati”, to wish or intend to give to drink Intens.

“pepīyate” (p. “-yamāna” also with pass meaning), to drink greedily or

repeatedly [characters] -[characters] -[characters]; Aeol. [characters]

-[characters] = [characters]; Lat. ‘pa-tus’, ‘potum’, ‘bibo’ for ‘pi-bo’; Slav.

‘pi-ja’, ‘pi-ti’]

pā mfn. drinking, quaffing &c. (cf. “agre-, ṛtu-, madhu-, soma-” &c. )

pā cl.2.P. (Dhāt. xxiv, 48) “pāti” (Impv. “pāhi”; pr. p. P. “pāt” ā. “pāna” ;

pf. “papau” Gr.; aor. “apāsīt” Subj. “pāsati” ; fut. “pāsyati, pātā” Gr.;

Prec. “pāyāt” ; inf. “pātum” , to watch, keep, preserve; to protect from,

defend against (abl.) &c. &c.; to protect (a country) i.e. rule, govern ; to

observe, notice, attend to, follow Caus. “pālayati” see “pāl”: Desid.

“pīpāsati” Gr.: Intens. “pāpāyate, pāpeti, pāpāti” ‘pa’, ‘paiti’; Gk. [greek]

&c.; Lat. ‘pa-sco’, ‘pa-bulum’; Lith. ‘pe-mu-‘]

pā mfn. keeping, protecting, guarding &c. (ef. “apāna-, ritā-, go-, tanū-”

&c.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pā I. 1 P. (pibati, pīta; pass. pīyate)

(1) To drink, quaff; piba stanyaṁ pota Bv. 1. 60; duḥśāsanasya

rudhiraṁ na pibāmyurastaḥ Ve. 1. 15; R. 3. 54; Ku. 3. 36; Māl. 8. 5; Bk.

14. 92; 15. 6.

(2) To kiss; pibatyasau pāyayate ca siṁdhūḥ R. 13. 9, S. 1. 24.

(3) To drink in, inhale; R. 7. 63.

(4) To drink in (with the eyes or ears), feast on, look at or listen to

intently; samaduḥkhaḥ pīyate nayanābhyāṁ V. 1; nivātapadmastimitena

cakṣuṣā nṛpasya kāṁtaṁ pibataḥ sutānanaṁ R. 3. 17; 2. 19, 73; 11. 36;

13. 30; Me. 16; Ku. 7. 64.

(5) To absorb, drink or swallow up; (bāṇaiḥ) āyurdehātigaiḥ pītaṁ

rudhiraṁ tu patatrimiḥ R. 12. 48.

(6) To drink intoxicating liquors. –Caus. (pāyayati-te)

(1) To cause to drink, give to drink; R. 13. 9; Bk. 8. 41, 62.

(2) To water. –Desid. (pipāsati) To wish to drink &c.; hālāhalaṁ

khalu pipāsati kautukena Bv. 1. 95. –II. 2 P. (pāti, pāta)

(1) To protect, guard, keep, defend, preserve; (oft. with abl.);

paryāptosi prajāḥ pātuṁ R. 10. 25; pātu tvā … … bhūteśasya

bhujaṁgavallivalayasraṅnaddhajūṭā jaṭāḥ Mal. 1. 2; jīvan punaḥ

śaśvadupaplavebhyaḥ prajāḥ prajānātha piteva pāsi R. 2. 48.

(2) To rule, govern; pātu pṛthvīṁ … bhūpāḥ Mk. 10. 60.

(3) To beware of.

(4) Ved. To observe, notice.

(5) To keep, observe, tend, take notice of. –Caus. (pālayati-te)

(1) To protect, guard, keep, preserve; kathaṁ duṣṭhuḥ svayaṁ

dharme prajāstvaṁ pālayiṣyasi Bk. 6. 132; Ms. 9. 108; R. 9. 2.

(2) To rule, govern; tāṁ purīṁ pālayāmāsa Rām.

(3) To observe, keep, adhere to, fulfil (as a vow or promise);

pālitasaṁgarāya R. 13. 65.

(4) To bring up, nourish, maintain.

(5) To wait for; atropaviśya muhūrtamāryaḥ pālayatu kṛṣṇāgamanaṁ

Ve. 1.

pā a. (At the end of comp.)

(1) Drinking, quaffing; as in somapāḥ, agrepāḥ &c.

(2) Protecting, guarding, keeping; gopā.

pipiśe” “-śre” ; aor. p. “piśāna” ; “apeśīt” Gr.; fut. “peśiṣyati, peśitā” Gr.),

to hew out, carve, prepare (esp. meat), make ready, adorn (A. also

“one’s self”); to form, fashion, mould Pass. “piśyate” Caus. “peśayate”

aor. “apīpiśat” Gr.: Desid. “pipiśiṣati” or “pipeśiṣati” Intens. see “pepiśat,

śāna”. ([Cf. Gk. [greek]; Slav. ‘pisati’; Angl. Sax. ‘fah’.])

piś f. ornament, decoration (cf. “viśva-, śukra-, su-“.).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

piś 6 U. (piṁśati-te) To shape, fashion, form.

(2) To be organised.

(3) To light, irradiate.

(4) To be reduced to one’s constituent parts

(5) Ved. To adorn, decorate,

(6) To make ready, prepare.

pītvā” &c.) cl.4.ā. “pīyate”, to drink

pī or #pi (connected with “pyai”), cl.1.ā. “payate” (cl.2.ā. pr.p. “piyāna”

cl.3.P. Impv. “pīpihī”; impf. “apīpet, apīpayat”; Subj. “pipyatam, -tām;

pīpayat” ā. “-yanta”, p. ā. “pāpyāna”; pf. P. “pīpāya”. 2. sg. “pīpetha”, 3.

pl. “pipyur”; p. ā. “pīpyāna”), to swell, overflow, be exuberant, abound,

increase, grow; (trans.) to fatten, cause to swell or be exuberant, surfeit

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pī 4 A. (pīyate) To drink; tava vadanabhavāmṛtaṁ nipīya Mk. 10. 13; N. 1.

1.

sg. Impv. P. “punīhi” &c., “punāhi” ; ci. 1. ā. (xxii 70) “pavate” (of P. only

Impv. “-pava” gen. pl. “pavatām” ; p. ā. “punāna” below, “pavamāna”

see p.610, col.3; 1. sg. ā. “punīṣe” ; pf. “pupuvuh. -ve” ; “apupot” ; aor.

“apāviṣuḥ” Subj. “apaviṣṭa” ; fut. “paviṣyati, pavitā” Gr.; ind., p. “pūtvā” ;

“pūtvī” ; “pavitvā” Gr.; “-pūya” and “-pāvam” &c.; inf. “pavitum” , to

make clean or clear or pure or bright, cleanse, purify, purge, clarify,

illustrate, illume (with “saktum”, “to cleanse from chaff, winnow”; with

“kratum” or “manīṣām”, “to enlighten the understanding”; with

“hiraṇyam”, “to wash gold”) &c. &c.; (met.) to sift, discriminate, discern;

to think of or out, invent, compose (as a hymn) ; (ā. “pavate”) to purify

one’s self. be or become clear or bright; (esp.) to flow off clearly (said of

the Soma) ; to expiate, atone for ; to pass so as to purify; to purify in

passing or pervading, ventilate &c. (cf. “pav”): Pass. “pūyate”, to be

cleaned or washed or purified; to be freed or delivered from (abl.) &c.:

Caus. “pavayati” or “pāvayati” (ep. also “-te”; aor. “apīpavat” Gr.; Pass.

“pāvyate” , to cleanse, purify “pipāvayiṣati” Gr. ([Cf. Gk. [greek]; Umbr.

‘pir’; Germ. ‘Feuer’; Eng. ‘fire’.])

pū mfn. cleansing, purifying (ifc.; cf. “annauda-, ghṛta-” &c.)

pū mfn. (1. “pā”) drinking (see “agre-pū”).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pū 1. 4. A., 9 U. (pavate, pūyate, punāti, punīte, pūta; caus. pāvayati;

desid. pupūṣati, pipaviṣate)

(1) To make pure, cleanse, purify (lit. and fig.); avaśyapāvyaṁ pavase

Bk. 6. 64; 3. 18; puṇyāśramadarśanena tāvadātmānaṁ punīmahe S. 1;

Ms. 1. 105; 2. 62; Y. 1. 58; R. 1. 53; Bg. 10. 31.

(2) To refine.

(3) To clean from chaff, winnow.

(4) To expiate, atone for.

(5) To discern, discriminate.

(6) To think out, devise, invent.

(7) To become clear or pure (Atm.).

pū a. (At the end of comp.) Purifying, cleansing, refining; as in khalapū

&c.

nouns, sometimes “pratī”; for 2. see p, 664) towards, near to; against, in

opposition to; back, again, in return; down upon, upon, on; before nouns

it expresses also likeness or comparison (cf. “prati-candra”); or it forms

Avyayibhāvas of different kinds (cf. “prati-kṣaṇam, prati-graham, praty-

agni” &c.; rarely ifc. e.g. “sūpaprati”, a little broth ; or as a prep. with

usually preceding acc., in the sense of towards, against, to, upon, in the

direction of (e.g. “śabdam p-“, in the direction of the sound ; “agnim pr-“,

against the fire ; also “praty-agni” ind. ; “ripum pr-“, against the enemy ;

“ātmānam pr-“, to one’s self ; opposite, before, in the presence of (e.g.

“rodasī pr-“, before heaven and earth ; in comparison, on a par with, in

proportion to (e.g. “indram pr-“, in comparison with little ; “sahasrāṇi

pr-“, on a par with i.e. equivalent to thousands ; also with abl. or “-tas”;

cf. ; in the vicinity of, near, beside, at, on (e.g. “yūpam pr-“, near the

sacrificial post ; “gaṅgām pr-“, at or on the Ganges ; “etat pr-“, at this

point ; “āyodhanam pr-“, on the field of battle ; at the time of, about,

through, for (e.g. “phālgunam pr-“, about the month Phālguna ; “ciram

pr-“, for a long time ; “bhṛśam pr-“, often, repeatedly ; or used

distributively (cf. to express at every, in or on every, severally (e.g.

“yajṇam pr-“, at every sacrifice ; “yajṇaṁ yajṇam pr-” ; “varṣam pr-“,

every year, annually ; in this sense often comp.; cf. above ); in favour of,

for ( 1-4, 90; e.g. “pāṇḍavān pr-“, in favour of the Pāṇḍavas. ; on account

of, with regard to, concerning ( e.g. “sīmām pr-“, concerning a boundary ;

“gautamam pr-“, with regard to Ganges ; conformably or according to

(e.g. “mām pr-“, according to me, i.e. in my opinion ; cf. “mām praty

araṇyavat pratibhāti”, “it seems to me like a forest” ; “na bubhukṣitam

prati bhāti kiṁ cit”, “to a hungry man nothing is of any account” on ; as,

for (after a verb meaning, “to regard or consider”; cf. ; or as prep. with

abl. in return or as compensation for, instead or in the place of ( 1-4, 92 ;

with abl. or “-tas” see above; with abl. or gen. (?) to express, “about”,

“at the time of” (only “prati vastoḥ”, “at daybreak” ; as prep. with gen. =

with reference to ‘paiti’; Gk. [greek]. ]

prati in comp. with nouns not immediately connected with roots.

prati m. N. of a son of Kuśa

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

prati ind.

(1) As a prefix to verbs it means

(a) towards, in the direction of;

(b) back, in return, again;

(c) in opposition to, against, counter;

(d) upon, down upon; (see the several roots with this preposition).

(2) As a prefix to nouns not directly derived from verbs it means

(a) likeness, resemblance, equality;

(b) opposite, of the opposite side; pratibala Ve. 3. 5 ‘the opposing

force’; so pratidvipāḥ Mu. 2. 13;

(c) rivalry; as in praticaṁdraḥ ‘a rival moon’; pratipuruṣaḥ &c.

(3) As a separable preposition (with acc.) it means

(a) towards, in the direction of, to; tau daṁpatī svāṁ prati

rājadhānīṁ prasthāpayāmāsa vaśī vasiṣṭhaḥ R. 2. 70; 1. 75; pratyanilaṁ

viceruḥ Ku. 3. 31; vṛkṣaṁ prati vidyotate vidyut Sk.;

(b) against, counter, in opposition to, opposite; tadā yāyādripuṁ

prati Ms. 7. 171; pradudruvustaṁ prati rākṣaseṁdraṁ Rām.; yayāvajaḥ

pratyarisainyameva R. 7. 55;

(c) in comparison with, on a par with, in proportion to, a match

for; tvaṁ sahasrāṇi prati Rv. 2. 1. 8;

(d) near, in the vicinity of, by, at, in, on; samāsedustato gaṁgāṁ

śṛṁgaverapuraṁ prati Rām.; gaṁgāṁ prati;

(e) at the time, about, during; ādityasyodayaṁ prati Mb.;

phālgunaṁ vātha caitraṁ vā māsau prati Ms. 7. 182;

(f) on the side of, in favour of, to the lot of; yadatra māṁ prati

syāt Sk.; haraṁ prati halāhalaṁ (abhavat) Vop.;

(g) in each, in or at every, severally (used in a distributive sense);

varṣaṁ prati, prativarṣaṁ; yajñaṁ prati Y. 1. 110; vṛkṣaṁ vṛkṣaṁ prati

siṁcati Sk.;

(h) with regard or reference to, in relation to, regarding,

concerning, about, as to; na hi me saṁśītirasyā divyatāṁ prati K. 132;

caṁdroparāgaṁ prati tu kenāpi vipralabdhāsi Mu. 1; dharmaṁ prati S. 5.

18; maṁdautsukyosmi nagaragamanaṁ prati S. 1; Ku. 6. 27; 7. 83;

tvayaikamīśaṁ prati sādhu bhāṣitaṁ 5. 81; Y. 1. 218; R. 6. 12; 10. 29;

12. 51;

(i) according to, in conformity with; māṁ prati in my opinion;

(j) before, in the presence of;

(k) for, on account of.

(4) As a separable preposition (with abl.) it means either

(a) a representative of, in place of, instead of; pradyumnaḥ

kṛṣṇātprati Sk., saṁ grāme yo dārāyaṇataḥ prati Bk. 8. 89; or

(b) in exchange or return for; tilebhyaḥ prati yacchati māṣān Sk.;

bhakteḥ pratyamṛtaṁ śaṁbhoḥ Vop.

(5) As the first member of Avyayībhāva compounds it usually means

(a) in or at every; as pratisaṁvatsaraṁ ‘every year’; pratikṣaṇaṁ,

pratyahaṁ &c.;

(b) towards, in the direction of; pratyagni śalabhā ḍayaṁte.

(6) prati is sometimes used as the last member of Avyayī. comp. in

the sense of ‘a little’; sūpaprati, śākaprati. (Note. In the compounds given

below all words the second members of which are words not immediately

connected with verbs, are included; other words will be found in their

proper places)

— Comp.

–akṣaraṁ ind. in every syllable or letter;

pratyakṣaraśleṣamayaprabaṁdha Vās.

–āgni ind. towards the fire.

–aṁgaṁ 1. a secondary or minor limb (of the body), as the nose.

–2. a division, chapter, section. –3. every limb. –4. a weapon. (

–gaṁ) ind. 1. on or at every limb of the body; as in

pratyaṁgamāliṁgitaḥ Gīt. 1. –2. for every subdivision.

(3) in each case (in grammar). –anaṁtara a. 1. being in immediate

neighbourhood. –2. standing nearest (as an heir). –3. immediately

following, closely connected with; jīvet kṣatriyadharmeṇa sa hyasya

(brāhmaṇasya) pratyanaṁ taraḥ Ms. 10. 82; 8. 185. (–raṁ) ind. 1.

immediately after. –2. next in succession. –anilaṁ ind. towards or

against the wind. –anīka a. 1. hostile, opposed, inimical. –2. resisting,

opposing. (–kaḥ) an enemy. (–kaṁ) 1. hostility, enmity, hostile attitude

or position; na śaktāḥ pratyanīkeṣu sthātuṁ mama surāsurāḥ Rām. –2. a

hostile army; yasya śūrā maheṣbāsāḥ pratyanīkagatā raṇe Mb.;

ye’vasthitāḥ pratyanīkeṣu yodhāḥ Bg. 11. 32 (pra- may have here sense 1

also). –3. (in Rhet.) a figure of speech in which one tries to injure a

person or thing connected with an enemy, who himself cannot be injured;

pratipakṣamaśaktena pratikartu tiraskriyā . yā tadīyasya tatstutyai

pratyanīkaṁ taducyate K. P. 10. –anumānaṁ an opposite conclusion. —

aṁta a. contiguous, lying close to, adjacent, bordering. (–taḥ) 1. a

border, frontier; R. 4. 26. –2. a bordering country; especially, a country

occupied by barbarians or Mlechchhas. -deśaḥ a bordering country. –

parvataḥ an adjacent hill; pādāḥ pratyaṁtaparvatāḥ Ak. –apakāraḥ

retaliation, injury in return; śāmyet pratyapakāreṇa nopakāreṇa durjanaḥ

Ku. 2. 40. –abdaṁ ind. every year. –amitra a. hostile. (–traḥ) an enemy.

(–traṁ) ind. towards an enemy. –arkaḥ a mock sun. –avayavaṁ ind. 1.

in every limb. –2. in every particular, in detail. –avara a. 1. lower, less

honoured. –2. very low or degrading, very insignificant. –aśman m. red

chalk. –ahaṁ ind. every day, daily; day by day; giriśamupacacāra

pratyahaṁ sā sukeśī Ku. 1. 60. –ākāraḥ a scabbard, sheath. –āghātaḥ 1.

a counter-stroke. –2. reaction. –ācāraḥ suitable conduct or behaviour.

–ātmaṁ ind. singly, severally. –ātmaka a. belonging to oneself. —

ātmyaṁ similarity with oneself. –ādityaḥ a mock sun. –āraṁbhaḥ 1.

recommencement, second beginning. –2. prohibition. –āśā 1. hope,

expectation; Māl. 9. 8. –2. trust, confidence. –uttaraṁ a reply, rejoinder.

–ulūkaḥ 1. a crow. –2. a bird resembling an owl. –ṝcaṁ ind. in each Rik.

–eka a. each, each one, every single one. (–kaṁ) ind. 1. one by one, one

at a time, severally; singly, in every one, to every one; oft. with the force

of an adjective; viveśa daṁḍakāraṇyaṁ pratyekaṁ ca satāṁ manaḥ R.

12. 9 ‘entered the mind of every good man’; 12. 3; 7. 34; Ku. 2. 31. —

kaṁcukaḥ an adversary. –kaṁṭhaṁ ind. 1. severally, one by one. –2.

near the throat. –kaśa a. not obeying the whip. –kāyaḥ 1. an effigy,

image, picture, likeness. –2. an adversary; Ki. 13. 28. –3. a target, butt,

mark. –kitavaḥ an opponent in a game. –kuṁjaraḥ a hostile elephant. —

kūpaḥ a moat, ditch. –kūla a. 1. unfavourable, adverse, contrary, hostile,

opposite, pratikūlatāmupagate hi vidhau viphalatvameti bahusādhanatā

Śi. 9. 6; Ku. 3. 24. –2. harsh, discordant, unpleasant, disagreeable;

apyannapuṣṭā pratikūlaśabdā Ku. 1. 45. –3. inauspicious. –4.

contradictory. –5. reverse, inverted. –6. perverse, cross, peevish,

stubborn. -ācaraṇaṁ -ācaritaṁ any offensive or hostile action or conduct;

R. 8. 81. -uktaṁ -ktiḥ f. a contradiction. -kārin, -kṛta, -cārin, –vṛṁtti a.

opposing. -darśana a. having an inauspicious or ungracious appearance.

-pravartin, -vartin a. acting adversely, taking an adverse course. -bhāṣin

a. opposing, contradicting. -vacanaṁ disagreeable or unpleasant speech.

-vādaḥ contradiction. (pratikūlatā, -tvaṁ adverseness, opposition,

hostility. pratikūlayati ‘to oppose’). –kūlaṁ ind. 1. adversely, contrarily.

–2. inversely, in inverted order. –kṣaṇaṁ ind. at every moment or

instant; constantly; Ku. 3. 56. –gajaḥ a hostile elephant –gātraṁ ind. in

very limb. –giriḥ 1. an opposite mountain. –2. an inferior mountain. —

gṛhaṁ, -gehaṁ ind. in every house. –grāmaṁ ind. in every village. —

caṁdraḥ a mock moon. –caraṇaṁ ind. 1. in every (Vedic) school or

branch. –2. at every foot-step. –chāyā 1. a reflected image, reflection,

shadow. –2. an image, picture. –jaṁghā the forepart of the leg. –jihvā,

-jihvikā the soft palate. –taṁtraṁ ind. according to each Tantra or

opinion. –taṁtrasiddhāṁtaḥ a conclusion adopted by one of the

disputants only; (vādiprativādyekataramātrābhyupagataḥ). –iyahaṁ ind.

for three days at a time. –daṁḍa a. Ved. disobedient. –dinaṁ ind. every

day; Me. 58. –diśaṁ ind. in every direction, all round, everywhere. —

deśaṁ ind. in every country. –dehaṁ ind. in every body. –daivataṁ ind.

for every deity. –dvaṁdvaḥ 1. an antagonist, opponent, adversary, rival.

–2. an enemy. (–dvaṁ) opposition, hostility. –dvaṁdbin a. 1. hostile,

inimical. –2. adverse (pratikūla); Ki. 16. 29. –3. rivalling, vying with; S. 4.

4. (–m.) an opponent, adversary, rival; R. 7. 37.; 15. 25. –dvāraṁ ind. at

every gate. –dhuraḥ a horse harnessed by the side of another. –naptṛ m.

a great-grandson. –nava a. 1. new, young, fresh. –2. newly blown or

budded; Me. 36. –nāḍī a branchvein. –nāyakaḥ the adversary of the hero

of any poetic composition; as rāvaṇa in the Rāmāyaṇa, śiśupāla in Magha

Kāvya &c. –pakṣa a. like, similar. (–kṣaḥ) 1. the opposite side, party or

faction, hostility. –2. an adversary, enemy, foe, rival; pratipakṣakāminī ‘a

rival wife’; Bv. 2. 64; Vikr. 1. 70, 73; pratipakṣamaśaktena pratikartuṁ K.

P. 10; often used in comp. in the sense of ‘equal’ or ‘similar’. –3. a

defendant or respondent (in law). -tā 1. hostility, opposition. –2.

obstacle. –pakṣita a. 1. containing a contradiction. –2. nullified by a

contradictory premiss; (as a hetu in nyāya); cf. satpratipakṣa. –pakṣin m.

an opponent, adversary. –pathaṁ ind. along the road, towards the way;

pratipathagatirāsīdvegadīrghīkṛtāṁgaḥ Ku. 3. 76. –padaṁ ind. 1. at every

stop. –2. at every place, everywhere. –3. expressly. –4. in every word.

–pāṇaḥ 1. a stake. –2. a counter-pledge. –3. a counter-stake. –pādaṁ

ind. in each quarter. –pātraṁ ind. with regard to each part, of each

character; pratipātramādhīyatāṁ yatnaḥ S. 1 ‘let care be taken of each

character’. –pādapaṁ ind. in every tree. –pāpa a. returning sin for sin,

requiting evil for evil. –pu(pū)ruṣaḥ 1. a like or similar man. –2. a

substitute, deputy. –3. a companion. –4. the effigy of a man pushed by

thieves into the interior of a house before entering it themselves (to

ascertain if any body is awake). –5. an effigy in general. (–baṁ) ind.

man by man, for each man. –pustakaṁ a copy of an original manuscript.

–pūrvāhṇaṁ ind. every forenoon. –prabhātaṁ ind. every morning. —

prākāraḥ an outer wall or rampart. –priyaṁ a kindness or service in

return; R. 5. 56. –baṁdhuḥ an equal in rank or station. –bala a. 1. able,

powerful. –2. equal in strength, equally matched or powerful. (–laṁ) 1. a

hostile army; astrajvālābalīḍhapratibalajaladheraṁtaraurvāyamāṇe Ve. 3.

5. –2. strength. –bāhuḥ the forepart of the arm. –biṁ(biṁ)baḥ –baṁ 1.

a reflection, reflected image; Ku. 6. 42; Śi. 9. 18. –2. an image, a picture.

–bījaṁ a rotten seed. –bhaṭa a. vying with, rivalling;

ghaṭapratibhaṭastani N. 13. 5. (–ṭaḥ) 1. a rival, an opponent. –2. a

warrior on the opposite side; saptālokyājau tvāṁ vidadhati vikalpān

pratibhaṭāḥ K. P. 10. –bhaya a. 1. fearful, formidable, terrible, frightful.

–2. dangerous; Pt. 2. 166. (–yaṁ) a danger. –maṁḍalaṁ 1. a secondary

dise (of the sun &c.). –2. an eceentric orbit. –maṁdiraṁ ind. in every

house. –mallaḥ an antagonist, a rival; N. 1. 63; pātālapratimallagalla &c.

Māl. 5. 22. –māyā a counter-spell or charm. –mārgaṁ ind. back,

backwards. –mālā capping verses (Mar. bhaṁḍī). –māsaṁ ind. every

month, monthly. –mitraṁ an enemy, adversary. –mukha a. 1. standing

before the face, facing; pratimukhāgata Ms. 8. 291. –2. near, present.

(–khaṁ) a secondary plot or incident in a drama which tends either to

hasten or retard the eatastrophe; see S. D. 334 and 351364. (–khaṁ)

ind. 1. towards. –2. in front, before. –mudrā a counter-seal. –muhūrtaṁ

ind. every moment. –mūrtiḥ f. an image, a likeness. –yūthapaḥ the

leader of a hostile herd of elephants. –rathaḥ an adversary in war (lit. in

fighting in a war-chariot); dauṣyaṁtimapratirathaṁ tanayaṁ niveśya S. 4.

19. –rājaḥ a hostile king. –rātraṁ ind. every night. –rūpa a. 1.

corresponding, similar, having a counter-part in. –2. beautiful. –3.

suitable, proper. (–paṁ) a picture, an image, a likeness. –rupaka a.

resembling, similar (at the end of comp.); ceṣṭāpratirūpikā manovṛttiḥ S.

1. (–kaṁ) 1. a picture, an image. –2. a forged edict. –3. a reflection. —

lakṣaṇaṁ a mark, sign, token. –lipiḥ f. a transcript, a written copy. –loma

a. 1. ‘against the hair or grain’, contrary to the natural order, inverted,

reverse (opp. anuloma). –2. contrary to easte (said of the issue of a

woman who is of a higher caste than her husband). –3. hostile. –4. low,

vile, base. –5. left (vāma). –6. obstinate, perverse; aparicitasvāpi

te’pratilomaḥ saṁvṛttaḥ S. 7. –7. disagreeable, unpleasant. (–maṁ) any

injurious or unpleasant act. (–maṁ) ind. ‘against the hair or grain’,

inversely, invertedly. -ja a. born in the inverse order of the eastes; i. e.

born of a mother who is of a higher caste than the father; cf. Ms. 10. 16,

25. –lomaka a. reverse, inverted. (–kaṁ) inverted order. –vatsaraṁ ind.

every year. –vanaṁ ind. in every forest. –varṇika a. similar,

corresponding. –vardhin a. being a match for. –varṣaṁ ind. every year.

–vastu n. 1. an equivalent, a counter-part. –2. anything given in return.

–3. a parallel. -upamā a figure of speech thus defined by Mammaṭa: —

prativastūpamā tu sā .. sāmānyasya dvirekasya yatra vākyadvaye sthitiḥ

K. P. 10; e. g. tāpena bhrājate sūryaḥ śūraścāpena rājate Chandr. 5. 48.

–bātaḥ a contrary wind. (–taṁ) ind. against the wind; cīnāṁśukamiva

ketoḥ prativātaṁ nīyamānasya S. 1. 34. –vāraṇaḥ a hostile elephant. —

vāsaraṁ ind. every day. –viṭapaṁ ind. 1. on every branch. –2. branch by

branch. –vedaṁ ind. in or for every Veda. –viṣaṁ an antidote. (–ṣā) a

birch tree. –viṣṇukaḥ a Muchakunda tree. –vīraḥ an opponent,

antagonist. –vīryaṁ being equal to or a match for. –vṛṣaḥ a hostile bull.

–velaṁ ind. at each time, on every occasion. –veśaḥ 1. a neighbouring

house, neighbourhood. –2. a neighbour. –veśin a. a neighbour. –veśman

n. a neighbour’s house. –veśyaḥ a neighbour. –vairaṁ requital of

hostilities, revenge. –śabdaḥ 1. echo, reverberation;

vasudhādharakaṁdarābhisarpī pratiśabdo’pi harerbhinatti nāgān V. 1. 16;

Ku. 6. 64; R. 2. 28. –2. a roar. –śaśin m. a mock-moon. –śākhaṁ ind. for

every branch or school (of the Veda). –śākhā a side-branch. —

saṁvatsaraṁ ind. every year. –sama a. equal to, a match for. –savya a.

in an inverted order. –sāmaṁtaḥ an enemy. –sāyaṁ ind. every evening.

–sūryaḥ, –sūryakaḥ 1. a mock-sun. –2. a lizard, chameleon; U. 2. 16. —

senā a hostile army. –sthānaṁ ind. in every place, everywhere. –srotas

ind. against the stream. –hastaḥ, –hastakaḥ a deputy, an agent,

substitute, proxy; āśritānāṁ bhṛtau svāmisevāyāṁ dharmasevane .

putrasyotpādane caiva na saṁti prati hastakāḥ H. 2. 33

“aprathatam” ; Impv. “prathantu” ; pf. “paprathatuḥ” ; mostly ā. pf.

“paprathe”, p. “paprathāna” ; aor. “prathiṣṭa”, p. “prathāna” ; fut.

“prathiṣyate, prathitā” Gr.), to spread, extend (intrans.; P. trans. and

intrans.), become larger or wider, increase &c. &c.; to spread abroad (as

a name, rumour &c.), become known or celebrated &c.; to come to light,

appear, arise ; to occur (to the mind) Caus. “prathayati” (rarely “-te”;

aor. “apaprathat” ; Subj. “paprathat” ; “paprathanta” ; “prathayi” , to

spread, extend, increase &c. &c. (“prathayati-tarām” ; ā. intr. ; to spread

abroad, proclaim, celebrate ; to unfold, disclose, reveal, show ; to extend

over i.e. shine upon, give light to (acc.)

prath or #pṛth cl.10.P. “prāthayati” or “parthayati”, to throw, cast; to

extend

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

prath I. 1 A. (prathate, prathita)

(1) To increase (wealth &c.).

(2) To spread abroad (as fame, rumour &c.); tathā yaśo’sya prathate

Ms. 11. 15.

(3) To become famous or celebrated; bhatastadakhyayā tīrthaṁ

pāvanaṁ bhuvi paprathe R. 15. 101; ato’smi loke vede ca prathitaḥ

puruṣottamaḥ Bg. 15. 18; Śi. 9 16; 15. 23; Ku. 5. 7; Me. 24; R. 5. 65; 9.

76.

(4) To appear, arise, come to light; śramo nu tāsāṁ madano nu

paprathe Ki. 8. 53.

(5) To occur (to mind). –II. 10 U. (prathayati-te, prathita)

(1) To spread abroad, proclaim; sajjanā eva sādhūnāṁ prathayaṁti

guṇotkaraṁ Dri. S. 12; Bk. 17. 107.

(2) To show, manifest, display, evince, indicate; paramaṁ vapuḥ

prathayatīva jayaṁ Ki. 6. 35; 5. 3; Śi. 10. 25; Ratn. 4. 13; S. 3. 15.

(3) To increase, enlarge, enhance, augment, stretch; Bh. 2. 45.

(4) To disclose.

(5) To spread, extend

(6) To throw, cast.

(rather Pass.; ep. and m.c. also “-ti” and “priyate, -ti”; pf. “pipriye”, p. “-

yāṇa” Subj. “piprayat”; Impv. “piprayasva” or “-prīhi” ; aor. “apraiṣīt”

Subj. “preṣat” ; “apreṣṭa” Gr.; fut. “preṣyati, -te, pretā” P. to please,

gladden, delight gratify, cheer, comfort, soothe, propitiate &c. &c.;

(mostly ā. “prīyate”) to be pleased or satisfied with, delight in, enjoy

(gen. instr. loc. or abl.) ; (ā.; ep. and m.c. also P. and “pri-“) to like, love,

be kind to (acc.) Caus. “prīṇayati” (“prāpayati” , “prāyayati” , to please,

delight gratify, propitiate &c.; to refresh, comfort Desid. “piprīṣati”, to

wish to please or propitiate Intens. “peprīyate, peprayīti, pepreti” Gr.

([Cf. Goth. ‘frijon’, ‘frijonds’; Germ. ‘friunt’, ‘freund’; Angl. Sax. ‘freond’;

Eng. friend; Slav. ‘prijati’; Lith. ‘pretelius’ &c.])

prī mfn. (ifc.) kind, delighted (see “adhaprī, kadha-prī, ghṛta-prī” &c.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

prī I. 9 U. (prīṇāti, prīṇīte, prīta)

(1) To please, delight, satisfy, gladden; prīṇātiyaḥ sucaritaiḥ pitaraṁ

sa putraḥ Bh. 2. 68; sasnuḥ pitṝn pipriyurāpagāsu Bk. 3. 38; 5. 104; 7. 64.

(2) To be pleased, take delight in; kaccin manaste prīṇāti vanavāse

Mb.

(3) To act kindly towards, show kindness towards.

(4) To be cheerful or gay. –Caus. (prīṇayati-te) To please, satisfy &c.

–II. 4 A. (prīyate, strictly a passive voice of the root prī)

(1) To be satisfied or pleased, be gratified; prakāmamaprīyata

yajvanāṁ priyaḥ Śi. 17; R. 15. 30; 19. 30; Y. 1. 245.

(2) To feel affection for, love.

(3) To assent, be satisfied. –III. 1 P. To please, gratify &c.

“bandhati, -te” ; cl.4. P. “badhyati” ; Impv. “badhāna” , “bandhāna” , “-

badhnīhi” , “bandha” ; pf. P. “babandha”, 3. pl. “bedhus” , “babandhus” ;

ā. “bedhe, -dhire” , “babandhe” Gr.; fut. “bhantsyati” &c., “bandhiṣyati, –

te” ; “banddhā” Gr.; aor. “abhāntsīt” Gr.; Prec. “badhyāt” ; inf.

“banddhum”, or “bandhitum” , “badhe” ind. p. “baddhvā” , “-dhvāya” , “-

badhya” ; “-bandham” , to bind, tie, fix, fasten, chain, fetter &c. &c.; to

bind round, put on (ā; later also P. “on one’s self”) &c.; to catch, take or

hold captive, met. = to attach to world or to sin ; to fix, direct, fasten,

rivet (eyes, ears or mind) on (loc. or inf.) ; to arrest, hold back, restrain,

suppress, stop, shut, close ; to bind a sacrificial victim, offer, sacrifice

(with dat. of the deity to whom it is presented) ; to punish, chastise ; to

join, unite, put together or produce anything in this way, e.g. fold (the

hands), clench (the fist), knit or bend (the eyebrows), arrange, assume

(a posture), set up (a limit), construct (a dam or a bridge), span, bridge

over (a river), conceive or contract (friendship or enmity), compose,

construct (a poem or verse) &c.; to form or produce in any way, cause,

effect, do, make, bear (fruit), strike (roots), take up (one’s abode) ; to

entertain, cherish, show, exhibit, betray (joy, resolution &c.) Pass.

“badhyate” (“-ti” , to be bound &c. &c.; (esp.) to be bound by the fetters

of existence or evil, sin again ; to be affected by i.e. experience, suffer

(instr.) Caus. “bandhayati” (aor. “ababandhat”), to cause to bind or

catch or capture, imprison &c. &c.; to cause to be built or constructed ;

to cause to be embanked or dammed up ; to bind together (also

“bādhayati”) Desid. “bibhantsati” Gr.: Intens. “bābanddhi, bābadhyate”

‘band’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘foedus’, ‘fides’; Lit. ‘bendras’; Goth. Angl. Sax.

‘bindan’; Germ. ‘binden’; Eng. ‘bind’.]

“-ti”; pf. P. “bubodha” ; Subj. id “bubodhati” ; ā. “bubudhe”, p.

“bubudhāna” ; aor. P. Subj. “bodhiṣat” ; Impv. “bodhi” ; ā. 3 pl.

“abudhram, -ran”; p. “budhāna” Subj. “budhanta” ; “-abhutsi” ; Prec. ā.

“bhutsīṣṭa” ; fut. “bhotsyati, -te” &c.; “boddhā” Gr.; ind. p. “buddhvā” ;

“-budhya” &c.; inf. “budhe” ; “budhi” ; “boddhum” &c.), to wake, wake

up, be awake &c. &c.; to recover consciousness (after a swoon) (aor.

Pass. “abodhi”); to observe, heed, attend to (with acc. or gen.) ; to

perceive, notice, learn, understand, become or be aware of or acquainted

with &c. &c.; to think of i.e. present a person (“with” instr.) ; to know to

be, recognize as (with two acc.) &c.; to deem, consider or regard as

(with two acc.) Pass. “budhyate” (aor. “abodhi”), to be awakened or

restored to consciousness; see above: Caus. “bodhayati, -te” (aor.

“abūbudhat”; Pass. “bodhyate”), to wake up, arouse, restore to life or

consciousness &c. &c.; to revive the scent (of a perfume) ; to cause (a

flower) to expand ; to cause to observe or attend, admonish, advise &c.

&c.; to make a person acquainted with, remind or inform of. impart or

communicate anything to (with two acc.) &c.: Desid. “bubhutsati, -te”

(Gr. also “bubodhiṣati, -te”, and “bubudhiṣati, -te”), to wish to observe,

desire to become acquainted with Desid. of Caus. see “bibodhayiṣu” and

“bubodhayiṣu”: Intens. “bobudhīti” (Gr. also “bobudhyate, boboddhi”), to

have an insight into, understand thoroughly (with acc.) ‘bud’; Gk. [greek]

for ([characters] ) in [characters] Slav. ‘budeti’, ‘budru’; Lith. ‘budeti’,

‘budrus’; Goth. ‘biudan’; Germ. ‘biotan’, ‘bieten’; Angl. Sax ‘beodan’; Eng.

‘bid’.]

budh mfn. (nom. “bhut”) awaking (cf. “uṣarbudh”)

mfn. intelligent, wise (cf. “a-budh”).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

budh 1 U., 4 A. (bodhati-te, budhyate, buddha)

(1) To know, understand, comprehend; kramādamuṁ nārada

ityabodhi saḥ Śi. 1. 3; 9. 24; nābuddha kalpadrumatāṁ vihāya jātaṁ

tamātmanyasipatravṛkṣaṁ R. 14. 48; yadi budhyate hariśiśuḥ

stanaṁdhayaḥ Bv. 1. 53.

(2) To perceive, notice, recognise, mark; hiraṇmayaṁ rhaṁsamabodhi

naiṣadhaḥ N. 1. 117; api laṁdhitamadhvānaṁ bubudhe na budhopamaḥ

R. 1. 47; 12. 39.

(3) To deem, regard, cansider, esteem &c.

(4) To heed, attend to.

(5) To think, reflect.

(6) To wake up, awake, rise from sleep; dadadapi

giramaṁtarbudhyate no manuṣyaḥ Śi. 11. 4; te ca prāpurudanvaṁtaṁ

bubudhe cādipūruṣaḥ R. 10. 6.

(7) To regain consciousness, to come to one’s senses; śanairabodhi

sugrīvaḥ so’luṁcītkarṇanāsikaṁ Bk. 15. 57.

(8) To advise, admonish. –Caus. (bodhayati-te)

(1) To cause to know, make known, inform, acquaint with.

(2) To teach, communicate, impart.

(3) To advise, admonish; bodhayaṁtaṁ hitāhitaṁ Bk. 8. 82; Bg. 10. 9.

(4) To revive, restore to life, bring to senses or consciousness.

(5) To remind, put in mind of; smarṣiyati tvāṁ na sa bodhito’pi san S.

4. 1.

(6) To wake up, rouse, excite (fig.); akāle bodhito bhrātrā R. 12. 81,

5. 75.

(7) To revive the scent (of a perfume).

(8) To cause to expand, open; madhuravā madhubodhitamādhavī Śi.

6. 20; savitā bodhayati paṁkajānyeva S. 5. 28.

(9) To signify, convey, indicate. –Desid. (bubu-bo-dhiṣati-te,

bubhutsate) To wish to know &c.

vavarha”; fut. “varkṣyati, varhiṣyati; varḍhā, varhitā”; aor. “barhīt,

avṛkṣat”; ind. p. “vriḍhvā, varhitvā, vṛhya, barham, varham”; Ved. inf.

“vṛhas”: Pass. “vṛhyate”; aor. “varhi”), to tear, pluck, root up (without a

prep. only with “mūlam” Caus. “barhayati” (see “ni-bṛh”): Desid.

“vivṛkṣati, vivarhiṣati” Gr.: Intens. “varīvarḍhi, varīvṛhyate”

bṛh or #bṛṁh cl.1.P. ( xvii, 85) “bṛṁhati” (also “-te” and “bṛhati” ; pf.

“babarha” ; p. “babṛhāṇa” , to be thick, grow great or strong, increase

(the finite verb only with a prep.): Caus. “bṛṁhayati, -te” (also written

“vṛ-“), to make big or fat or strong, increase, expand, further, promote ;

“barhayati” see “sam-bṛh”: Intens. “barbṛhat, barbṛhi” see “upa-bṛh”.

bṛh prayer. see “bṛhas-pati”.

bṛh or #bṛṁh (also written “vṛh” or “vṛṁh”). cl.1.P. ( xvii, 85) “bṛnhati”

(or “barhati”; 3. pl. pf. ā. “babṛiṁhire” , to roar, bellow, trumpet (said of

an elephant) &c.; also cl.10.P. ( xxxiii, 95) to speak; to shine.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bṛh 1. 6. P. (barhati, bṛhati)

(1) To grow, increase, expand.

(2) To roar. WITH ud 1. to lift, raise; Ms. 1. 14; Bk. 14. 88. –ni to

destroy, remove; Śi. 1. 29.

are supplied by “vac” cf. ; “brūmi” for “bravīmi” ; Subj. “bravas, -vat” ;

Impv. “brūhi”, ep. also “bravīhi, bruvadhvam; brūtāt” 7-i, 35 ; impf.

“abruvam” for “abravam” ; pr.p. ā. ep. “bruvamāṇa” for “bruvāṇa”; Prec.

2. pl. “brūyāsta” w.r. for “brūyās tat”), to speak, say, tell (either intrans.;

or with acc. of pers. or thing; or with acc. of thing and acc. dat. gen. or

loc. of person = to tell or relate anything to; with two acc. also = declare

or pronounce to be, call) &c. &c.; to speak about any person or thing

(acc. with or without “prati”, or “adhikṛtya”) &c.; to proclaim predict ; to

answer (either intrans. with “punar” or trans. with “praśnam”, “a

question”) ; (with “anyathā”) to speak or decide or judge wrongly ; (ā.,

rarely P.) to call or profess one’s self to be (nom., rarely with “iti”) ; (ā.)

to designate for one’s self, choose ; (ā.) to be told by itself tell itself (tell

its tale) 1 ‘mru’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

brū 2 U. (bravīti, brūte or āha; this root is defective in the non-

conjugational tenses, its forms being made up from vac)

(1) To say, tell, speak (with two acc.); tāṁ … brūyā evaṁ Me. 101;

rāmaṁ yathāsthitaṁ sarvaṁ bhrātā brūte sma vihvalaḥ Bk. 6. 8; or

māṇavakaṁdharmaṁ brūte Sk.; kiṁ tvāṁ prati brūmahe Bv. 1. 46.

(2) To say or speak about, refer to (a person or thing); ahaṁ tu

śakuṁtalāmadhikṛtya brabīmi S. 2.

(3) To declare, proclaim, publish, prove, indicate; bruvata hi phaleta

sādhavo na tu kaṁṭhena nijopayogitāṁ N. 2. 48; stanayugapariṇāhaṁ

maṁḍalābhyāṁ bravīti Ratn. 2. 13.

(4) To name, call, designate; chaṁdasi dakṣā ye

kavayastanmaṇimadhyaṁ te bruvate Śrut. 15.

(5) To answer; brūhi me praśnān.

(6) To call or profess one self to be. –WITH anu to say, speak,

declare. –nis to explain, derive. –pra to say, speak, tell; Bk 8. 85. –prati

to speak in reply, answer or reply; pratyabravīccainaṁ R. 2. 42. –vi 1. to

say, speak. –2. to speak falsely or wrongly.

“babhāja” ā. “bheje” &c.; 2. sg. “babhaktha” ; “bhejitha” ; aor. P. 2. 3.

sg. “abhāk” ; “abhākṣīt, -kṣus” ; Subj. “bhakṣat” ; ā. “abhakṣi, -kta” &c.;

Prec. ā. “bhakṣīya” ; 3. sg. “-kṣīṣṭa” ; “-kṣīta” ; fut. “bhakṣyati, -te” &c.;

“bhajiṣyati, -te” &c.; “bhaktā” Gr.; inf. “bhaktum” &c.; “bhajitum” ; ind.

p. “bhaktvā” &c., “-tvāya” ; “-bhajya” and “-bhājam” , to divide,

distribute, allot or apportion to (dat. or gen.), share with (instr.) &c. &c.;

(ā.) to grant, bestow, furnish, supply ; ā. (rarely P.) to obtain as one’s

share, receive as (two acc.), partake of, enjoy (also carnally), possess,

have (acc., Ved. also gen.) ; (ā., rarely P.) to turn or resort to, engage in,

assume (as a form), put on (garments), experience, incur, undergo, feel,

go or fall into (with acc., esp. of abstract noun e.g. “bhītim”, to feel

terror; “nidrām”, to fall asleep; “maunam”, to become silent) &c.; to

pursue, practise, cultivate ; to fall to the lot or share of (acc.) &c.; to

declare for, prefer, choose (e.g. as a servant) ; to serve, honour, revere,

love, adore &c.: Caus. “bhājayate, -te” (aor. “abībhajuḥ” , “ababhājat”

Gr.), to divide ; to deal out, distribute ; to cause any one (acc.) to

partake of or enjoy (acc. or gen.) ; to put to flight, pursue, chase, drive

into (acc.) ; to cook, dress (food) Desid. “bibhakṣati, -te” (cf. “bhikṣ”):

Intens. “bābhajyate, bābhakti”, Gṛ. [Cf. Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘fagus’; Goth.

Old S. ‘bok’; Germ. ‘Buch’, ‘Buchstabe’; Eng. ‘buck-‘, ‘beech’.]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bhaj I. 1 U. (bhajati-te but usually Atm. only; babhāja, bheje, abhākṣīt,

abhakta, bhakṣyāti-te, bhakta)

(1)

(a) To share, distribute, divide; bhajeran paitṛkaṁ rikthaṁ Ms. 9.

104; na tatputrairmajetsārdhaṁ 209, 119.

(b) To assign, allot, apportion; gāyatrīmagnaye’bhajat Ait. Br.

(2) To obtain for oneself, share in, partake of; pitryaṁ vā bhajate

śīlaṁ Ms. 10. 59.

(3) To accept, receive; Māl. 5. 25.

(4)

(a) To resort to, betake oneself to, have recourse to; śilātalaṁ

bheje K. 179; mātarlakṣmi bhajasva kaṁcidaparaṁ Bh. 3. 64; na

kaścidvarṇanāmapathamapakṛṣṭopi bhajate S. 5. 10; Bv. 1. 83; R. 17. 28.

(b) To practise, follow, observe; bheje dharmamanāturaḥ R. 1. 21;

Mu. 3. 10.

(5) To enjoy, possess, have, suffer, experience, entertain; vidhurapi

bhajatetarāṁ kalaṁkaṁ Bv. 1. 74; na bhejire bhīmaviṣeṇa bhītiṁ Bh. 2.

80; vyaktiṁ bhajaṁtyāpagāḥ S. 7. 8; abhitaptamayopi mārdavaṁ bhajate

kaiva kathā śarīriṣu R. 8. 43; Māl. 3. 9; U. 1. 35.

(6) To wait or attend upon, serve; R. 2. 23; Pt. 1. 181; Mk. 1. 32.

(7) To adore, honour, worship (as a god).

(8) To choose, select, perfer, accept; saṁtaḥ

parīkṣyānyataradbhajaṁte M. 1. 2.

(9) To enjoy carnally; Pt. 4. 50. (10) To be attached or devoted to; Pt.

1. 35.

(11) To take possession of.

(12) To fall to the lot of any one.

(13) To grant, bestow.

(14) To supply, furnish (Ved.).

(15) To favour.

(16) To decide in favour of, declare for.

(17) To love, court (affection).

(18) To apply oneself to, be engaged in.

(19) To cook, dress (food). (20) To employ, engage. (The meanings

of this root are variously modified according to the noun with which it is

connected: –e. g. nidrāṁ bhaj to go to sleep; mūrchāṁ bhaj to swoon;

bhāvaṁ bhaj to show love for &c. &c.). –Caus.

(1) To divide.

(2) To put to flight, pursue.

(3) To cook, dress. –II. 10 U. (bhājayati-te, regarded by some as the

caus. of bhaj I)

(1) To cook.

(2) To give.

or “bibhiyāt” ; Pot. 3. pl. “bibhyeyuḥ” ; impf. 3. pl. “abibhayuḥ” ; ep. also

ā. 1. sg. “bibhye” and and P. 3. sg. “bibhyati” pl. “bibhyanti”; Ved. also

cl.1. A. “bhayate”, and accord, to P. “bhāyayati”; pf. “bibhāya”, 3. pl.

“bibhyuḥ” &c. &c.; “bībhāya” ; “bibhayāṁ cakara” cf. ; aor. “abhaiṣīt, –

ṣma, -ṣuḥ” &c., 2. sg. “bhaiṣīs” , “bhais” &c., esp. in “mābhais”, “do not

be afraid”; once for pl. = “mā bhaiṣṭa” ; “bhes” ; “bhema” ā. “bhiyāna” ,;

fut. “bhetā” Gr.; cond, “abheṣyat” ; inf. “bhiyase” ; “bhetum” &c.), to

fear, be afraid of (abl. or gen., rarely instr, or acc.) &c. &c.; to fear for,

be anxious about (abl.) Pass. “bhīyate”, aor, “abhāyi” Gr.: Caus.

“bhīṣayate” ( &c.; cf. , “bhīṣayati” (; once m.c. “bhiṣ-” ; p. “bhīṣayāṇa” ;

aor. “bībhiṣaḥ” , “-ṣathāḥ” , “bhāyayati, -te” ( 1-3, 68 ; Pot. “bhāyayes”

61; v.l. “bhīṣayes”; aor “bībhayat, abībhayanta” ; ind. p. “-bhāyya” ,

“bhāpayate” ( 6-1, 56 , to terrify, put in a fright, intimidate &c. &c.:

Desid. “bibhīṣati” Gr.: Intens. “bebhīyate, bebhayīti, bebheti” “bhyas”;

Lith. ‘bijotis’; Slav. ‘bojati’; Germ. ‘biben’, ‘beben’.]

bhī f. fear, apprehension, fright, alarm, dread of (abl. loc. acc. with

“prati”, or comp.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bhī 3 P. (bibheti, bibhāya-bibhayāṁcakāra, abhaiṣīt, bheṣyati, bhīta)

(1) To fear, dread, be afraid of; mṛtyorbibheṣi kiṁ ba la na sa bhītaṁ

vimuṁcati; rāvaṇādvibhyatiṁ bhṛśaṁ Bk. 8. 70; Śi. 3. 45.

(2) To be anxious or solicitous about (A.) –Caus. (bhāyayati) To

frighten (any one) with anything; kuṁcikayainaṁ bhāyayati Sk.;

(bhāpayate, bhīṣayate) to frighten, terrify, intimidate; muṁḍo bhāpayate

Sk.; stanitena bhīṣayitvā dhārāhastaiḥ parāmṛśasi Mk. 5. 28.

bhī f. Fear, dread, alarm, fright, terror; abhīḥ ‘fearless’ R. 15. 8;

vapuṣmān vītabhīrvāgmī dūto rājñaḥ praśasyate Ms. 7. 64.

“bhokṣyati” and “-ktā” Gr.; really only pr. stem aor. “-abubhojīs” and ind.

p. “-bhujya” after “nir” and, “pari”; cf. also “bhujam” in “bhujaṁ-ga” and

“bhujaṁgama”), to bend, curve; (?) to sweep (cf. 1. “bhuji”) Pass.

“bhujyate”, to be bent down or disheartened ‘fugio’; Goth. ‘biugan’,

‘baugjan’ (?); Germ. ‘biogan’, ‘biegen’; Angl. Sax. ‘bugan’; Eng. ‘bow’.]

bhuj see “tri-bhuj”.

bhuj cl.7.P.ā. ( xxix, 17) “bhunakti, bhuṅkte” (rarely cl.6.P. ā. “bhuṇati, –

te” ; 3. pl. ā. “bhuṇjate” ; Pot. P. “bhuṇjīyāt” ; pf. ā. “bubhuje, -jmahe, –

jrire” ; 3 pl. P. “-juḥ” ; aor. “abhaukṣīt, abhnkta” Gr.; “bhojam, bhojate,

bhujema” ; “bhukṣiṣīya” ; fut. “bhokṣyati, -te” &c.; “bhoktā” ; inf.

“bhojase, bhujam, bhuje” “bhoktum” &c.; ind. p. “bhuktvā” or

“bhuṅktvā” to enjoy, use, possess, (esp.) enjoy a meal, eat, eat and

drink, consume (mostly ā.; in Ved. generally with instr., later with acc.)

&c. &c.; to enjoy (carnally) ; to make use of. utilize, exploit &c.; (with

“pṛthivīm, mahīm” &c.) to take possession of, rule, govern &c.; to suffer,

experience, undergo, be requited or rewarded for (acc.) or at the hands

of (gen.) &c. &c.; (P.) to be of use or service to (acc.) ; to pass, live

through, last (a time) ; (in astron.) to pass through, fulfil Pass.

“bhujyate” (aor. “abhoji”), to be enjoyed or eaten or possessed or made

use of &c.: Caus. “bhojayati” (“te-“, m.c.; cf. ; once “bhuṇjāpayati” v.l.;

aor. “abūbhujat, -jata” Gr.), to cause to enjoy or eat, feed with (two acc.

or acc. of pers. and instr. of thing; cf. &c.; &c.; to use as food Desid.

“bubhukṣati” (once), “-te”, to wish to eat, be hungry ; to wish to enjoy or

partake of (cf. “bubhukṣā, -kṣita, -kṣu”): Intens. “bobhujyate”, to be

eaten frequently ; “bobhokti” and “bobhujīti”, to eat or enjoy frequently

Gr. ([Cf. Lat. ‘fungor’.])

bhuj f. enjoyment, profit, advantage, possession or use of (gen.)

(“bhuje”, also as infin.)

bhuj m. an enjoyer, eater (said of Agni)

bhuj m. mfn. (ifc.) enjoying (also carnally), eating, consuming, partaking

of, possessing, ruling and o. (with words meaning “earth” – “king”; cf.

“kṣitibh-” &c.)

bhuj m. enjoying the reward of. suffering for (“kilbiṣa-bh-“)

bhuj m. passing, through, fulfilling (“vyakta-bh-“)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bhuj I. 6 P. (bhujati, bhugna)

(1) To bend.

(2) To curve, make crooked. –II. 7 U. (bhunakti-bhuṁkte, bhukta)

(1) To eat, devour, consume (Atm.); śayananastho na bhuṁjīta Ms. 4.

74; 3. 146; Bk. 14. 92; Bg. 2. 5.

(2) To enjoy, use, possess (property, land &c.); V. 3. 1; Ms. 8. 146; Y.

2. 24.

(3) To enjoy carnally (Atm.); sadayaṁ bubhuje mahābhujaḥ R. 8. 7,

4. 7, 15. 1, 18. 4; surūpaṁ vā kurūpaṁ vā pumānityeva bhuṁjate Ms. 9.

14.

(4) To rule, govern, protect, guard (Paras.); rājyaṁ nyāsamivābhunak

R. 12. 18; ekaḥ kṛsnāṁ (dharitrīṁ) nagaraparighaprāṁśuba hurbhunakti

S. 2. 15.

(5) To suffer, endure, experionce; vṛddho naro duḥkhaśatāni bhuṁkte

Sk.

(6) To pass, live through (as time).

(7) (In astr.) To pass through, fulfil. –Pass.

(1) To be enjoyed or eaten.

(2) To be possessed.

(3) To be brought under the influence of. –Caus. (bhojayati-te) To

cause to eat, feed with. –Desid. (bubhukṣati-te) To wish to eat &c.

bhuj a.

(1) (At the end of comp.) Eating, enjoying, suffering, ruling,

governing; svadhābhuj, hutabhuj, pāpa-, kṣiti-, nahī- &c.

(2) Useful, serviceable. –f.

(1) Enjoyment.

(2) Profit, advantage.

ūtha” or “-ūvitha” cf. ; “babhūyās, -yār, babhūtu” ; ā. “babhūve” or

“bubhūve” ; cf. below; aor. “abhūt, -ūvan”; Impv. “bodhi” [cf. “budh”],

“bhūtu” ; aor. or impf. “abhuvat, bhuvat, bhuvāni” ; Prec. “bhūyāsam”, 2.

3. sg. “-yās” ; “bhūyāt” ; “bhūyiṣṭhās” ; “bhaviṣāt” [?] ; “abhaviṣṭa,

bhaviṣīṣta”. Gr.; fut. “bhaviṣyati”, ep. also “-te” and 2. pl. “-ṣyadhvam;

bhavitā” &c.; inf. “bhuve, -bhve, bhūṣaṇi” ; “bhavitum, -tos” ; ind. p.

“bhūtvā; bhūtvī” ; “-bhūya” &c.; “-bhūyam, -bhavam” , to become, be

(with nom, or adv. or indecl. words ending in “ī” or “ū” cf. “kṛṣṇī-bhū”

&c.), arise, come into being, exist, be found, live, stay, abide, happen,

occur &c. &c. (often used with participles and other verbal nouns to

make periphrastical verbal forms; with a fut. p. = to be going or about to

e.g. “anuvakṣyan bhavati”, he is going to recite ; the fut. of “bhū” with a

pf. p. = a fut. pf. e.g. “kṛtavān bhaviṣyasi”, you will have done ; the pf. P.

“babhūva” after the syllable “ām” is put for the pf. of verbs of the 10.cl.

&c. [cf. 1. “as” and 1. “kṛ”]; the ā. appears in this meaning xiv. 46;

observe also “bhavati” with a fut. tense, it is possible that, e.g. “bhavati

bhavān yājayiṣyati”, it is possible that you will cause a sacrifice to be

performed ; “bhavet”, may be, granted, admitted on P. iii, 2. 114;

“bhavatu” id., well, good, enough of this ; “iticed bhavet”, if this question

should be asked ; “kva tad bhavati”, what is to become of this, it is quite

useless ; with “na” = to cease to exist, perish, die &c.; with “iha na”, not

to be born on earth ; with “śata-dhā”, to fall into a hundred pieces ; with

“dūrataḥ”, to keep aloof. ; with “manasi” or “cetasi” and gen., to occur to

the mind of any one ; id. with gen. alone ; to fall to the share or become

the property of, belong to (cf. “esse alicujus”; “with gen., rarely dat. or

loc. accord. to also with “pari” or “prati” and preceding acc.) &c. &c.; to

be on the side of, assist (with gen. or “-tas”) 1301 (cf. ; to serve for,

tend or conduce to (with dat. of thing) &c. &c. (with “phalāya”. to bear

fruit ; to be occupied with or engaged in, devote one’s self to (with loc.) ;

to thrive or prosper in (instr.), turn out well, succeed ; to be of

consequence or useful ; (also ā. to fall, or get into, attain to, obtain ;

(with “idam”) to obtain it i.e. be successful or fortunate Pass. “bhūyate”

(or “-ti” ; aor. “abhāvi”) sometimes used impers. e.g. “yair bhaviṣyate”,

by whom it will be existed i.e. who will be Caus. “bhāvayati” (rarely “-

te”; aor. “abībhavat” Gr.; inf. “bhāvitum” ; Pass. “bhāvyate” &c. , to

cause to be or become, call into existence or life, originate, produce,

cause, create ; to cherish, foster, animate, enliven, refresh, encourage,

promote, further &c.; to addict or devote one’s self to, practise (acc.) ;

to subdue, control ; (also ā. to obtain ; to manifest, exhibit, show, betray

; to purify ; to present to the mind, think about, consider, know,

recognize as or take for (two acc.) &c.; to mingle, mix, saturate, soak,

perfume (cf. “bhāvita”, p.755, col.1): Desid. of Caus. “bibhāvayiṣati” ( 7

-4, 80 , to wish to cause to be &c. Desid. “bubhūṣati” (“-te”), to wish or

strive to become or be &c. &c.; (with “kṣipram”), to strive to be quickly

possessed ; to want to get on, strive to prosper or succeed ; to want to

have, care for, strive after, esteem, honour ; to want to take revenge

Intens, “bobhavīti, bobhavati, bobhoti, bibhūyate”, to be frequently, to be

in the habit of ; to be transformed into (acc.) ; (with “tiraḥ”), to keep

anything (instr.) secret ‘bu’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘fuit’, ‘fuat’ &c.; Slav. ‘byti’;

Lith. ‘buti’; Germ. ‘bim’, ‘bim’; Angl. Sax. ‘beo’; Eng. ‘be’.]

bhū mfn. becoming, being, existing, springing, arising (ifc.; cf. “akṣi-,

giri-, citta-, padmabhū” &c.)

bhū m. N. of Viṣṇu ()

bhū m. of an Ekāha

bhū f. the act of becoming or arising

bhū f. the place of being, space, world or universe (also pl.)

bhū f. the earth (as constituting one of the 3 worlds, and therefore a

symbolical N. for the number “one”) &c.

bhū f. one of the three Vyāhṛitis (see “bhuvas, bhūr”, pp. 760 and 763)

bhū f. earth (as a substance), ground, soil, land, lauded property

bhū f. floor, pavement

bhū f. a place, spot, piece of ground &c. &c.

bhū f. the base of any geometrical figure

bhū f. object, matter (see “vivādasaṁvāda-bhū”)

bhū f. a term for the letter “l”

bhū f. a sacrificial fire

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bhū I 1 P. (rarely A.) (bhavati, babhūva, abhūt, bhaviṣyati, bhavituṁ,

bhūta)

(1) To be, become; kathamevaṁ bhavennāma; asyāḥ kimabhavat Māl

9. 29 ‘what has become her fate,’ ‘what has become of her’; U. 3. 27;

yadbhāvi tadbhavatu U. 3 ‘come what may’; so duḥkhito bhavati, hṛṣṭo

bhavati &c.

(2) To be born or produced; yadapatyaṁ bhavedasyāṁ Ms. 9. 127;

bhāgyakrameṇa hi dhanāni bhavaṁti yāṁti Mk. 1. 13.

(3) To spring or proceed from, arise; krodhādbhavati saṁmohaḥ Bg.

2. 63, 14. 17.

(4) To happen, take place, occur; nātatāyivadhe doṣo haṁturbhavati

kaścana Ms. 8. 381; yadi saṁśayo bhavet &c.

(5) To live, exist; abhūdabhūtapūrvaḥ … rājā ciṁtāmaṇirnāma Vās.;

abhūnnṛpo vibudhasakhaḥ paraṁtapaḥ Bk. 1. 1.

(6) To be alive or living, breathe; tvamidānīṁ na bhaviṣyasi S. 6; āḥ

cārudattahataka ayaṁ na bhavasi Mk. 4; durātman prahara nanvayaṁ na

bhavasi Mal. 5 (‘thou art a dead man’, thou shalt breathe no longer); Bg.

11. 32.

(7) To remain or be in any state or condition, fare; bhavān sthale

kathaṁ bhaviṣyati Pt. 2.

(8) To stay, abide; remain, U. 3. 37.

(9) To serve, do; idaṁ pādodakaṁ bhaviṣyati S. 1. (10) To be possible

(usually with a future tense in this sense); bhavati bhavān yājayiṣyati Sk.

(11) To lead or tend to, conduce to, bring about (with dat.); vātāya

kapilā vidyut … pītā bhavati sasyāya durbhikṣāya sitā bhavet Mbh.;

sukhāya tajjanmadinaṁ babhūva Ku. 1. 23; saṁsmṛtirbhava

bhavatyabhavāya Ki. 18. 27; na tasyā rucaye babhūva R. 6. 44.

(12) To be on the side of, assist; devā arjunato’bhavan

(13) To belong or pertain to (often expressed by ‘have’); tasya ha

śataṁ jāyā babhūvuḥ Ait. Br.; Ms. 6. 39.

(14) To be engaged in, be occupied (with loc.); caraṇakṣālane kṛṣṇo

brāhmaṇānāṁ svayaṁ hyabhūt Mb.

(15) To conduct oneself, behave.

(16) Ved. To be prosperous, succeed. Used with a preceding noun or

adjective bhū serves to form verbs in the sense of ‘becoming what it

previously is not’ or ‘becoming’ in general; śvetībhū to become white;

kṛṣṇībhū to become black; payodharībhūta ‘becoming or serving the

purpose of teats’; so kṣapaṇībhū to be or become a mendicant;

praṇidhībhū to act the spy; ārdrībhū to melt; bhasmībhū to be reduced to

ashes; viṣayībhū to form the subject of; so ekamatībhū; taruṇībhū &c. &c.

Note–The senses of bhū may be variously modified according to the

adverbs with which it is connected; e. g. punarbhū to marry again; a

virbhū to appear, arise, to be evident or clear; see āvis; tirobhū to

disappear; prādurbhū to arise, be visible, appear; agrebhū to be in front,

take the lead; aṁtarbhū to be absorbed or included;

ojasyaṁtarbhavaṁtyanye K. P. 8; doṣābhū to grow evening or dusk-time;

anyathā bhū to be otherwise, be changed; na me vacanamanyathā

bhavitumarhati S. 4; puro bhū to come forward, stand forth; mithyā bhū

to turn out false; vṛthā bhū to become useless &c. &c.). –Caus.

(bhāvayati-te)

(1) To cause to be or become, call into existence, call into being.

(2) To cause, produce, effect.

(3) To manifest, display, exhibit.

(4) To foster, cherish, support, preserve, enliven; punaḥ sṛjati varṣāṇi

bhagavān bhāvayanprajāḥ Mb.; devān bhāvayatānena te devā

bhāvayaṁtu vaḥ . parasparaṁ bhāvayaṁtaḥ śreyaḥ paramavāpsyatha Bg.

3. 11; Bk. 16. 27.

(5) To think or reflect, consider, fancy, imagine.

(6) To look upon, consider or regard as; arthamanarthaṁ bhāvaya

nityaṁ Moha M. 2.

(7) To prove, substantiate, establish; Y. 2. 11.

(8) To purify.

(9) To get, obtain. (10) To mingle or mix.

(11) To change or transform into.

(12) To soak, steep.

(13) To devote or addict oneself to.

(14) To convince.

(15) To perfume, scent. –Desid. (bubhūṣati) To wish to be or become

&c. –II. 1 U. (bhavati-te) To get, obtain. –III. 10 A. (bhāvayate) To

obtain, gain. –IV. 1 U. (bhāvayati-te)

(1) To think, reflect.

(2) To mix, mingle.

(3) To be purified (connected with caus. of bhū q. v. above).

bhū a. (At the end of comp.) Being, existing, becoming, springing from,

arising or produced from, &c; cittabhū, ātmabhū, kamalabhū, manobhū

&c. –m.

(1) An epithet of Viṣṇu.

(2) The sacrificial fire.

(“bibharti” only , “bibhṛte”; cl.2. P. “bharti” P. “bibhrat”, q.v.; ā.

“bibhrāṇa” with act. meaning , “bibhramāṇa” with pass. meaning ; pf.

“jabhāra, jabharat; jabhre, ajabhartana” ; “babhāra, babhṛma” &c.; p.

“babhrāṇa” with pass. meaning ; “bibharāmbabhūva” , “-rām-āsa” ; aor.

“abhār” ; “bhartam, bhṛtam” ; “abhṛta” Gr.; “abhārṣam” Subj. “bharṣat” ;

“abhāriṣam” ; Prec. “bhriyāsam””, “-yāt” ; fut. “bhariṣyati” cond.

“abhariṣyat” ; “bhartā” ; inf. “bhartum, bhartave, bhartavai”, Ved.;

“bharadhyai” ; ind. p. “-bhṛtya” &c.), to bear, carry, convey, hold (“on” or

“in” loc.) &c. &c.; to wear i.e. let grow (hair, beard, nails) &c.; to

balance, hold in equipoise (as a pair of scales) ; to bear i.e. contain,

possess, have, keep (also “keep in mind”) &c. &c.; to support, maintain,

cherish, foster ; to hire, pay ; to carry off or along (ā. “bharate”, “for

one’s self” i.e. gain, obtain, or = ‘ferri’ “to be borne along”) ; to bring,

offer, procure, grant, bestow &c. &c.; to endure, experience, suffer,

undergo ; to lift up, raise (the voice or a sound; ā. “bharate”, also “to

rise, be heard”) ; to fill (the stomach) ; (with “garbham”) to conceive,

become pregnant (cf. under “dhṛ”) ; (with “kṣitim”) to take care of, rule,

govern ; (with, “ājṇām”) to submit to, obey ; (with “ūrjām”) to exert,

employ Pass. “bhriyate” (ep. also “-ti”; aor. “abhāri”), to be borne &c.

&c. &c.: Caus. “bhārayati” (aor. “abībharat”), to cause to bear &c.; to

engage for hire Desid. “bubhūrṣati” (, “bibhariṣati” ( 8-2, 49), to wish to

bear or support or maintain: Intens. “baribharti” (3. pl. “-bhrati” du.

“jarbhṛtaḥ”), “barībharti” (), to bear repeatedly or continually, carry hither

and thither. [Cf. Zd. ‘bar’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘fero’; Slav. ‘brati’; Goth.

‘bairan’; Germ. ‘beran’, ‘ge-baren’; Eng. ‘bear’.]

bhṛ (1. see p.764, col.3), in comp. for “bhrū”.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bhṛ 1 3. U. (bharati-te; bibharti, bibhṛte, babhāra babhre,

bibharāṁcakāra-cakre, abhārṣīṁt-abhṛta, bhariṣyati-te, bhartuṁ, bhṛta;

pass. bhriyate; desid. bibhariṣati-te or bubhūrṣati-te)

(1) To fill; jaṭharaṁ ko na bibharti kevalaṁ Pt. 1. 22.

(2) To fill, pervade, fill with; abhārṣīdadhvaninā lokān Bk. 15. 24.

(3) To bear, support, uphold, bear up; dhuraṁ dharitryā

bibharāṁbabhūva R. 18. 45; kūrmo bibharti dharaṇīṁ khalu pṛṣṭhakena

Ch. P. 50; Bk. 17. 16

(3) To maintain, foster, cherish, protect, take care of, nourish;

daridrān bhara kauṁteya mā prayaccheśvare dhanaṁ H. 1. 15.

(4) To bear, have, possess; siṁdhorbabhāra salilaṁ śayanīyalakṣmīṁ

Ki. 8. 57; piśunajanaṁ khalu bibhrati kṣitīṁdrāḥ Bv. 1. 74; balitrayaṁ

cāru babhāra bālā Ku 1. 39; iṁdordainyaṁ

tvadatusaraṇakliṣṭakāṁterbibharti Me. 84; S. 2. 4.

(5) To wear; bibhrajjaṭāmaṁḍalaṁ S. 7. 11; 6. 5; vivāhakautukaṁ

lalitaṁ bibhrata eva (tasya) R. 8. 1, 10. 10; jaṭāśca bibhṛyānnityaṁ Ms.

6. 6.

(6) To feel, experience, suffer, endure (joy, sorrow &c.);

bhāvaśuddhisahitairmudaṁ jano nāṭakairiva babhāra bhojanaiḥ Śi. 14. 50;

saṁtrāsamabibhaḥ śakraḥ Bk. 17. 108; S. 7. 21.

(7) To confer, bestow, give, produce; yauvane sadalaṁkārāḥ śobhāṁ

bibhrati subhruvaḥ Subhāṣ.

(8) To keep, hold, retain (as in memory).

(9) To hire; Ms. 11. 62; Y. 3. 235. (10) To bring or carry.

(11) To take away, transport.

(12) Ved. To acquire, gain. (garbhaṁ bhṛ to become pregnant,

conceive; kṣitiṁ bhṛ to rule the earth; jaṭāṁ bhṛ to wear matted hair

&c.).

babhrājire”and”bhrejire” Gr.; aor. “abhrāṭ, abhrāji” ; “abhrājiṣṭa” Gr.;

Prec. “bhrājyāsam” ; fut. “bhrājitā” Gr.; “bhrājiṣyate” ; inf. “bhrājitum” ,

to shine, beam, sparkle, glitter &c. &c.; (with “na”), to be of no account

Caus. “bhrājayati” (aor. “ababhrājat” and “abibhrajat”), to cause to shine

or glitter, illuminate, irradiate Desid. “bibhrājiṣate” Gr.; Intens.

“bābhrājyate” or “bābhrāṣṭi” “bhṛgu”; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘fulgere’, ‘flamma’

for ‘flag-ma’ &c.; Lith. ‘blizgu’; Germ. ‘bleichen’; Eng. ‘bleach’.]

bhrāj f. (nom. “bhrāL”) light, lustre, splendour

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bhrāj 1 A. (bhrājate) To shine, gleam. flash, glitter; rurujurbhrejire

pheṇurbahudhā harirākṣasāḥ Bk. 14. 78; 15. 24. –Caus. To illuminate,

irradiate. –WITH vi to shine brilliantly or intensely; bibhrājase

makaraketanamarcayantī Ratn. 1. 21.